You are on page 1of 543
a i AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002 An American National Standard Structural Welding Code— Steel American Welding Society Key Words — Allowable stress, cyclically loaded AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002 structures, structural detail, statically ‘An American National Standard loaded structures, stel welding, stud ‘welding, tubular structures, welded Approved by Fa Nee ae akatanais ‘American National Standards Institute August 31, 2001 Structural Welding Code— Steel 18th Edition Supersedes AWS D1.1:2000 Prepated by AWS D1 Committee on Structural Welding Under the Direction of AWS Technical Activities Committee Approved by AWS Board of Directors Abstract ‘This code covers the welding requirements for any type of welded structure made from the commonly used carbon and Jow-alloy constructional steels. Sections 1 through 8 constitute a body of rules for the regulation of welding in steel construction. There are twelve mandatory and fifteen nonmandatory annexes in this code, A Commentary of the code is included with the document, American Welding Society 550 NW. LeJeune Road, Miami, Florida 33126 Statement on Use of AWS American National Standards Alll standards (codes, specifications, recommended practices, methods, classifications, and guides) of the American ‘Welding Society are voluntary consensus standards that have been developed in accordance with the rules of the American National Standards Institute. When AWS standards are either incorporated in, or made part of, documents that are included in federal or state laws and regulations, or the regulations of other governmental bodies, their provisions carry the full legal authority of the statute. In such cases, any changes in those AWS standards must be approved by the ‘governmental body having statutory jurisdiction before they can become a part of those laws and regulations. In all ceases, these standards carry the full legal authority of the contract or other document that invokes the AWS standards. ‘Where this contractual relationship exists, changes in or deviations from requirements of an AWS standard must be by ‘agreement between the contracting parties. International Standard Book Number: 0-87171-659-3, American Welding Society, 550 N.W. Leleune Road, Miami, FL 33126 © 2002 by American Welding Society. All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America AWS American National Standards are developed through a consensus standards development process that brings together volunteers representing varied viewpoints and interests to achieve consensus. While AWS administers the process and establishes rules to promote fairness in the development of consensus, it does not independently test, evaluate, or verify the accuracy of any information or the soundness of any judgments contained in its standards, AWS disclaims liability for any injury to persons or to property, or other damages of any nature whatsoever, whether spe- cial, indirect, consequential or compensatory, directly or indirectly resulting from the publication, use of, or refiance on this standard, AWS also makes no guaranty or warranty as tothe accuracy or completeness of any information published herein. In issuing and making this standard available, AWS is not undertaking to render professional or other services for or on behalf of any person ot entity. Nor is AWS undertaking to perform any duty owed by any person or entity to someone clse, Anyone using these documents should rely on his or her own independent judgment or, as appropriate, seek the advice ‘of a competent professional in determining the exercise of reasonable care in any given circumstances, ‘This standard may be superseded by the issuance of new editions, Users should ensure that they have the latest edition Publication of this standard does not authorize infringement of any patent. AWS disclaims liability forthe infringement ‘of any patent resulting from the use or reliance on this standard, Finally, AWS does not monitor, police, or enforce compliance with this standard, nor does it have the power to do so. On occasion, text, tables, or figures are printed incorrectly (errata). Such errata, when discovered, are shown on the American Welding Society web page (www.aws.org) under “Technical” in the Departments column, Official interpretations of any of the technical requirements of this standard may be obtained by sending a request, in writ- ing, to the Managing Director Technical Services, American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126 (ee Annex F), With regard to technical inquiries made concerning AWS standards, oral opinions on AWS standards may be rendered. However, such opinions represent only the personal opinions of the particular individuals giving them. These individuals do not speak on behalf of AWS, nor do these oral opinions constitute official or unofficial opinions or interpre- tations of AWS. In addition, oral opinions are informal and should not be used as a substitute for an official interpretation. This standard is subject to revision at any time by the AWS D1 Committee on Structural Welding. It must be reviewed every five years and iffnot revised, it must be either reapproved or withdrawn. Comments (recommendations, additions, ‘or deletions) and any pertinent data that may be of use in improving this standard are required and should be addressed to AWS Headquarters, Such comments will receive careful consideration by the AWS D1 Committee on Structural Welding. and the author of the comments will be informed of the Committee's response to the comments, Guests are invited t0 attend all meetings of the AWS D1 Commitee on Structural Welding to express their comments verbally. Procedures for appeal of an adverse decision concerning all such comments are provided in the Rules of Operation of the Technical Activities Committee, A copy of these Rules can be obtained from the American Welding Society, 550 N.W. LeJeune Road, Miami, FL 33126, Photocopy Rights Authorization to photocopy items for internal, personal, or educational classroom use only, or the internal, personal, or educational classroom use only of specific clients, is granted by the American Welding Society (AWS) provided that the appropriate fee is paid to the Copyright Clearance Center, 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, Tel: 978-750-8400; online: htp://www.copyright.com, Personnel AWS D1 Committee on Structural Welding D.L. McQuaid, Chair —D, L, MeQuaid and Associates D.D. Rager, Vice Chair Rager Consulting, Ine D.K. Miller, Vice Chair The Lineoln Electric Co, A.W. Sindel, Vice Chair Sindel and Associates HH. Campbell IH, Secretary American Welding Society *W.G, Alexander Consultant NB. Altebrando Hardesty and Hanover A. Anderson —_Aleotec Wire Co. F.G.Armao The Lincoln Electric Co. RE. Avery Nickel Development Institute D.K.Baird Argonne National Laboratory EM. Beck Law Engineering and Environmental Services, Ine. “PR Beckmann Consultant RM Bent Bent Engineering EL. Bickford J, Ray MeDermott, Ine. RD. Block Diamond Power International, Ine. 0.1, Blodgett The Lincoln Electric Co. R. Bonneau Canadian Welding Bureau F.C. Breismeister Bechtel Corp. CR Briden Consultant B.M. Butler Walt Disney World Co. *S.Camo Weidinger Associates, In. J.J. Cecilio Consultant HA. Chambers TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division CB. Champney _ TRW Nelson Stud Welding Division L.E.Collins Team Industries, ne. S. Cook Michigan Department of Transportation R.B.Corbit Amer Gen SL. Cotham Quality E M.¥. Davis Consultant D.A. DelSignore St. Metallurgical and Welding Engineer R.A, Dennis Consultant "PB. Dickerson Consultant W. Doukas Maine Department of Transportation *J.D. Duncan Bechtel Corp. JL. Ellerman Wyoming Department of Transportation “G.L.Fox Consultant *A.R. Fronduti Rex Fronduti & Associates R.D.Fry Georgia Department of Transportation R.S. Funderburk ‘The Lincoln Electric Co, J.A.Grewe Omaha Public Power District M.A. Grieco Massachusetts Highway Department D.P. Gustafson Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute R. Hamburger EQE International, Ine wzineering and Inspection *Advisor AWS D1 Committee on Structural Welding (Continued) M. J. Harker E. Hartwell CW Hayes CR Tess GJ. Hill ‘M,L. Hoitomt E.R Holby CW Holmes W. Jaxa-Rozen M. J. Jordan A.J. Julicher S. Kern J. Kiefer JR. Kissell L.A. Kloiber SW. Kopp S-E. Koski °RM. Kotan D. J. Kotecki V Kurwvilla K. Landwehr D.R. Lawrence IT D.L. Long D.R. Luciani H.W. Ludewig "5. Mahin J.Maltey PW. Marshal D.M. Marudas MJ. Mayes: JW. MeGrew R. D. Medlock J.K. Merrill LK. Mieske WA. Mile, Jr RW Miller RC. Minor J.L, Munnerlyn JE. Myers C.K Nicholson T. Niemann J.C. Nordby T. Omura J.A, Packer FJ. Palmer C.C. Pease “7. Pekoz D.C Phillips R. Pietrowski CW Pinkham Advisor Idaho National Engineering and Environmental Laboratories Consultant The Lincoln Electric Co. High Steel Structures, Inc. G. J. Hill and Associates, ne Consultant TFR Engineering Modjeski and Masters, Ine. Bombardier Transportation Bergen Southwest Steel A. J. Iulicher and Associates ‘Tru-Weld Division TEP Corp. ‘Conoco, Ine. ‘The TGB Partnership Leleune Steel Co. High Steel Structures Stud Welding Products, Inc. ‘Omaha Public Power District The Lincoln Electric Co. Havens Steel Co. Schuff Steel Co. Butler Manufacturing PDM Strocal, Ine ‘Canadian Welding Bureau Caterpillar, Inc Earthquake Engineering Res Degenkolb Engineers ‘MHP Systems Engineering ‘Morrison Knudsen Corp. Mayes Testing Engineers, Inc. Babeock & Wileox Texas Department of Transportation Law Engineering and Environmental Services, Inc. PDM Bridge Consultant State of Alaska Department of Transportation Hapeo Aluminum Poles Consultant ‘SMI Owen Steel Co., Ine. Law Engineering and Environmental Services, Inc ‘Minnesota Department of Transportation Consumers Energy Kawada Industries University of Toronto, Canada ‘Steel Tube Institute CP Metallurgical Commell University ITW-Hobart Brothers Co. Pietrowski and Associates S. B, Barnes and Associates eh Center AWS D1 Committee on Structural Welding (Continued) JW. Post D, Rees-Evans JE. Roth *W.W. Sanders, Jr T. Schlafly D.R Scott L. Sewn D. Shapira J.G. Shaw RE. Shaw, Je *D.L. Sprow RW. Stieve R.G. Stobaugh PJ. Stolarski CR Stuart PJ. Sullivan WA. Svekric G. R. Swank MM, Tayarani A.A. Taylor #8. Thomas W. Thornton RHR Tide Vang JE. Uebele B.M. Urbany KK Verma B.D. Wright 0. Zollinger Advisor J. W, Post and Associates, Inc ‘Nucor- Yamato Steel James E. Roth, In. Towa State University American Institute of Steel Construction Scott Associates Sheedy Drayage Co. LGT Limited (Morrison-Knudsen) ‘Mountain Enterprises, Ine. Steel Structures Technology Center, Inc. Consultant Greenman-Pederson, Ine. Carolina Steel Corp. California Department of Transportation Shell Offshore, Inc Massachusetts Highway Department (Retired) Welding Consultants, Ine State of Alaska Massachusetts Highway Department JM. Consulting Group VP Buildings, Inc. Cives Corp, Wiss, Janney, Elstner Associates University of California—San Diego ‘Waukesha County Technical College Professional Services Industries Federal Highway Administration Advantage Aviation Technologies Copeland Corp. AWS Structural Welding Committee and Subcommittees Main Committee D.L. MeQuaid, Chait CR Hess D.D. Rager, 1StV: Gs Hie D.K. Miller, 2nd VC. ML. Hoitomt A.W. Sindel, 3rd VC. HH. Campbell IM, Secretary C.W. Holmes A.J. Julicher* WG. Alexander® JH. Kiefer E.M. Beck RM. Kotan® ER. Beckmann* PW. Marshall ELL. Bickford MJ. Mayes RD. Block R. D. Medlock 0. W. Blodgett* W.A. Milek, Jr R. Bonneau JL. Munnerlyn F.C. Breismeister, LE. Myers B.M. Butler C.C Pease LE. Collins JW. Post RB. Corbit JE. Roth M.V Davis TJ. Schlafly R.A, Dennis RE. Shaw, Jr J.D. Duncan* D.L. Sprow* G.L. Fox* RW. Stieve A. R. Fronduti*™ PJ. Sullivan M.A. Grieco B.D. Wright D1x—Executive Committee/General Requirements D.L. MeQuaid, Chai CR Hess D.D. Rager, Ist V.C. ML. Holtome D.K. Miller, 2nd VC. JH. Kiefer A.W. Sindel, 3rd VC. M.J. Mayes HH. Campbell II, Secretary —_R. P. Medlock FG. Armao CC Pease RD. Block D. Phillips B.M. Butler TJ. Schlafly M.A. Grieco RE Shaw, Jr Dia—Subcommittee 1 on Design TJ. Schlafly, Chair PW. Marshall N.J.Altebrando W.A.Milek, Ji RM. Bent® J.A, Packer O. W. Blodgett* FJ. Palmer BM. Butler JG. Shaw W. Jaxa-Rozen RE. Shaw, Jr M.J. Jordan D.L. Sprow* AS. Sulicher* W. Thornton L.A. Kloiber RILR Tide RM. Kotan* Advisor Dib—Subcommittee 2 on Qualification D.D. Rager, Chair D.L. Long R.A, Demis, VC. H.W Ludewig ELL. Bickford J.Mieske RD. Block D.K Miller R Bonneau J.C. Nordby F.C. Breismeister R. Pietrowski J.J.Cecilio D_ Phillips RB. Corbit JW. Post D.A, DelSignore D. Shapira J.D. Dunean* A.W. Sindet 4. R. Fronduti* D.L. Sprow* M.A. Grieco CR Stuart M.S. Harker GR. Swank* M.L. Hoitomt MM. Tayarani E.R Holby* JE, Uebele JH. Kiefer KK Verma VJ. Kunwvilla B. E, Wright* RD. Lawrence I 0. Zollinger Dic—Subcommittee 3 ‘abrication RD. Medlock, Chair VI Kurwslla D. Shapira, VC. D.L. Long WG. Alexander* WA. Milek, Jr ER Beckmann* D.K Miller B.L, Bickford* LL, Munnerlyn LE Collins JE. Myers: RA. Dennis LW. Post G.L. Fox* D.D. Rager M.A. Grieco A.W Sindet CR Hess RILR Tide GJ Hitl KK Verma CW Holmes Did—Subcommittee 4 on Inspection JH. Kiefer, Chair D.M, Marudas C. W Hayes, V.C. JK. Merrill WG. Alexander* WA Milek, Je* E.M. Beck* JL. Munnertyn ER. Beckmann* D.R. Scott LE Collins RW Sieve SL Cotham PJ. Sullivan GL. Fox* WA Svekric G.JHill B. M. Urbany ML. Holtome KK Verma PW. Marshall Dle—Subcommittee § on Stud Welding C.G Pease, Chair AR. Fronduti* H. Chambers S.A. Kern Koski MM. Tayarani DIf—Subcommitee 6 on Strengthening and Repair RE, Shaw, Je, Chait S. Kopp N. J. Altebrando, VC. M.J. Mayes EM. Beck IW. Post ROM. Bent* L. Seum J.J.Cecilio D.L. Sprow* CR Hess* RW Stieve G.JHill W. Thornton CW Holmes RELR Tide Dig—Subcommittee 7 on Aluminum Structures E.G. Armao, Chait D.R. Luciani Anderson, VC. R.C.Minor RC. Briden VC. C.K Nicholson M.¥ Davis D.D. Rager PB, Dickerson* WW. Sanders, Jr CW Mayes PS. Sullivan IR. Kissell JL. Uebele D1h—Subcommittee 8 on Sheet Steel RD, Block, Chair W. Jaxa-Rozen JE. Roth, VC. R. D. Lawrence It 0. W. Blodgett* D.R. Luciani RB. Corbit T. Pekoz* J.D. Duncan* CW. Pinkham® S. Funderburk JL. Uebele J.A, Grewe B.D. Wright D1i—Subcommittee 9 on Reinforcing Bars M. J. Mayes, Chait K, Landwehr JK Merrill, VC. R Miller S.L. Cotham LE. Myers D. P.Gustafion C.K Nicholson RM. Kotan* D.R. Scott D1j—Subcommittee 10 on AASHTO/AWS Bridge Welding Committee C.R Hess, Cochair, AWS M. A. Grieco, Cochair, AASHTO. AWS D1 Representatives WG. Alexander® JK Mieske N.J. Altebrando* D.K. Miller FR. Beckmann* SE. Myers L.E.Collins* D.C. Phillips AR, Fronduti* TJ. Schlafly D.L. MeQuaid* RJ. Stobaugh J. Merrill* MM. Tayarani Advisor AASHTO Representatives S. Cook R.D. Medlock W. Doukas T. Niemann L. Ellerman RW. Stieve* RD. Pry PJ. Stolarski E, Hartwell KK Verma CW Holmes* Dik—Subcommittee 11 on Stainless Steel Welding B.M, Butler, Chair M.L. Hoitomt RE Avery® E.R Holby* D. Baird W. Jaxa-Rozen RD. Block RM. Kotan* R Bonneau D. Kotecki EC Breismeister JW. MoGrew H. Chambers J. Merrill RB. Corbit JE. Roth D.A. DelSignore D. Shapira J.D. Duncan* A.W. Sindel MJ. Harker B.D. Wright GH 0. Zollinger D1l—Subcommittee 12 on Seismic Welding Issues D.K. Miller, Chait J.Malley R. Hamburger, VC. MJ. Mayes N.J. Altebrando* D.L. MeQuaid* G. Axmann* ALK. Merrill®* E.M, Beck W.A. Milek RM, Bent* D.C. Phillips* F.C. Breismeister JW. Post BM. Butler* D, Rees-Evans S. Camo* T Schlafly L. E. Collins RE. Shas, Jr SL. Cotham AA. Taylor* ML. Hoitomt S. Thomas RM. Kotan* RHR. Tide K. Landwehr CM. Uang D.L, Long KK Verma* S. Mahin® Dim—Standing Task Group on New Materials D. Phillips, Chair WA. Milek, Jn T. Schlafly, VC. JW Post F.C. Breismeister D, Rees-Evans B.M. Butler D. Shapira M.L. Hoitomt A.W. Sindel R.D. Medlock Foreword (This Foreword is not part of AWS DI.1/D1.IM:2002, Siructural Welding Code—Steel, buts included for information purposes only.) The frst edition of the Code for Fusion Welding and Gas Cutting in Building Construction was published by the ‘American Welding Society in 1928. The first bridge welding specification was published separately in 1936, The two documents were consolidated in 1972 in the D1.1 document but were once again separated in 1988 when the joint AASHTOIAWS D1.5, Bridge Welding Code, was published to address the specific requirements of State and Federal ‘Transportation Departments. Coincident with this, the D1.1 code changed references of buildings and bridges to stati- cally loaded and dynamically loaded structures, respectively, in order to make the document applicable to a broader range of structural configurations. ‘Underlined text in the subsections, tables, or figures indicates an editorial or technical change from the 2000 edition, ‘A vertical line inthe margin next toa figure drawing indicates a revision from the 2000 edition. ‘The following is a summary ofthe most significant technical revisions contained in DI.L/DI.1M:2002- Section 1—New provisions have been udded describing the responsibilities of Contractors, Inspectors, Engineers, Owners, and OEMs (Original Equipment Manufacturers) Section 2—Parts A, B, and C have been extensively reorganized. Many provisions have been modified or expanded, including new commentary and fatigue design parameters. Annex P has been cteated in order to facilitate correlating the ‘previous edition’s Section 2 provisions with the 2002 edition. ‘Subsections 3.14 and C3.14—A new provision on PWHT has been added. Figures 47, 4.8, 4.10, and 4.11 —Modifications have been made to address CVN testing, ‘Tables 4.5—Shielding gas flow rate variables have been chan; Table 4.6—A supplementary essential variable table for WPSs requiring CVN testing has been added. “Table 5.2—Holding times for stress relief have been adjusted. Subsections 6.26.12 and C6,26.12—Provisions have heen added describing UT of CIP groove welds with backing. Tables 6.2 and 6,3, Note 3—This note has been modified to address UT of backyouged, two-sided CJP groove welds, “Annex ITI Modifications have been made to expand the scope of requirements when CVN testing is contractually required ‘Annex IX—Changes have been made to address stud welding on decking. ‘Annex B—Acronyms for the most eommonly used terms inthe code have been added. Users should note that, beginning in this edition, the tables and figures foreach section will be located atthe end of cach section ‘AWS B40, Standard Methods for Mechanical Testing of Welds, provides additional detsils of test specimen prepo- ration and details of test fixture construction. Commentary. The Commentary is nonmandatory and is intended only to provide insight information into provision rationale. Mandatory Annexes. These additions tothe code are requirements that supplement the text. Nonmandatory Annexes. These annexes are not requirements but ate provided as options that are allowed by the code. Though they are not mandatory itis essential that all provisions ofthese annexes be followed when the option to use them is exercised. Index. As in previous codes, the entries inthe Index are referred to by subsection number rather than by page number. ‘This should enable the user of the Index to locate a particular item of interest in minimum time. Errata. Itis the Structural Welding Committee's Policy that all errata should be made avsilable to users of the code. Therefore, in the Society News Section ofthe AWS Welding Jounal, any errata (major changes) that have been noted ‘ill be published in the July and November issues ofthe Welding Journal Suggestions. Comments and suggestions for the improvernent of ths standard are welcome. They should be sent to the Secretary, Structural Welding Committee, American Welding Society, $50 N.W. Leleune Road, Miami, FL 33126. Interpretations. Official interpretations of any of the technical requirements of this standard may be obtained by sending a request, in writing to the Managing Director, Technical Services, American Welding Society, $50 N.W. Leleune Road, Miami, FL 33126 (see Annex F), Table of Contents Page No. General Requirements 1.1 Scope. 1.2 Limitations 1.3 Definitions. 13.1 Enginoer 13.2 Contractor 1.33 Inspectors 133.1 Contractor's Inspector 1.3.33 Inspectors) (unmodified) 1.3.4 OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) TBS OwME 1.3.6 Code Terms “Shall” “Should” and “May” 13.61 Shall 13.62 Should 13.63 May. 1.4 Responsibilities. ve T.A.1 Enginocr’s Responsibilities. 1.42 Contractors Responsibilities 1.43 Inspector's Responsibilities 1.43.1 Comractor Inspection 1.43.2 Vetification Inspection 1.5 Approval 116 Welding Symbols. 1.7 Safety Precautions 1.8 Standard Units of Measurement. 1.9 Reference Documents Design of Welded Connections... 2.0 Scope of Section 2. Part Commo Requirement for Design of Welded Conneton (Nonibuar and Tul Members) 2.1 Scope of Part A. nnn nnn sen 2.2 Contract Plans and Specifications 2.2.1 Plan and Drawing Information, 2.2.2 Notch Toughness Requirements, 2.2.3 Specific Welding Requirements 2.2.4 Weld Size and Length 2.2.5 Shop Drawing Requirements... 2.2.5.1 PIP Groove Welds 2.2.5.2 Fillet Welds and Weld in Skewed T-Joints 2.2.5.3 Symbols. 2.2.5.4 Prequalified Detail Dimensions. 2.2.5.5 Special Details, 2.2.5.6 Speeifie Inspection Requirements, 2.3 Effective Areas. Page No. 2.3.1 Groove Welds. 2.3.1.1 Effective Length, 3.1.2 Effective Size of CIP Groove Welds, 2.3.1.3 Minimum Size of PJP Groove Welds, 2.3.14 Effective Weld Size (Flare Groove) 2.3.1.5 Effective Area of Groove Welds 2.3.2 Fillet Welds: 2.3.2.1 Effective Length (Straight) 2.3.2.2 Effective Length (Curved) 23.2.3 Minimum Length 23.2.4 Intermittent Fillet Welds (Minimum Length) 2.3.2.5 Maximum Effective Length 2.3.2.6 Calculation of Effective Throat 2.3.2.7 Reinforcing Fillet Welds 2.3.2.8 Minimum Size. os 23.2.9 Maximum Weld Size in Lap Joints 2.3.2.10 Effective Area of Fillet Welds. 2.3.3 Skewed T-Joints 2.3.3.1 General. 2.3.3.2 Welds in Acute Angles Between 80° and 60° and in Obtuse Angles Greater than 100° 2.3.3.3 Welds in Acute Angles Between 60° and 30°. 2.3.3.4 Welds in Angles Less than 30°. 2.3.3.5 Effective Length of Skewed T-Joints 3.3.6 Minimum Skewed T-Toint Weld Size 2.3.3.7 Effective Throat of Skewed 2.3.3.8 Effective Area of Skewed T-Joint... 2.3.4 Fillet Welds in Holes and Slots 2.3.4.1 Diameter and Width Limitations 2.3.4.2 Slot Ends. 2'3.433 Effective Length. of Fillet ‘Welds in Holes or Slots in Holes or Slots 2.3.5 Plug and Slot Welds. 2.3.5.1 Diameter and Width Limitations, 3.5.2 Slot Length and Slope 2.3.5.3 Effective Area of Plug and Slot Welds. Par Specie Requirements for Desig of Nomubler Comoros (Saically or Cetilly Landed). 24 Genera 7 = Caloulated Stresses. 5.2 Calculated Stresses Due to Eccentricity 2.5.3 Allowable Base Metal Stresses. 2.54 Allowable Weld Metal 5.4.1 Stress in Fillet Welds. 2.5.4.2 Alternative Allowable Fillet Weld Stress 2.5.4.3 Instantaneous Center of Rotation.. 2.5.5 Allowable Stress Increase 2.6 Joint Configuration and Details. 2.6.1 General Considerations. 2.6.2 Compression Member Connections and Splices 2.6.2.1 Connections and Splices Designed to Bear Other than Connections to Base Plates 2.6.2.2 Connections and Splices Not Finished to Bear Except for Connections to Base Plates, 2.6.2.3 Connections to Base Plates 2.6.3 Base Metal Through-Thickness Loading .6.5 Corner and T-Joint Surface Contouring. 6.6 Weld Access Holes 2.6.7 Welds with Rives or Bolts. 217 Joint Configuration and Details Groove Welds 2.7.1 Transitions in Thicknesses and Widths. 2172 Patil Length CIP Groove Weld Prohibition 2173 Inermitent PIP Groove Welds 714 Weld Tab Removal 258 Joint Configuration and Details Fillet Welded Toints 2381 Lap Joins 2.8.1.1 Transverse Fillet Welds 2.8.1.2 Minimum Overlap 218.2 Longitudinal Fillet Welds 2.83 Fillet Weld Terminations 2.83.1 General, 2.8.3.2 Lap Joints Subject to Tension. 218.33 Maximum End Return Length 2.8.3.4 Transverse Stffener Welds 2.8.3.5 Opposite Sides of a Common Plane...... 2184 Fillet Welds in Holes of Slots... 2185 Imermittent Fillet Welds 2.9 Joint Configuration and Details Plug and Slot Welds. 2.9.1 Minimum Spacing (Plug Welds), vs 2.92 Minirmum Spacing (Slot Weld). 2.93 Prequalified Dimensions 2.9.4 Prohibition in Quenched and Tempered Steels. 2110 Filler Plates : 2110.1 Thin Filler Plates. 2110.2 Thick Filler Plates ooo 2/1033 Shop Drawing Requirement 2.11 Built Up Members. 2.11.1 Minimum Required Welding. 1.2 Maximum Spacing of Interminent Welds 2112.1 General 2111.22 Compression Members, 2111.23 Unpainted Weathering Stel ars C—Specfe Requirements for Design of Nonbular Connection (Cyetielly Loaded) 2 2.12 General... nn 2.12.1 Applicability. . 2°12.2 Other Pertinent Pro. 12.3 Engineer's Respon: 2.13 Limitations sass 2.13.1 Stress Range Threshold... 2.13.2 Low Cycle Fatigue. 13.3 Corrosion Protection 7 2.13.4 Redundant-Nonredundant Members. ns 12 2.14 Calculation of Stresses. 2 2.14.1 Flastic Analysis 12 2.14.2 Axial Stress and Bending. or oo a 2.14.3 Symmetrical Sections. 2 144 Angle Members ee — — 2.15 Allowable Stresses and Stress Ranges 2 2.15.1 Allowable StreS$€8 sor 15.2 Allowable Stress Ranges 2.16 Detailing, Fabrication, and Erection 16.1.2 Butt-Joint Width Transition 2.16.2 Backing ns 2:16.2.1 Welds for Ataching Stel Backing 2.16.2.2 CIP T- and Comer Joints Made from One Side. 2.16,2.3 CIP Butt Splices. 2.16.2.4 Longitudinal Groove Welds and Comer Joints 2.16.3 Contouring Weld at Comer and T-Joints 2.16.4 Flame-Cut Edges. 2.16.5 Transversely Loaded Butt Joints 16,6 Fillet Weld Terminations... 17 Prohibited Joints and Welds. 17.1 One-Sided Groove Welds, 2.17.2 Flat Position Groove Welds 2.17.3 Fillet Welds Less than 3/16 in, [5 mam]... 2.17.4 T- and Comer CJP Welds with Backing Left in Place... 2.18 Inspection | Part D—Specific Requirements for Design of Tubular Connections (Statically or Cyclically Loaded)... 1S 2.19 General 2.19.1 Becentricity. 2.20 Allowable Stresses. 2.20.1 Base-Metal Stresses 2.20.2 Cireular Section Limitations 2.20.3 Weld Stresses 2.204 Fiber Stresses 2.20.5 Load and Resistance Factor Design. 2.20.6 Fatigue... : 2.206.1 Stress Range and Member Type. 2.20.6.2 Fatigue Stress Categories 2.20.6.3 Basie Allowable Stress Limitation... 2.20.64 Cumulative Damage 2.20.6.5 Critical Members. 2:20.66 Fatigue Behavior Improvement 2.20.6.7 Size and Profile Effecs.. 21 Identification 22 Symbols 23 Weld Design 2.23.1 Fillet Welds.. 2.23.1.1 Effective Area . 2.23.1.2 Beta Limitation for Prequalified Details, 2.23.1.3 Lap Joints... se 2.23.2 Groove Welds. 2.23.2.1 Prequalified PIP Groove Weld Details 2.23.2.2 Prequalified CIP Groove Weld Details Welded from One Side without Backing in T-, Y-, and K-Connections., a a —- 2.23.3 Stresses in Welds 7 2.234 Circular Connection Lengths 2.23.5 Box Connection Lengths 2.23.5.1 K- and N-Connection 2.2352 T-, ¥-, and X-Connections. 24 Limitations ofthe Strength of Welded Connections. 2.24.1 Circular T-, Y-, and K-Connections. 2,241.1 Local Failure 24.1.2 General Collapse. 2.24.1.3 Uneven Distribution of Load (Weld Sizing) 224.14 Transition e 24.1.$ Other Configurations and Loads, 2.24.1.6 Overlapping Connections. 2242 Box T-, Y- and K-Connections 2.242.1 Local Failure 2.24.22 General Collapse. 2.24.2.3 Uneven Distribution of Load (Effective Width) 2242.4 Overlapping Connections. 2.24..5 Bending. : 2.24.2.6 Other Configurations. 2.28 Thickness Transition 2.26 Material Limitations. 2.26.1 Limitations 2.26.1.1 Yield Strength 2:26.12 Reduced Effective Yield. 2.26.1.3 Box T-, Y-, and K-Connestons.. 2.26.14 ASTM A 500 Precaution. 7 2.26.2 Tubular Base-Metal Notch Toughness. 2.26.2.1 CVN Test Requirements 26.2.2 LAST Requirements. 2.26.23 Altemative Notch Toughness Prequalification of WPSs 3.1 Scope. 3.2 Welding Processes. 3.2.1 Prequalified Processes... 3.2.2 Code Approved Processes. 3.2.3 Other Welding Processes. 3.3 Base Metal/Filler Metal Combinations. 3.4 Engineer's Approval for Auxiliary Attachments.. 3.5 Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperature Requirements 3.5.1 Base Metal/Thickness Combination 3.5.2 Annex XI Option. 3.53 Alternate SAW Preheat and Interpass Temperatures 3.5.3.1 Hardness Requirements 3.6 Limitation of WPS Variables 3.6.1 Combination of WPS... 3.7 General WPS Requirements. 3.7.1 Vertical-Up Welding Requirements. 3.7.2 WidthiDepth Pass Limitation. 3.7.3 Weathering Steel Requirements 3.7.3.1 Single-Pass Groove Welds 3.7.3.2 Single-Pass Fillet Welds —— 3.8 Common Requirements for Parallel Electrode and Multiple Electrode SAW. 39 3.8.1 GMAW Root Pass. 3.9 Fillet Weld Requirements. 3.9.1 Details (Nontubular) 3.9.2 Details (Tubular). 3.9.3 Skewed T-Joint... 3.9.3.1 Dihedral Angle Limitations 3.9.3.2 Minimum Weld Size for Skewed T-Toints 3.10 Plug and Slot Weld Requirement... 3.10.1 Diameter Limitations 3.10.2 Slot Length von 3.103 Depth of Filling _ 7 font 3.11 Common Requirements of PIP and CIP Groove Welds 60 3.11.1 FCAW/GMAW in SMAW Joints 3.11.2 Corner Joint Preparation. 3.11.3 Root Openings. 3.12 PIP Requirements 3.12.1 Definition. 3.12.2 Weld Size. 3.12.2.1 Minimum Prequalified Weld Sizes 3.123 Joint Dimensions. 3.124 Details (Tubular)... 3,124.1 Matched Box Connections.. 3.13 CJP Groove Weld Requirements, 3.13.1 Joint Dimension 3.13.2 J- and U-Groove Preparation 3.133 Tubular Butt Joints 3.13.4 Tubular T-, ¥-, and K-Comnections 3.13.4.1 Joint Details... sn 3,14 Postweld Heat Treatment Qualification 4.0 Scope, Part A—General Requirements, 4.1 General z 4.1.1 Welding Procedure Specification (WPS). 4.1.1.1 Qualification Responsibility... 4.1.1.2 Previous WPS Qualification 4.1.1.3 CVN Test Requirements 4.1.2 Performance Qualification of Welding Personnel. 119 4.1.2.1 Previous Performance Qualification . 119) 4.1.2.2 Qualification Responsibility oucnsnnn . : 120 4.1.3 Period of Effectiveness 120 4.13.1 Welders and Welding Operators. 120 4.13.2 Tack Welders. 120 4.2 Common Requirements for WPS and Welding Personnel Performance Qualification... 120 42.1 Qualification to Earlier Editions. 120 4.22 Aging. 120 4.23 RECOM nennnnnan “120 4.2.4 Positions of Welds. “120 Part B—Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) .m oe 120) 4.3 Production Welding Positions Qualified 120 4.4 Type of Qualification Tests 4.5 Weld Types for WPS Qualification. 4.6 Preparation of WPS. 4.7 Essential Variables 47.1 SMAW, SAW, GMAW, GTAW, and FCAW 4.72 ESW and EGW. 4.733 Base-Metal Qualification 4.8 Methods of Testing and Acceptance Criteria for WPS Qualification 4.8.1 Visual Inspection 482NDT 4.82.1 RT or UT 4.8.2.2 RT or UT Acceptance Criteria 4.83 Mechanical Testing 4.83.1 Root, Face, and Side Bend Specimens. 4.83.2 Longitudinal Bend Specimens 4.83.3 Acceptance Criteria for Bend Tests 4.8.3.4 Reduced-Section Tension Specimens 4.83.5 Acceptance Criteria for Reduced-Section Tension Test. 4.83.6 AILWeld-Metal Tension Specimen, 4.84 Macroetch Test. 4.8.4.1 Acceptance Criteria for Macroeteh Test 4.8.5 Retest. 4.9 CIP Groove Welds for Nontubular Connections 4.9.1.1 Comer or T-Joins 4.10 PIP Groove Welds for Nontubular Connections 4.10.1 Type and Number of Specimens to be Tested. 4.10.2 Weld Size Verification by Macroetch 4.10.3 Verification of CJP Groove WPS by Macroetch 4.10.4 Other WPS Verifications by Macroetch 4.10.5 Flare-Groove Welds 4.11 Fillet Weld Qualification Requirements for Tubular and Nontubular Connections 4.11.1 Type and Number of Specimens 4.11.2 Fillet Weld Test 4.11.3 Consumables Verification Test. 4.12. CIP Groove Welds for Tubular Connection 4.12.1 CIP Butt Joints with Backing or Backgouging. 4.12.2 CUP Butt Joints without Backing Welded from One Side Only 4.123 T-, Y-, or K-Connections with Backing or Backgouging, : 4.124 T-, Y-, or K-Conneetions without Bucking Welded from One Side Only. 4.12,4.1 WPSs without Prequalified Status 4.12.42 CIP Groove Welds in a T-, Y-, or K-Connection WPS with Dihedral Angles Less than 30° 4.12.43 CIP Groove Welds in aT-, Y-, or K-Conneetion WPS Using GMAW-S 4.12.44 Weldments Requiring CVN Toughness 4.13 PIP Tubular T-,¥-, or K-Connections and Butt Joint. 4.14 Plug and Slot Welds for Tubular and Nontubular Connections 4.15 Welding Processes Requiting Qualification 4.15.1 ESW, EGW, GTAW, and GMAW-S. 4.15.2 Other Welding Processes. 4.16 WPS Requirements (GTAW) 4.17 WPS Requirements (ESW/EGW). 4.17.1 Previous Qualification 4.17.2 All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements Page No. Part C—Performance Qualification 125 4.18 General 125 4.18.1 Production Welding Positions Qualified se enn smneeene 25 4.18.11 Welders. 125 4.18.1.2 Welding Operators rumen — ' 125 4,18.1.3 Tack Welders. 126 4.18.2 Production Thicknesses and Diameters Qualified... sone 36, 4,18.2.1 Welders or Welding Operators 126 4,18.2.2 Tack Welders. 126 4.18.3 Welder and Welding Operator Qualification Through WPS Qualification, 126 4.19 Type of Qualification Tests Required 126 4.19.1 Welders and Welding Operators. sn se snes 126 4.19.1.1 Substitution of RT for Guided Bend Tests. 126 4.19.1.2 Guided Bend Tests 126 4.19.2 Tack Welders 126 4.19.2.1 Extent of Qualification 126 4.20 Weld Types for Welder and Welding Operator Performance Qualification... 126 4.21 Preparation of Performance Qualification Forms. 126 4.22 Essential Variables 127 4.23 CIP Groove Welds for Nontubular Connections 127 4.23.1 Welder Qualification Plates. 127 4.23.2 Welding Operator Qualification Plates for ESW/EGW 127 4.24 PIP Groove Welds for Nontubular Connections 127 4.25 Fillet Welds for Nontubular Connections oe a wsennel2T 4.26 CIP Groove Welds for Tubular Connections. 127 4.26.1 Other Joint Detsils or WPSs tn sn sane OT 4.27 PIP Groove Welds for Tubular Connections. 127 4.28 Fillet Welds for Tubular Connections. . 127 4.29 Plug and Slot Welds for Tubular and Nontubular Connections 128, 4.30 Methods of Testing and Acceptance Criteria for Welder and Welding Operator Qualification 128 4.30.1 Visual Inspection. 128 4.30.2 Macroetch Test. 128 4.30.2.1 Plug and Fillet Weld Macroetch Tests, 128 4.30.22 Macroetch Test for T-, Y-, and K-Connections. 128 4.30.2.3 Macroetch Test Acceptance Criteria 128 4.303 RT, 128 4.30.1 RT Acceptance Criteria. 128 4.30.4 Fillet Weld Break Test 128 4.30.4.1 Acceptance Criteria for Fillet Weld Break Tests se seed 29 4.30.5 Root, Face, and Side Bend Specimens, 129 4.31 Method of Testing and Acceptance Criteria for Tack Welder Qualification. 129 4.31.1 Visual Acceptance Criteria, 129 4.31.2 Destructive Testing Acceptance Criteria, 129 4.32 Retest. 129 4:32.1 Welder and Welding Operator Retest Requirements. : snes 129 4.32.1.1 Immediate Retest 129 4,32.1.2 Retest After Further Training or Practice... — rane 29 4.32.1.3 Retest After Lapse of Qualification Period of Effectiveness 129 4.32.1.4 Exception—Failure of a Requalification Retest ou. sn 129 4.32.2 Tack Welder Retest Requirements 129 4,32.2.1 Retest without Additional Training, 129 4,32.2.2 Retest After Further Training or Practice 129 Fabrication... 5.1 Scope. 5.2 Base Metal 5.2.1 Specified Base Metal 52.2 Base Met for Wel Tabs, Hacking, and Space. 5.2.2.1 Weld Tabs.. 2.2.2 Backing, 2.2.3 Spacers 5.3 Welding Consumables and Electrode Requirements. 53.1 General. 5.3.1.1 Cettfication for Electrodes of Electrode-Flux Combinations 53.1.2 Suitability of Classification 5.3.1.3 Shielding a8 oon 3.1.4 Storage . 3.1.5 Condition, 5.3.2 SMAW Electrodes. 53.2.1 Low-Fiydrogen Electrode Storage Conditions 5.3.2.2 Approved Atmospheric Time Periods. 5.3.2.3 Altemative Atmospheric Exposure Time Periods Established by Tests 5.3.2.4 Baking Electrodes 5.3.2.5 Electrode Restrictions for ASTM A 514 or A 517 Steels, 53.3 SAW Electrodes and Fluxes. 5.3.3.1 Electrode-Flux Combination Requirements 53.3.2 Condition of Flux. 5.33.3 Flux Reclamation 53.3.4 Crushed Slag. 53.4 GMAW/FCAW Electrodes. 53.4.1 Low-Alloy Electrodes for GMAW. 3.4.2 Low-Alloy Electrodes for FCAW. 53.5 GTAW. 5.3.5.1 Tungsten Electrodes 5.3.5.2 Filler Metal 5.4 ESW and EGW Processes. 5.4.1 Process Limitations. 5.4.2 Condition of Electrodes and Guide Tubes 4.3 Condition of Flux... AA Weld Starts and Stops 5.4.5 Preheating, 5.4.6 Repairs 54.7 Weathering Stel Requirements 5.5 WPS Variables. 5.6 Preheat and Interpass Temperatures. 5.7 Heat np Convo for Quenehed and Tempered Stes 8 Stress-Relief Heat Treatment é 5.8.1 Requirements 5.8.2 Alternative PWHT 5.8.3 Steels Not Recommended for PWHT 5.9 Backing, Backing Gas, of Inserts. 5.10 Backing 5.10.1 Fusion. 10.2 Full-Length Backing 5.10.3 Backing Thickness 5.104 Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Connections 5.10.4.1 External Attached Backing 5.10. Statically Loaded Connections... 5.11 Welding and Cutting Equipment 5.12 Welding Environment 5.12.1 Maximum Wind Velocity. 5.12.2 Minimum Ambient Temperatur 5.13 Conformance with Design 5.14 Minimum Fillet Weld Sizes 5.15 Preparation of Base Metal 5.15.1 Mill-Induced Discontinuities 5.15.1.1 Acceptance Criteria, 5.15.12 Repair. 5.15.2 Joint Preparation 5.15.3 Material Trimming. 5.15.4 Thermal Cutting Processes. 5.15.4.1 Other Processes. 5.15.4.2 Profile Accuracy 5.15.43 Roughness Requirements. 5.15.44 Gouge or Notch Limitations 5.16 Reentrant Corners 5.17 Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes 5.17.1 Weld Access Hole Dimensions. 5.17.2 Group 4 and 5 Shapes 5.18 Temporary and Tack WelAs.. 5.18.1 Temporary Welds 5.18.2 General Requirements for Tack Welds. 5.18.2.1 Incorporated Tack Welds. St aia aoe ade cry SA 5.18.2.3 Nonincorporated Tack Weld .rn:vn ee 5.19 Camber in Built-Up Members.. 5.19.1 Camber : 5.19.2 Correction. 5.20 Splices in Cyclially Loaded Structures 5.21 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage 5.21.1 Procedure and Sequence 5.21.2 Sequencing ur 5.21.3 Contractor Responsibility 5.21.4 Weld Progression 5.21.5 Minimized Restraint 5.21.6 Subassembly Spices 5.21.7 Temperature Limitations 5.22 Tolerance of Joint Dimensions. 5.22.1 Fillet Weld Assembly. 5.2.1.1 Faying Surface .. 5.22.2 PIP Groove Weld Assembly. 5.22.3 Butt Joint Alignment. 5.2.3.1 Girth Weld Alignment (Tubular). 5.22.4 Groove Dimensions. 5.2.4.1 Nontubular Cross-Sectional Variations. 5.2.4.2 Tubular Cross-Sectional Variations 5.2.4.3 Correction... 5.2.4.4 Engineer's Approval. 5.22.5 Gouged Grooves 5.22.6 Alignment Methods. 5.23 Dimensional Tolerance of Welded Structural Members 5.23.1 Straightness of Columns and Trusses 5.23.2 Beam and Girder Straightness (No Camber Specified) 5.23.3 Beam and Girder Camber (Typical Girder) 5.23.4 Beam and Girder Camber (without Designed Concrete Haunch). 5.23.5 Beam and Girder Sweep _ : : 5.23.6 Variation in Web Flatness.. 5.23.6.1 Measurements 5.23.6.2 Statically Loaded Nontubular Structures. 5.23.6.3 Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Structures. 5.23.64 Excessive Distortion 5.23.6.5 Architectural Consideration 5.23.7 Variation Between Web and Flange Centertnes. 5.23.8 Flange Warpage and Tilt . 5.23.9 Depth Variation 5.23.10 Bearing at Points of Loading 5.23.11 Tolerance on Stiffeners. 5.23.11.1 Fitof Intermediate Stiffeners 5.23.11.2 Straightness of Intermediate Stiffeners 5.23.11.3 Straightness and Location of Bearing Stiffeners, 5.23.11.4 Other Dimensional Tolerances... : 5.24 Weld Profiles 5.24.1 Fillet Welds. 5.24.2 Exception for Intermittent Fillet Welds. 5.243 Convexity 5.24.4 Groove or Butt Welds. 5.24.4.1 Flush Surfaces.. 5.24.4.2 Finish Methods and Values... 5.25 Technique for Plug and Slot Welds.. 5.25.1 Plug Welds . 5.25.1.1 Flat Position 5.25.1.2 Vertical Position. 5.25.1.3 Overhead Position 5.25.2 Slot Welds 5.26 Repairs 5.26.1 Contractor Options.. 5.26.1.1 Overlap, Excessive Convexity or Excessive Reinforcement 5.26.1.2 Excessive Concavity of Weld or Crater, Undersize Welds, Undercutting 5.26.1.3 Incomplete Fusion, Excessive Weld Porosity, of Slag Inclusions 5.26.1.4 Cracks in Weld or Base Metal 5.26.2 Localized Heat Repair Temperature Limitations. 5.26.3 Engineer's Approval 5.26.4 Inaccessibility of Unacceptable Welds... 5.26.5 Welded Restoration of Base Metal with Mislocated Holes, 5.27 Peening. 5.27.1 Tools, 5.28 Caulking, 5.29 Are Strikes. 5.30 Weld Cleaning... 5.30.1 In-Process Cleaning 5.30.2 Cleaning of Completed Welds 5.31 Weld Tabs. 5.31.1 Use of Weld Tabs 5.31.2 Removal of Weld Tabs for Statically Loaded Nontubular Structures 5.31.3 Removal of Weld Tabs for Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Structures. 5.31.4 Ends of Welded But Joints... o nn Inspection. Part A—General Requirements. 6.1 Scope 6.1.1 Information Fumished to Bidders. 6.1.2 Inspection and Contract Stipulations 6.1.2.1 Contractor's Inspection... 6.1.2.2 Verification Inspection 6.13 Definition of Inspector Categories. 6.13.1 Contractor's Inspector... 6.1.3.2 Verification Inspector. 6.13.3 Inspectors). 6.14 Inspector Qualification Requirements. 6.1.4.1 Bases for Qualification. 6.1.4.2 Term of Effectivenes 6.14.3 Assistant Inspector 6.14.4 Bye Examination oon 6.1.4.5 Verification Authority 6.15 Inspector Responsibility 6.16 Items to be Furnished tothe Inspecto 6.1.7 Inspector Notification 62 Inspection of Materials. 663 Inspection of WPSs and Equipment... 63.1 WPS vorrei 6.3.2 Welding Equipment. 6 Tepes of Weds, Welding Oporto, and Tsk Wer Culientons 200 6.4.1 Determination of Qualification —_ : 6.4.2 Retesting Based on Quality of Wor 643 Retesting Based on Qualification Expiration 65 Inspection of Work and Records 6.51 Size, Length, and Location of Welds. 65.2. WPS 6.53 Electrode Classification and Usage. 6.54 Scope of Examinations. 655 Extent of Examination 6.56 Inspector Mentfication of Inspections Performed 6.5.7 Maintenance of Records. Part B—Contractor Responsibilities 6.6 Obligations of the Contractor, 6.6.1 Contractor Responsibilities. 6.6.2 Inspector Requests 6.6.3 Engineering Judgment... 6.6<4 Specified NDT Other than Visual 6.6.5 Nonspecified NDT Other than Visual Part C—Acceptance Criteria 201 6.7 Scope. 201 6.8 Engineer's Approval for Altemate Acceptance Criteria a oe 6.9 Visual Inspection. 201 Page No. 201 202 202 202 202 202 202 6.10 PT and MT 6.AL NDT, 6.11.1 Tubular Connection Reg 6IDRT. 6.12.1 Acceptance Critetia for Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections... 6.12.1.1 Discontinuities : : 6.12.1.2 Illustration of Requirements 6.12.2 Acceptance Criteria for Cyclically Loade 202 6.12.2.1 Tensile Stress Welds. : : : se07 6.12.2.2 Compressive Stress Welds 202 6,122.3 Discontinuities Less than 1/16 in. (2 mm] 202 6.1224 Limitations. 203, 6,122.5 Annex V Illustration... 203 203 203 6.12.3 Acceptance Criteria for Tubular Conneetions., 6,123.1 Discontinuities 6,123.2 Illustration. ee = 203 6.13 UT 203, 6.13.1 Acceptance Criteria for Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. 203 6.132 Aeceptanee Cater fo Cysizally Loaded Nombula Comestons 203, 6.13.2.1 Indications... : : 203 6.13.2.2 Scanning, 6.13.3 Acceptance Criteria for Tubular Connections. 6133.1 Class R (Applicable When UT is Used as an Alternate to RT) son. 6.133.2 Class X (Experience-Based, Fitness-for-Purpose Criteria Applicable to T-, Y- and K-Connections in Redundant Structures with Notch-Tough Weldments) : Part D—NDT Procedures... 6.14 Procedures. 6.14.1 RT. 6.14.2 Radiation Ima 6.143 UT, 6.144 MT, 6.148 PP ooo 6.146 Personnel Qualification 6.146. ASNT Requirements. 6,146.2 Certification 6.14.63 Exemption of QC1 Requirements. 6.13 Extent of Testing . 6.15.1 Full Testing, 6.15.2 Partial Testing 6.15.3 Spot Testing.vororon 6.154 Relevant Information Part E—Radiographie Testing (RT) 205 6.16 RT of Groove Welds in Butt Joints. 205 6.16.1 Procedures and Standards —— 205 6.16.2 Variations 205 6.17 RT Procedures. 205 6.17.1 Procedure. 208 6.17.2 Safety Requirements. 205 6.17.3 Removal of Reinforcement 206, 6,173.1 Tabs : 206 6.17.3.2 Steel Backing 206 6,173.3 Reinforcement. 206 Page No. 6.174 Radiographic Film. 6.17.5 Technique. 6.17.5.1 Geometric Unsharpness 6.17.5.2 Source-to-Subject Distance. : 6.17.5.3 Source-to-Subject Distance Limitation: 6.17.6 Sources. 6.17.7 1Q1 Selection and Placement. 6.17.8 Technique.. ns 6,178.1 Film Length. 6.178.2 Overlapping Film 6,178.3 Backscatter. 6.17.9 Film Width 6.17.10 Quality of Radiographs 6.17.11 Density Limitations 6.17.1. H& D Density. a nnn 6.17.11.2 Transitions, 207 6.17.12 Identification Marks 207 6.17.13 Edge Blocks 207 6.18 Supplementary RT Requirements for Tubular Connections 207 6.18.1 Circumferential Groove Welds in Butt Joints 207 6.18.1.1 Single-Wall Exposure/Single-Wall View. 207 6.18.1.2 Double-Wall Exposure/Single-Wall View. 6.18.1.3 Double-Wall Exposure/Double-Wall View.. 6.19 Examination, Report, and Disposition of Radiographs. 6.19.1 Equipment Provided by Contractor. 208 6119.2 REPOS ass = eee “208 6.19.3 Record Retention. 208 Part F—Urasonic Testing (UT) of Groove Welds 208 6.20 General. 208 6.20.1 Procedures and Standards 208 6.20.2 Variations. ss : a “208 6.20.3 Piping Porosity. 208 6.2044 Base Metal 208 6.21 Qualification Requirements 208 6.22 UT Equipment : : “208 6.22.1 Equipment. Requirements. 208 208 208 6.22.2 Horizontal Linearity. 6.22.3 Requirements for Test Instruments 6.22.4 Calibration of Test Instruments. 6.22.5 Display Range.. 22.6 Straight-Beam (Longitudinal Wave) Search Units 22.7 Angle-Beam Search Units. 6.22.7.1 Frequency, 6.2.7.2 Transducer Dimensions. 22.7.3 Angles 6.22.74 Marking... 6.22.7.5 Intemal Reflections 6.22.7.6 Edge Distance 6.22.7.7 TIW Block. 6.23 Reference Standards 6.23.1 TW Standard... 6.23.2 Prohibited Reflectors. 6.23.3 Resolution Requirements. 6.24 Equipment Qualification.. 6.24.1 Horizontal Linearity 6.242 Gain Control. 6.24.3 Intemal Reflections. 6.24.4 Calibration of Angle-Beam Seateh Units 6.25 Calibration for Testing, 6.25.1 Position of Reject Contral 6.25.2 Technique.. 6.25.3 Recalibration 6.254 Straight-Beam Testing of Base Metal 6.25.4.1 Sweep. 6.25.4.2 Sensitivity. 6.25.5 Calibration for Angle-Beam Testing... 6.25.5.1 Horizontal Sweep. 6.25.5.2 Zero Reference Level 6.26 Testing Procedures. 6.26.1 °X” Line, 6.262 °Y" Line, 6.26.3 Cleanliness. 6.26.4 Couplants. 6.26.5 Extent of Testing, 6.26.1 Reflector Size. 6,265.2 Inaccessibility 6.26.6 Testing of Welds. 6.26.6.1 Scanning. 6.26.6.2 Butt Joints 6.26.6.3 Maximum Indication.. 6.26.64 Attenuation Factor, 6.26.6.5 Indication Rating. 6.26.7 Length of Discontinuities. 6.26.8 Basis for Acceptance or Rejection. 6.26.9 Idemtification of Rejected Area 6.26.10 Repair 6.26.11 Retest Reports 6.26.12 Steel Backing, 6.27 UT of Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connections 6.27.1 Procedure. 6.27.2 Personnel. 6.27.3 Calibration. 6.273.1 Range 6.273.2 Sensitivity Calibration 6.27.4 Base-Metal Examinatior 6.27.5 Weld Scanning 6.27.6 Optiraum Angle. 6.27.7 Discontinuity Evaluation, 6.27.8 Reports 6.278.1 Forms 6.278.2 Reported Discontinuities. 6,278.3 Incomplete Inspection 6.2784 Reference Marks... 6.28 Preparation and Disposition of Reports 6.28.1 Content of Reports 6.28.2 Prior Inspection Reports... 6.28.3 Completed Repors 6.29 Calibration ofthe UT Unit wth IIW or Other Approved Reference Blocks. 6.29.1 Longitudinal Mode 6.9.1.1 Distance Calibration 6.9.1.2 Amplitde 6.29.13 Resolution 6.29.14 Horizontal Linearity Qualification, 6.29.1.5 Gain Control (Attenuation) Qualification. 6.292 Shear Wave Mode Transverse) 6.29.2.1 Index Point 6.2922 Angle. 6,29.2.3 Distance Calibration Procedure .. 6.29.24 Amplitude ot Sensitivity Calibration Procedure. 6292.5 Resolution . 6 29.2.6 Approach Distance of Search Unit 6.30 Equipment Qualification Procedures 630.1 Horizontal Linearity Procedure 6.302 dB Accuracy 6,302.1 Procedure 6,30.2.2 Decibel Equation... 63023 Amex D. 6302.4 Procedure 6302.5 Nomograph 6.303 Internal Reflections Procedure 6.31 Discontinuity Evaluation Procedures 6.31.1 Straight-Beam (Longitudinal) Testing 6.31.2 Angle-Beam (Shear) Testing. 6.32 Seaming Pate. 6.32.1 Longitudinal Discontnuies. 632.1 Scanning Movement A. 632.12 Scanning Movement B 632.13 Scanning Movement C. 6.32.2 Transverse Discontinitis, 6.32.21 Ground Welds. 6322.2 Unground Welds... 6.32.3 ESW or EGW Welds (Additional Scaming Patter). 6.33 Examples of dB Accuracy Certification Part G—Other Examination Methods 6.34 General Requirements 6.35 Raion Imaging System Inclading Real-Time Imaging 6.35.1 General. 6.35.2 Procedures. 635.3 Procedure Qualification 6384 Persone! Quifeaons 6.35.5 101. 1635.6 Image Enhancement. 6.38.7 RECOM insnssnnnnns Stud Welding. 253 TAL Scope : 253 7.2.General Requirements. 253 7.2.1 Stud Design 253 F238 FIUR son 7.24 Stud Bases. 7.2.5 Stud Finish 7.2.6 Stud Material 7.2.7 Base Metal Thickness 7.3 Mechanical Requirements. 7.3, Standard Mechanical Requirements. 7.3.2 Testing.. : 7.3.3 Engineer's Request. 7.34 Absence of Quality Control Tests 7.3.5 Engineer's Option to Select Studs. 7.4 Workmanship . A. Cleanliness.. 7.42 Coating Restrictions 7.4.3 Base-Metal Preparation. 7.44 Moisture. 7.4.5 Spacing Requirements. 7.4.6 Are Shield Removal 7.47 Acceptance Criteria, TS Technique oreo 73.1 Automatic Machine Welding. 7.5.2 Multiple Welding Guns. 7.5.3 Movement of Welding Gun, é 7.54 Ambient and Base-Metal Temperature Requirements 7.5.5 FCAW, GMAW, SMAW Fillet Weld Option 755.1 Surfaces. 7.5.5.2 Stud End... 7.5.5.3 Stud Fit Fillet Welds). 7.5.5.4 Fillet Weld Minimum Size 7.55.5 Preheat Requirements. 7.5.5.6 SMAW Electrodes. 7.5.5.7 Visual Inspection 7.6 Stud Application Qualification Requirements 7.6.1 Purpose. 7.6.2 Responsibilities for Tests 7.6.3 Preparation of Specimens... 7.6.3.1 Test Specimens. 7.6.3.2 Recorded Information. 7.6.4 Number of Specimens. 7.6.5 Test Required 7.6.6 Test Methods 7.6.6.1 Bend Tes. 7.6.6.2 Torque Test. 7.6.6.3 Tension Test : 7.6.1 Application Qualification Test Data 7.1 Production Control 7.7.1 Pre-Production T 7.7.1.1 Start of Shift 7.7.1.2 Production Member Option 7.7.1.3 Flash Requirement 7.7.14 Bending... 7.7.1.5 Event of Failure. 7.7.2 Production Welding. 7.7.3 Repair of Studs. 7.7.4 Operator Qualification 7.75 Removal Area Repair. 7.8 Fabrication and Verification Inspection Requirements 7.8.1 Visual Inspection 7.8.2 Additional Tests 1.8.3 Bent Stad Acceptance Criteria 7.84 Torque Test Acceptance Criteria. 7.8.5 Engineering Judgment, 7.8.6 Owner’s Option 8. Sregtenng and RepiingBntig Svcs, 8.1 General. = 8.2 Base Metal 8.2.1 Investigation 8.22 Suitability for Welding 82.3 Other Base Metals 83 Design for Strengthening and Repair. 83.1 Design Process 8.3.2 Stress Analysis 8.3.3 Fatigue History 8.3.4 Restoration or Replacement. 83.5 Loading During Operations 8.3.6 Existing Connections 83.7 Use of Existing Fasteners 8.4 Fatigue Life Enhancement 8.4.1 Methods... 8.4.2 Stress Range Inerease nn 8.5 Workmanship and Technique 8.5.1 Base-Metal Condition 8.52 Member Discontinuities. 85.3 Weld Repairs 8.5.4 Base Metal of Insuiticient T 8.5.5 Heat Straightening... 8.5.6 Welding Sequence... 8.6 Quality... 8.6.1 Visual Inspection eso Noes Annexes Mandatory Information ‘Annex I—Effective Throat ‘Annex II—Fffective Throats of Fillet Welds in Skewed T-Joins Annex III—Requirements for CVN Testing. ‘Annex IV—WPS Requirements ‘Annex V—Weld Quality Requirements for Tension Joints in Cyeliclly Loaded Structures. ‘Annex VI—Flatness of Girder Webs—Statcally Loaded Structures ‘Annex VII—Flatness of Girder Webs—Cyclically Loaded Structures ‘Annex VITI—Temperature- Moisture Content Chats ‘Annex IX—Manuficturers” Stud Base Qualification Requirements ‘Annex X—Qualifiation and Calibration of UT Units with Other Approved Reference Blocks ‘Annex XI—Guideline on Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat... nnn ‘Annex XTI—Symbols for Tubular Connection Weld Design Annexes —Nonmandatory Information ‘Annex A—Short Circuiting Transfer (GMAW-S). Annex B—Terms and Definitions Annex C—Guide for Specification Writers. Annex D—UT Equipment Qualification and Inspection Forms. Annex E—Sample Welding Fotms.. ‘Annex F—Guidelines for Preparation of Technical Inguiries for the Structural Welding Committee Annex G—Local Dihedral Angle: ‘Annex H—Contents of Prequalified WPS., Annex J—Safe Practices. Annex K—UT Examination of Welds by Alternative Techniques. Annex L—Ovalizing Parameter Alpha. Annex MC Approved Base Metal an Flr Metals Requiring Qulisation per Seton 4. ‘Annex N—List of Reference Documents. a om Annex O—Filler Metal Strength Properties. Annex P—Section 2 Reorganization... Commentary Foreword. C1. General Requirements CLI Scope. C12 Limitations C13.1 Engineer : €1.3.3.1 Contractor's Inspector (C13.3.2 Verification Inspector: €13.3.3 Inspector(s) unmodified C134 OFM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) €13.6.2 ShOU ror = €13.63 May. : C14.1 Responsibilities . : C1.4.2 Contractor's Responsibilities. C143 Verification Inspection (C2. Design of Welded Connections. (C2.2.2 CVN Test Requirements. C2.2.5.4 Prequalified Detail Dimensions. 2.3.2.5 Maximum Effective Length 2.5.1 Calculated Stresses. €2.5.2 Calculated Stresses due to Eccentricity €2.54 Allowable Weld Metal Stresses €2.5.4.2 Alternative Allowable Fillet Weld Stress C2.5.4.3 Instantaneous Center of Rotation €2.6.1 General Considerations. €2.6.3 Base Metal Through-Thickness Loading, €2.64 and C2.6.5 Combinations of Welds €2.6.6 Weld Access Holes. €2.7.1 Transitions of Thickness and Width €2.8.1.1 Transverse Fillet Welds C2.8.2 Longitudinal Fillet Welds: C2.83.1 Fillet Weld Terminations—General 2.8.3.2 Lap Joints Subject to Tension 2.8.3.3 Maximum End Return Leng 2.8.3.4 Transverse Stiffener Welds. €2.8.3.5 Opposite Sides of a Common Plane. €2.11.2.1 General. €2.11.2.2 Compression Members. 2.1.2.3 Unpainted Weathering Steel 2.12.1 Applicability 2.13.2 Low Cycle Fatigue 2.13.4 Redundant-Nonredundant Members.. 2.14.1 Elastic Analysis... €2.15.2 Allowable Stress Range. €2.16.6 Fillet Weld Terminations. C2.19 General (Tubular Connections) C2.20 Allowable Stresses (Tubular) 2.20.1 Base-Metal Stresses, 2.203 Weld Stresses €2.2046.2 Fatigue Stress Categories €2.20.6:3 Basie Allowable Stress Limitation. €2.20.6.6 Fatigue Behavior Improvement. €2.20.6.7 Size and Profile Effects €2.24 Limitations ofthe Stength of Welded Connections €2.24.1.1 Local Failure, C2.24.1.2 General Collapse £224.13 Uneven Distribution of Lond (Weld Sizing). 2.24.2 Box T-, Y-, and K-Connections.. €2.24.2.1 Local Failure, €2.24.2.2 General Collapse C2.24.2.3 Uneven Distribution of Load (Effective Width). C2.24.2.4 Overlapping Connections. €2.242.5 Bending, €2.24.2.6 Other Configurations C2.26 Material Limitations... €2.26.1.3 Box T-, ¥-, or K-Connections.. (€2.26.2 Tubular Base-Metal Notch Toughness (€2.26.2.1 CVN Test Requirements ..an: 2.26.22 LAST Requirements. 2.26.23 Alternate Notch Toughness C3. Prequalification of WPSs 3.2.1 Prequalified Processes... (C3.3 Base Metal/Filler Metal Combinations. C3.5 Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperature equienens C3.6 Limitation of WPS Variable: é 3.7.2 Width/Depth Pass Limitat C3.7.3 Weathering Steel Requirements, C Table 3.7 Electrical Limitations C Table 3.7 Requirement for Multiple Electrode SAW .. C Table 3.7 Requirements for GMAWIFCAW €3.10 Plug and Slot Weld Requirements.. €3.11.2 Comer Joint Preparation. €3.13.1 Joint Dimensions C Figure 3.3 Effective Weld Size of Flare-Bevel-Groove Welded Joints. (C3.14 Postweld Heat Treatment (C4. Qualification (C4.1.1.1 Qualification Responsibility. C4.1.2 Performance Qualification of Welding Personnel : (C4.1.3.1 Period of Effectiveness — Welders and Welding Operators (C4.24 Positions of Test Welds. C4.4 Type of Qualification Tests € Table 4.2 WPS Qualification—CIP Groove Welds; Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness and Diameter Qualified C4.7 Essential Variables. (C4.7.1 SMAW, SAW, GMAW, GTAW and FCAW C Table 4.6. (C4.8.2 NDT. C48.3.2 Longitudinal Bend Tests. C4.8.3.3 Acceptance Criteria for Bend Tests C4.10.1 Type and Number of Specimens to be Tested (C4.11.1 Type and Number of Specimens—Fillet Welds. C4.12 CIP Groove Welds for Tubular Connections (C4.12.4 T-, Y-, and K-Connections without Backing Welded from One Side Only. (C4.12.4.4 Weldments Requiring Notch Toughness. : — (C4.15 Welding Processes Requiring Qualification (C4.17 WPS Requirements (ESWIEGW)... C4.17.2 All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements. C4.18 General (C4.22 Essential Variables. C Table 4.12 C Table 4.8... C4.26 CIP Groove Welds for Tubular Connections CS. Fabrication. €5.1 Scope... C5.2 Base Metal. (C5.3.1.3 Dew Poin/Manufucturer’s Certification €5.3.2 SMAW Electrodes oor 1 Low-Hydrogen Electrode Storage Condition. . 1 Electrode-Flux Combination: . (€5.3.3.3 Flux Reclamation 5.3.3.4 Crushed Slag, (5.3.4 GMAW/FCAW Electrodes (C54 ESW and EGW Processes C5.5 WPS Variables... C5.7 Heat Input Control for Quenched and Tempered Steel C5.8 Stress Relief Heat Treatment, : : €5.10 Backing €5.10.2 Full-Length Backing, C5.10.4 Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Connections C5.12.2 Minimum Ambient Temperature C5.13 Conformance with Design. C5.14 Minimum Fillet Weld Sizes (C5.15 Preparation of Base Metal €5.15.1.2 Repair €5.15.2 Joint Preparation. C5.15.4.3 Roughness Requirements C5.16 Reentrant Corners. C5.17 Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes... C5.17.1 Weld Access Hole Dimensions C5.18.2 General Requirements for Tack Welds, (€5.19 Camber in Built-Up Members. 5.22.1 Fillet Weld Assembly 5.22.2 PIP Groove Weld Assembly. (C5.22.3 Butt Joint Alignment. C5.22.4,2 Tubular Cross-Sectional Variations. 5.2.4.3 Correction. 5.23.2 and C5,23.3 Beam and Girder Straightness €5.23.4 Beam and Gitder Camber (without Designed Concrete Hauneh).. €5.23.6.1 Measurements een oes €5.23.6.2 Statically Loaded Nontubular Structures €5.23.6.4 Excessive Distortion. e C5.23.8 Flange Warpage and Tilt. C5.23.10 Bearing at Points of Loading €5.23.11.4 Other Dimensional Tolerances C5.24 Weld Profiles cssinnsn €5.26.1 Contractor Option (Repair) C5.26.2 Localized Heat Repair Temperature Limitations (C5.26.5 Welded Restoration of Base Metal with Mislocated Holes. C5.27 Peening. 5.28 Caulking C5.29 Are Strikes. €5.30 Weld Cleaning. C531 Weld Tabs... C6. Inspection... €6.1 Scope... C6.1.1 Information Furnished to Bidders C6.1.2 Inspection and Contract Stipulations. C6.1.3 Definition of Inspector Categories €6.1,5 Inspector Responsibility C6.1.6 Items to be Furnished to the Inspector €6.1.7 Inspector Notification. (C6.2 Inspection of Materials 6.3 Inspection of WPS Qualification and Equipment. Cé6.4 Inspection of Welder, Welding Operator, and Tack Welder Qualifications. C6.4.1 Determination of Qualifica (C6.4.2 Retesting Based on Quality of Work... €6.4.3 Retesting Based on Certification Expiration. €6.5 Inspection of Work and Records urns €6.6.1 Contractor Responsibilities. €6.6.2 Inspector Requests. C6.64 Specified NDT Other than Visual €6.7 Seope. C6.8 Engineer's Approval for Altemate Acceptance Criteria © Tbe 6.1 Nem 8 Piping Porsiy. (C6.9 Visual Inspection €6.10 PT and MT. 6.11 NDT. €6.12.2 Acceptance Criteria for Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Connections C6.13.1 Acceptance Criteria for Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. €6.13.2 Acceptance Criteria for Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Connections. €6.13.3 UT Acceptance Criteria for Tubular Connections, : C6.14 Procedures — €6.14.6 Personnel Qualification €6.15 Extent of Testing. Page No. €6.15.3 Spot Testing. 459 6.16.1 Procedures and Standards (RT) . : 59 C6.16.2 Variations. 459 C6.17 RT Procedute. 459 459 460 460 €6.17.2 Safety Requirement €6.17.3 Removal of Reinforcement €6.17.3.1 Tabs... C6.17.3.3 Reinforcement 460 C6.17.4 Radiographic Film. 460 460 €6.17.5 Technique €6.17.5.1 Geometric Unsharpnes.. €6.17.5.2, C6.17.5.3 Source-to-Subject Distance and Limitations €6.17.6 Sources. 6.17.7 101 Selection and Placement 460 C6.17.8.3 Backscatter 460 €6.17.9 Film Width, . 460 €6.17.10 Quality of Radiographs 460 6.17.11. H& D Density... ns etnies 460 ions... se ve a 460 (€6.17.11.2 Trans C6.17.12 Identification Marks 460 €6.17.13 Edge Blocks. 461 461 461 461 461 461 462 462 won 462 462 462 462 462 463 463 463 463 6.19 Examination, Report, and Disposition of Radiographs. €6.19.1 Equipment Provided by Contracto €6.19.2, C6.19.3 Reports and Retention. €6.20.1 UT Procedures and Standards €6.20.2 Variations. €6.2033 Piping Porosity, €6.22 UT Equipment. €6.22.6 Straight Beam (Longitudinal Wave) Search Unit. (€6.22.7.2 Transducer Dimension: ns (€6.23.1 TIW Standard... C Figure 6.22. €6,23.2 Prohibited Reflector €6.24.1 Horizontal Linearity... €6.24.2 Gain Control. €6.24.4 Calibration of Angle Bear Search Units €6.25.4.1 Sweep sen €6.25.5.1 Horizontal Sweep 463 €6.264 Couplants. ns 463 €6.26.5 Extent of Testing : 463, C6.2655.1 Reflector Size e €6.26.5.2 Inaceessibility, C Table 66... Legend * 6.26.6 Testing of Welds. €6.26.6.4 Attenuation Factor. €6.26.7 Length of Discontinuite 6.26.8 Basis for Acceptance or Rejection... C6.26.12 Groove Welds Containing Steel Backing. €6.27 UT of Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connections.. C7. Stud Welding. 471 7.1 Scope... ae earl C7.2 General Requirements 41 7.2.5 Stud Finish C7.3 Mechanical Requirements. C74 Workmanship. (C7.4.6 and C7.4.7 Are Shield Removal... C7.5.1 Automatic Machine Welding. 7.5.5 FCAW, GMAW, SMAW Fillet Weld Option. C7.6 Stud Application Qualification Requirements C7.6.1 Purpose 7 sen C7.7 Production Control C7.7.1.4 Bending . C78 Fabrication and Verification Inspection Requirements C7.8.2 and C7.84 Additional Test.. C8, Strengthening and Repairing of Existing Structures. 8.1 General. C8.2 Base Metal. €8.2.1 Investigation. 8.22 Suitability for Welding. 3 Design for Stengtheing and Reps €8.3.1 Design Process €8.3.3 Fatigue History C835 Loading During Operation. C8.3.7 Use of Existing Fasteners €8.4.1 Fatigue Life Enhancement 8.4.2 Stress Range Increase, C8.5 Workmanship and Technique . C8.5.2 Member Discontinuities C8.54 Base Metal of Insufficient Thickness... 8.5.5 Heat Straightening C8.5.6 Welding Sequence 8.6 QUALITY nnn Annex CIX—Manufacturer’s Stud Base Qualification Requirements. ‘Annex CXI—Guidelines on Alternative Methods for Determining Preheat (CXII Preheat—Background Review and Discussion... CXII.1 General Observations CXII.2 Basis of Predicting Preheat. CXIL3 Scope of Proposed Preheat Requirements, CXI2 Restraint C1 Relation Betwesn Energy Tap and Fillet Leg Size CXI4 Application. Index. se sn ve ee 491 List of Tables Table 21 Effective Weld Sizes of Flare Groove Welds. 2.2 Z Loss Dimension (Nontubular) 2.3 Allowable Stresses ' 24 Fatigue Stress Design Parameters 25 Allowable Stresses in Tubular Connection Welds. 2.6 Stress Categories for Type and Location of Material for Citeular Sections. 27 Fatigue Category Limitations on Weld Size or Thickness and Weld Profile (Tubular Connections) 28 Z Loss Dimensions for Calculating Prequalified PJP T-.Y-, and K-Tubular Connection Minimum ‘Weld Sizes. 2.9 Terms for Strength of Connections (Circular Sections) 3.1 Prequalified Base Metal—Filler Metal Combinations for Matching Strength 3.2. Prequalified Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperature. 3.3. Filler Metal Requitements for Exposed Bare Applications of Weathering Steels. 34 Minimum Prequalified PIP Weld Size (E) 3.5 Joint Detail Applications for Prequalified CIP T-, Y-, and K-Tubular Connections 3.6 Prequalified Joint Dimensions and Groove Angles for CIP Groove Welds in Tubular T-, ¥, and K.Conneetions Made by SMAW, GMAW- 3.7 Prequalified WPS Requirements 4.1 WPS Quslification—Production Welding Positions Qualified by Plate Pipe, and Box Tube Tests 4.2 WPS Quslification—CIP Groove Welds: Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness and Diameter Qualified. 4.3 Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified —WPS Qualification; PIP Groove Welds. 44 Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified -WPS Qualification; Fillet Welds 45° POR Essential Variable Changes Requiring WPS FCAW, and GTAW, 4.6 POR Supplementary Essential Variable Changes for CVN Testing Applications Requiring WPS ‘Requalification for SMAW, SAW, GMAW, FCAW, and GTAW 47 POR Essential Variable Changes Requiring WPS Requalification for ESW or EGW. 48 Table 3.1, Annex M and Unlisted Steels Qualified by PQR. 49 Welder Qualification—Produetion Welding Positions Qualified by Plate, Pipe, and Box Tube Tests 4.10 Welder and Welding Operator Qualification—Number and Type of Specimens and Range of ‘Thickness and Diameter Qualified, and FCAW. Requalfication for SMAW, SAW, GMAW, 4.11 Welding Personnel Performance Essential Variable Changes Requiring Requalification 4.12 Electrode Classification Groups. 5.1 Allowable Atmospheric Exposure of Low-Hydrogen Electrodes, 52. Minimum Holding Time 33 Alternate Stress-Relief Heat Treatment SA Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Mill Induced Laminar Discontinuities in Cut Surfaces 5.5 Tubular Root Opening Tolerances 3.6 Camber Tolerance for Typical Girder 5.7 Camber Tolerance for Gitders without a Designed Concrete Haunch, 5.8 Minimum Fillet Weld Sizes 6.1 Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria Page No. 23 23 24 25 35 37 39 39 40 2 65 67 67 67 68 9 130 131 133 133 Table Page No. 62 UT Acceptance-Rejection Criteria (Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections). 219 6.3 UT Acceptance-Rejection Criteria (Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Connections) 220 64 Hole-Type IQI Requirements. 221 65 Wire QI Requirements 221 66 QI Selection and Placement. 222 6.7 Testing Angle 223 7.1 Mechanical Property Requirements for Studs 258 7.2. Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Small Diameter Studs 258 TL-1 Equivalent Fillet Weld Leg Size Factors for Skewed T-Joints 268 TI-1 — CVN Test Requirements 271 TH2 CVN Test Temperature Reduction 271 TV-1 Code Requirements that May be Changed by WPS Qualification Tests 273 XI-1 Susceptibility Index Grouping as Function of Hydrogen Level “H” and Composition Parameter Poy ...302 XI-2 Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperatures for Three Levels of Restraint 302 ‘Typical Current Ranges for GMAW-S on Steel. 312 Acceptance-Rejection Criteria 373 Survey of Diameter/Thickness and Flat Width/Thickness Limits for Tubes. 414 Suggested Design Factors AIS ‘Values of JD AIS Structural Steel Plates ANG ‘Structural Stee! Pipe and Tubular Shapes. 4l7 ‘Structural Steel Shapes. 47 Classification Matrix for Applications. 418. CVN Testing Conditions 418. CVN Test Values. 440 HAZ CVN Test Values. 440 UT Acceptance Criteria for 2 in. [50 mm] Welding, Using a 70° Probe. 467 Guide to Welding Suitability. 478 Relationship Between Plate Thickness and Burt Radius. 478 List of Figures Figure Page No. ‘Maximum Fillet Weld Size Along Edges in Lap Joints, ‘Transition of Butt Joints in Parts of Unequal Thickness (Nontubular) Transition of Widths (Statieally Loaded Nontubular), Transversely Loaded Fillet Welds. Minimum Length of Longitudinal Fillet Welds at End of Plate or Flat Bar Members. ‘Termination of Welds Near Edges Subject 1o Tension, End Retr at Flexible 28 Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides of a Common Plane 2.9 Thin Filler Plates in Splice Joint 2.10 Thick Filler Plates in Splice Joint 2.11 ‘Allowable Stress Range for Cyclically Applied Load (Fatigue) in Nontubular Connections 2.12 Transition of Width (Cyclically Loaded Nontubular. 2.13 Allowable Fatigue Stress and Strain Ranges for Stress Categories (see Table 2.6), Redundant ‘Tubular Structures for Atmospheric Service. AB 2.14 Parts of a Tubular Connection. AD 2.15 Fillet Welded Lap Joint (Tubular), — 52 2.16 Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connection Fillet Weld Footprint Radius. 32 2.17 Punching Shear Stress. 33 218 Detail of Overlapping Joint ....nen = sn 33 2.19 Limitations for Box T-, Y-, and K-Connections. 54 Overlapping K-Connections 34 Transition of Thickness of Butt Joints in Parts of Unequal Thickness (Tubular) 35 ‘Weld Bead in which Depth and Width Exceed the Width of the Weld Face 70 Fillet Welded Prequalified Tubular Joints Made by SMAW, GMAW, and FCAW 1 Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joint Details. B Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joint Details 87 Prequalified Joint Details for PJP T-, Y-, and K-Tubular Connections. 109 Prequalified Joint Details for CIP T-, Y-, and K-Tubular Connections 12 Definitions and Detailed Selections for Prequalified CIP T-, Y-, and K-Tubular ConnectionS.mre 13 Prequalified Joint Details for CIP Groove Welds in Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connections— ‘Standard Flat Profiles for Limited Thickness... na 3.9 Prequalified Joint Details for CJP Groove Welds in Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connections Profile with Toe Fillet for Intermediate Thickness... MIS 3.10 Prequalified Joint Details for CIP Groove Welds in Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connections-— Concave Improved Profile for Heavy Sections or Fatigue 116 3.11 Prequalified Skewed T-Joint Details (Nontubular..... ' senna IT 4.1 Positions of Groove Welds, 146 4.2 Positions of Fillet Welds 147 43 Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds. 148 44 Positions of Test Pipe or Tubing for Groove Welds. 149 4S Positions of Test Plate for Fillet Welds... 150 4.6 Positions of Test Pipes or Tubing for Fillet Welds. 151 4.7 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Pipe 182 48 Location of Test Specimens for Welded Box Tubing 153 49 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plates—ESW and EGW— WPS Qualification 154 Figure Page No. 4.10 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate Over 3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick— WPS Qulification 155 4.11 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate 3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick and Under WPS Qualification 136 4.12 Face and Root Bend Specimens. 157 4.13 Side Bend Specimens..o-.n 138 4.14 Reduced Section Tension Specimens 159 4.15 Guided Bend Test fig 160 4.16 Alternative Wraparound Guided Bend Test Jig 161 4.17 Alternative Roller-Equipped Guided Bend Test Jig for Bottom Ejection of Test Specimen. 161 4.18 All-Weld-Metal Tension Specimen. 162 4.19 Fillet Weld Soundness Tests for WPS Qualification vo 163 4.20. Pipe Fillet Weld Soundness Test—WPS Qualificato sn “164 421 Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness —Welder Qualification 165 422 Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness — Welding Operator Qualification, 165 423 Location of Test Specimen on Welded Test Plate 1 in. [25 mm] Thick—Consumables Verification for Fillet Weld WPS Qualification 166 424 Tubular But Joint—Welder or WPS Qualification—without Backing 167 4.25 Tubular Butt Joint—Welder or WPS Qualification—with Backing 167 4.26 Acute Angle Heel Test (Restraints not Shown) 168 4.27 Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections without Backing on Pipe or Box Tubing —Welder and WPS Quulification 169 428 Comer Macroetch Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections without Backing on Box Tubing for CIP Groove Welds—Welder and WPS Qualification 169 429 Optional Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness—Horizontal Position—Welder Qualification 170 430 Test Plate for Limited Thicknoss—Alll Positions —Welder Qualification m1 431 Optional Test Plate for Limited Thickness—Horizontal Position— Welder Qualification m 432 Fillet Weld Root Bend Test Plate—Welder or Welding Operator Quulification—Option 2 173 433 Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Pipe and Box Tubing — Welder Qualification 174 434 Method of Rupturing Specimen—Tack Welder Qualification 175 4.35 Butt Joint for Welding Operation Qualification—ESW and EGW. 175 4.36 Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate—Welder or Welding Operator Qulification— Option 1 176 437. Plug Weld Macroetch Test Plate— Welding Operator or Welder Qualification 17 438 Fillet Weld Break Specimen—Tack Welder Qualification 178 S.1 Bdge Discontinuities in Cut Material 195 52 Weld Access Hole Geometry 196 53. Workmanship Tolerances in Assembly of Groove Welded Joints 197 54 Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles 198, 6.1 Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by RT for Statically Loaded Nontubular Structures 226 62 Maximum Acceptable RT Images per 6.12.3.1 207 63 ForRT of Tubular Joints 1-1/8 in, [30 mm] and Greater, Typical of Random Acceptable Discontinities 228 64 Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Cyclically Loaded Nontubular ‘Tension Welds (Limitations of Porosity and Fusion Discontinuities) 229 65 Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Cyclically Loaded Nontubular ‘Compression Welds (Limitations of Porosity or Fusion-Type Discontinuities) 230 66 Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by RT of Tubular Joints.....231 67 Class R Indications 238 68 Class X Indications 237 69 Hole-Type IQ 238 6.10 Wire 1Q1 230 Figure Page No. 6.11 RT Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Approximately Equal Thickness Joints 10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length 240 6.12 RT Identification and Hole-Type or Wire 1QI Locations on Approximately Equal Thickness Joints Less than 10 in, (250 mm} in Length 2a 6.13 RT Identification and Hole-Type or Wire 1QI Locations on Transition Joints 10 in, [250 mum] and Greater in Length 7 sn sn see DAD 6.14 RT Identification and Hole-Type or Wire [QI Locations on Transition Joints Less than 10 in, [250 mm] in Length 243 615 RT Edge Blocks 243 6.16 Single-Wall Exposure—Single-Wall View 244 6.17 Double-Wall Exposure—Single-Wall View 244 6.18 Double-Wall Exposure—Double-Wall Elliptical) View, Minimum Two Exposures. 245 6.19 Double-Wall Exposure—Double-Wall View, Minimum Three EXposuteS.suronnsn se AS 6.20 Transducer Crystal 246 621 Qualification Procedure of Search Unit Using TIW Reference Block 246 6.22 International Institute of Welding (IW) UT Reference Blocks. 247 6.23 Qualification Blocks 248 624 Plan View of UT Scanning Patterns, 250 625 Scanning Techniques. 251 6.26 Transducer Positions (Typical) 252 7.1 Dimension and Tolerances of Standard-Type Shear Connectors, 259 7.2 Typical Tension Test Fixture: 259 7.3. Torque Testing Arrangement and Table of Testing Torques. 260 TI-1__ CVN Test Specimen Locations: 272 VIIL-1 “Temperature-Moisture Content Chart to be Used in Conjunction with Testing Program to Determine Extended Atmospheric Exposure Time of SMAW Low-Hydrogen Electrodes 288 VIIL-2 Application of Temperature-Moisture Content Chart in Determining Atmospheric Exposure Time of Low-Hydrogen SMAW Electrodes, 289 Bend Testing Devic 293 Suggested Type of Device for Qualification Testing of Small Studs, 293 Other Approved Blocks and Typical Transducer Position 297 Zone Classification of Steels, 303 Critical Cooling Rate for 350 VH and 400 VE 303 Graphs to Determine Cooling Rates for Single-Pass SAW Fillet Welds 305 Relation Between Fillet Weld Size and Energy Input. 308 Oscillograms and Sketches of GMAW-S Metal Transfer 312 Example of the Use of Form D-8 UT Unit Certification. 325 Example of the Use of Form D-9. 327 Example of the Use of Form D-10. 329 Standard Reference Reflector 364 Recommended Calibration Block 364 Typical Standard Reflector (Located in Weld Mock-Ups and Production Welds) 365 Transfer Correction 366 Compression Wave Depth (Horizontal Sweep Calibration) 366 Compression Wave Sensitivity Calibration 367 ‘Shear Wave Distance and Sensitivity Calibration, 367 ‘Scanning Methods. 368 Spherical Discontinuity Characteristics. 369 K-10 Cylindrical Discontinuity Characteristics. 369 K-11 Planar Discontinuity Characteristis. 370 K-12 Discontinuity Height Dimension 370 K-13 Discontinuity Length Dimension 371 K-14 Display Seren Marking, 371 Figure K-15 Report of UT (Alternative Procedure) L-I Definition of Terms for Computed Alpha. ‘Commentary €2.1 Balancing of Fillet Welds About a Neutral Axis 419 C22. Shear Planes for Fillet and Groove Welds 419 C23. Eccentric Londing e — oo ee) C24 Load Deformation Relationship for Welds. 420 €25 Single Fillet Welded Lap Joints. 420 €2.6 Illustrations of Branch Member Stresses Corresponding to Mode of Loading, 420 C2.7_ Improved Weld Profile Requirements. . — C28 ‘Simplified Concept of Punching Shear Reliability of Punching Shear Criteria Using Computed Alpha. ‘Transition Between Gap and Overlap Connections . : Upper Bound Theorem. Yield Line Patterns. Examples of Centerline Cracking Details of Altemative Groove Preparations for Prequalified Comer Joints. ‘Type of Welding on Pipe That Does Not Require Pipe Qualification Examples of Unacceptable Reentrant Comers. Examples of Good Practice for Cutting Copes: Permissible Offset in Abutting Members. Correction of Misaligned Members ‘Typical Method to Determine Variations in Girder Web Flatness. Titustration Showing Camber Measurement Methods ‘Measurement of Flange Warpage and Tilt Tolerances at Bearing Points... {90° T- or Comer Joints with Steel Backing... ‘Skewed T- or Comer Joints Butt Joints with Separation Between Backing and Joint Effect of Root Opening on Butt Joints with Steel Backing. ‘Scanning with Seal Welded Steel Backing Resolutions for Scanning with Seal Welded Stee! Backing Microscopie Intrusions. Fatigue Life ‘Toe Dressing with Burr Grinder. ‘Toe Dressing Normal to Stress. Effective Toe Grinding. End Grinding. Hammer Peening Toe Remelting xl ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Structural Welding Code—Steel 1. General Requirements 1.1 Scope This code contains the requirements for fabricating and erecting welded steel structures. When this code is stipulated in contract documents, conformance with all provisions of the code shall be required, except for those provisions that the Engineer (see 1.4.1) or contract docu- ‘ments specifically modifies or exempts. ‘The following is a summary of the code sections: 1, General Requirements. This section contains basic information on the scope and limitations of the code. 2. Design of Welded Connections. This section con- tains requirements for the design of welded connections composed of tubular, or nontubular, product form members 3. Prequalification, This section contains the re- quirements for exempting a WPS (Welding Procedure Specification) from the qualification requirements of this code. 4. Qualification, This section contains the qualifica- tion requirements for WPSs and welding personnel (welders, welding operators and tack welders) necessary to perform code work. 5, Fabrication. This section contains the require- ‘ments for the preparation, assembly and workmanship of, welded steel structures, 6. Inspection. This section contains criteria for the qualifications and responsibilities of inspectors, accep- tance criteria for production welds, and standard pro- cedures for performing visual inspection and NDT (nondestructive testing). 7. Stud Welding. This section contains the require- ‘ment for the welding of studs to structural steel 8, Strengthening and Repair of Existing Struc- tures. This section contains basic information pertinent to the welded modification or repair of existing steel structures, 1.2 Limitations ‘The code is not intended to be used for the following: (1) Steels with a minimum specified yield strength ‘greater than 100 ksi (690 MPa] (2) Steels less than 1/8 in, [3 mm] thick. When base ‘metals thinner than 1/8 in. [3 mrn] thick are to be welded, the requirements of AWS D1.3 should apply. When used in conjunction with AWS D1.3, conformance with the applicable provisions of this code shall be required. (3) Pressure vessels or pressure piping. (4) Base metals other than carbon or low-alloy steels, AWS D1.6, Sructural Welding Code—Stainless Steel, should be used for welding stainless steel structures. When- ‘ever contract documents specify AWS DI.1 for welding stainless steel, the requirements of AWS DI.6 should apply. 1.3 Definitions ‘The welding terms used in this code shall be inter- preted in conformance with the definitions given in the latest edition of AWS 3.0, Standard Welding Terms and Definitions, supplemented by Annex B of this code and the following definitions: 1.3.1 Engineer. “Engineer” shall be defined as a duly ‘designated individual who acts for, and in behalf of, the ‘Owner on all matters within the scope of the code, 1.3.2 Contractor. “Contractor” shall be defined as any ‘company, or that individual representing a company, responsible for the fabrication, erection, manuficturing, or Welding, in conformance with the provisions of this cod 1.333 Inspectors 1.33.1 Contractor's Inspector. “Contractor's In- spector” shall be defined as the duly designated person ‘who acis for, and in behalf of, the Contractor on all SECTION 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS inspection and quality matters within the scope of the ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ‘The Engineer shall specify in contract documents, as code and of the contract documents. necessary, and as applicable, the following: 1.3.3.2 Verification Inspector. “Verification Inspec- tor” shall be defined as the duly designated person who acts for, and in behalf of, the Owner or Engineer on all inspection and quality matters specified by the Engineer, 1.33.3 Inspector(s) (unmodified), When the term “Inspector” is used without further qualification a the Specific Inspector category described above, it applies ‘equally to the Contractor's Inspector and the Verification Inspector within the limits of responsibility deseribed in 612, 1.3.4 OEM_(Original_Equipment_Manufacturer). SOEM™ shall be defined as that single Contractor that ‘assumes some or all of the responsibilities assigned by this code to the Engineet, 1.3.5 Owner. “Owner” shall be defined as the individual ‘or company that exercises legal ownership ofthe product ‘or structural assembly produced under this code. 1.3.6 Code Terms “Shall,” “Should,” and “May.” “Shall,” “should,” and “may” have the following significance: 1.3.6.1 Shall, Code provisions that use “shall” are ‘mandatory unless specifically modified in contract docu- ments by the Engineer, 13.6.2 Should. The word “should” is used to recom. ‘mend practices that are considered beneficial, but are not requirements. 1.3.6.3 May. The word “may” in a provision allows the use of optional procedures or practices that can be used as an alternative or supplement to code require: ‘ments. Those optional procedures that require the En neet’s approval shall either be specified in the contract documents, or require the Engineer's written approval ‘The Contractor may use any option without the Engi- neer’s approval when the code does not specify that the Engineer's approval shall be required, 1.4 Responsibilities 1.4.1 Engineer's Responsibilities. The Engineer shall be responsible for the development of the contract docu- ‘ments that govern products or structural assemblies pro- duced under this code, The Engineer may add to, delete from, or otherwise modify, the requirements of this code to mect the particular requirements of a specific struc- ture, All requirements that modify this code shall be in= ccorporated into contract document, 1) Code requitements that are applicable only when 2) All addtional NDT that is not specifically ad- dressed in the code 3) Verification inspection, when required by the Engineer (4) Weld acceptance criteria other than that speci in Section 6 (5) CVN toughness criteria for_weld_metal, base metal, andor HAZ when requited (6) For nontubular applications, whether the structure is statically or eyelially loaded, (7) All additional requirements that are not speci cally addressed in the cod (8) For OEM applications, the responsibilities of the partes involved. 1.42. Contractor's Responsibilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for WPSs, qualification of welding and contract documents fied 1.4.3 Inspector's Responsibilities 1.43.1 Contractor Inspection, Contractor inspection shall_be supplied by the Contractor_and_shall_be performed as necessary (0 ensure that materials and workmanship meet the fequitements of the contract ‘documents 1.43.2 Verification Inspection. The Engineer shall determine if Verification Inspection shall be performed. Responsibilities for Verification Inspection shall_be established between the Engineer and the Verification Inspector 1.5 Approval All references to the need for approval shall be inter- preted fo mean approval by the Building Commissioner ‘or the Engineer 1.6 Welding Symbols ‘Welding symbols shall be those shown in the latest edition of AWS A2.4, Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination. Special conditions shall be fully explained by added notes or detail. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 1.7 Safety Precautions ‘This technical document does not address all welding. and health hazards. However, pertinent information can be found in the following documents: (1) ANSI_ZA9.1, Safety in Welding Allied Processes (2) Manufacturer's safety literature on equipment and, materials 3) Other pertinent documents as appropriate, ‘These documents shall be referred to and followed as required (also see Annex J, Safe Practices). Cutting, and Note: This code may involve hazardous materials, opera tions, and equipment. The code does not purport to address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices. The user should determine the appli- cabilty of any regulatory limitations prior to use. ‘SECTION 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ‘This standard make sand the International System of Units (ST). The measure- ments may not be exact equivalents; therefore, each sys- tem shall be used independently of the other without ‘combining in any way. The standard with the designation ‘Di.1:2002 uses U.S. Customary Units, The standard des- ise of both U.S. Customary Units ignation DI_IM:2002 uses SI Units, The later are shown within brackets 1.9 Reference Documents Annex N contains a list ofall documents referenced in this code. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 2. Design of Welded Connections 2.0 Scope of Section 2 This section covers requirements for design of welded, ‘connections, It is divided into four parts as follows: Part_A—Common Requirements _for_Design_of Welded Connections (Nontubular and Tubular Members) Part B—Specific Requirements for Design of Non- tubular Connections (Statically or Cyelically Loaded) ‘The requirements shall apply in addition to the require: ‘ments of Part A. Part C—Specific Requirements for Design of Non- tubular Connections (Cyclically Loaded). When applica ble, the requirements shall apply in_addition to the requirements of Parts A and B. Part D— Specific Requirements for Design of Tubular ‘Structures (Statically and Cyclically Loaded). When ap- plicable, the requirements shall apply in addition to the requirements of Part A. Part A Common Requirements for Design of Welded Connections (Nontubular and Tubular Members) 2.1 Scope of Part A ‘This part contains requirements applicable to the de- sign of all welded connections of nontubular and tubular structures, independent of loading, 2.2 Contract Plans and Specifications 2.2.1 Plan and Drawing Information. Complete infor- ‘mation regarding base metal specification designation see 3.3 and 4.7.3) location, type, size, and extent of alll ‘welds shall be clearly shown on the contract plans and specifications, hereinafter referred to as the contract documents, Ifthe Engineer requires specific welds to be ‘performed in the field, they shall be designated in the contract documents, The fabrication and erection draw- ings, hereinafter referred to as the shop drawings, shall clearly distinguish between shop and field welds 2.2.2 Notch Toughness Requirements. If notch toush- ness of welded joints is required, the Engineer shall specify the minimum absorbed energy with the come- sponding test temperature for the filler metal classifies tion to be used, or the Engineer shall specify that the WPS be qualified with CVN tests. If WPSs with CVN ists are required, the Engineer shall specify the mini- ‘mum absorbed energy, the test temperature and whether the required CVN test performance is to be in the weld ‘metal, or both in the weld metal and the HAZ (see 4.1.1.3, ‘and Annex TD 2.23 Specifie Welding Requirements. The Engineer. in the contract documents. and the Contractor, in the shop which the Engineer or Contractor require a specific as- sembly order, welding sequence, welding technique o ther special precautions 2.2.4 Weld Size and Length, Contract design drawings shall specify the effective weld length and, for PJP ‘groove welds, the required weld size “(E).” For fillet welds and skewed T-joints, the following shall be provided on the contract documents (1) For fillet welds between parts with surfaces meet ing at an_angle between 80° and 100°, contract docu- ‘ments shall specify the fillet weld leg size 2) For welds between parts with the surfaces meet. ing at an angle less than 80° or greater than 100°, the ‘contract documents shall specify the effective throat End returns and hold-backs for fillet welds, ifrequired by design, shall be indicated on the contract documents 22.8 Shop Drawing Requirements. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate by welding symbols or sketches the details of groove welded joints and the preparation of base metal required to make them. Both width and thick- ness of steel backing shall be detailed. ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS 2.2.8.1 PJP Groove Welds, Shop drawings shal indi- cate the weld groove depths "S” needed to attain weld size “(E)” required for the welding process welding to be used. 5.2 Fillet Welds and Welds in § ‘The following shall be provided on the shop drawing 1) For fillet welds berween parts with surfaces meet- ing at an angle between 80° and 100°, shop drawin shall show the filet weld leg size, (2) For welds between parts with surfaces meeting at an angle Tess chan 80° of greater than 100°, the shop drawings shall show the detailed arrangement of welds and required leg size to account for effets of joint geom- etry and, where appropriate the Z-loss reduction for the process 1 be used and the angle, 3) End retums and hold-backs, symbols. The contract documents shall show CIP oF PIP groove weld requirements, Contract docu: ‘ments do not need to show groove type oF groove dimen- The welding symbol without dimensions and with the tail designates a CIP weld as follows: cs The welding symbol without dimension and without CJP in the tail designates a weld that will develop the adjacent base metal in tension and shear A welding sym- bol for a PIP groove weld shall show dimensions enclosed in parentheses above “(E,)” and/or below “(E,)” the refer- cence line to indicate the groove weld sizes on the other and arrow sides of the weld joint, respectively, as shown below: ey) (2) 2.2.84 Prequalified Detail Dimensions, The joint details described in 3.12 (PIP) and 3.13 (CIP) have re~ peatedly demonstrated their adequacy in providing the conditions and clearances necessary for depositing and fusing sound weld metal to base metal, However, the use Of these details shall not be interpreted as implying con- sideration of the effects of welding process on base metal beyond the fusion boundary nor suitability of the joint detail fora given application 2.2.88 Special Details. When special groove details are required, they shall be detailed in the contract documents 2.2.8.6 Specific Inspection Requirements. Any specific inspection requirements shall be noted on the contract documents PART A ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 2.3 Effective Areas 23.1 Groove Welds 23.1.1 Effective Length. The maximum effective weld length of any groove weld, regardless of orients- tion, shall be the width of the part joined, perpendicular to the direction of tensile or compressive stress. For groove welds transmitting shear, the effective length is the length specified 23.1.2 Effective Size of CIP Groove Welds. The weld size of a CIP groove weld shall be the thickness of the thinner part joined. An increase in the effective area for design calculations for weld reinforcement shall be prohibited. Groove weld sizes for T-, Y-, and K- ‘connections in tubular construction are shown in Table 3.6. “(E)” specified in 3.12.2.1 unless the WPS is qualified in ‘conformance with Section 4. 2.3.1.4 Effective Weld Size (Flare Groove). The ef- fective weld size for flare groove welds when filled flush to the surface ofa round bar, a 90° bend in a formed sec- tion, or rectangular tube shall be as shown in Table 2.1, ‘except as allowed by 4.10.5, 23.1.5 Effective Area of Grooye Welds. The effec- tive area of groove welds shall be the effective length multiplied by the effective weld size. 23.2 Fillet Welds 23.21 Effective Length (Straight). The effective length of a straight fillet weld shall be the overall length of the full size fillet, including end returns. No reduction in effective length shall be assumed in design calcula- tions to allow for the star or stop crater of the weld. 2.3.22 Effective Length (Curved). The effective length of a curved fillet weld shall be measured along the centerline of the effective throat 2.3.2.3 Minimum Length, The minimum length of a fillet weld shall be atleast four times the nominal size, or the effective size of the weld shall be considered not to exceed 25% of its effective length. 23.24 Intermittent Fillet Welds (Minimum Length). The minimum length of segments of an inter rmittent fillet weld shall be 1-1/2 in. (38 mm.) 2.3.2.8 Maximum Effective Length. For end-loaded fillet welds with a length up to 100 times the leg dimen= sion, itis allowed to take the effective length equal to the ‘sctual length, When the length of end-loaded fillet welds ‘exceeds 100 but not more than 300 times the weld size, the effective length shall be determined by multiplying the actual length by the reduction coefficient B. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 L_= actual length of end-loaded weld in, [mm] w= weld leg size, in, [mm When the length exceeds 300 times the leg size, the cffgetive length shall be taken as 180 times the leg size 23.2.6 Caleulation of Effective Throat. For fillet welds between parts meeting at angles between 80° and 100° the effective throat shall be taken as the shortest dis- lance from the joint root to the weld face of a 90° dia- ‘grammatic weld (see Annex T) For welds in acute angles between 60° and 80° and for welds in obtuse angles zzreater than 100°, the weld ley size required to provide the specified effective throat shall be calculated 10 ac- ‘count for geometry (see Annex IT), For welds in acute an- sles between 60°and 30°, leg size shall be increased by the Z loss dimension to account for the uncertainty of sound weld metal in the root pass of the narrow angle for the welding process to be used (see 2.3.3), 2.3.2.7 Reinforcing Fillet Welds. The effective throat ‘ofa combination PIP groave weld and a fillet weld shall bbe the shortest distance from the joint root to the weld face of the diagrammatic weld minus 1/8 in, (3 mm for ny groove detail requiring such deduction (see Figure 3.3, and Annex 1) 2.3.2.8 Minimum Size. The minimum size fillet weld, shall not be smaller than the size required to transmit the applied load nor that provided in 5.14, 23.2.9 Maximum Weld Size in Lap Joints. The maximum fillet weld size detailed along the edges of base metal in lap joints shall be the following: (1) the thickness ofthe base metal, for metal ess than 14 in, [6 mm] thick (See Figure 2.1, Detail A). 2) 1/16 in, [2 mm] less than the thickness of the base ‘metal, for metal 1/4 in, [6 mm] or more in thickness (see Figure 2.1, Detail B), unless the weld is designated on the shop drawing to be built out to obtain full throat thickness for a fey size equal to the base metal thickness, In the as-welded condition, the distance between the edge of the base metal and the toe of the weld may be less than 1/16 in. [2 mm] provided the weld size is clearly verifiable, 23.2.10 Effective Area of Fillet Welds. The effective area shall be the effective weld length multiplied by the effective throat. 23.3 Skewed T-Joints 23.3.1 General. T-joints in which the angle between joined parts is greater than 100° or less than 80° shall be PART A ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS defined as skewed T-joints, Prequalified skewed T-jint ‘details are shown in Figure 3.11. The details of joints for the obtuse and acute sides may be used together or inde- pendently depending upon service conditions and design with proper consideration for effects of eccentricity 2.3.3.2 Welds in Acute Angles Between 80° and 60° and in Obtuse Angles Greater than 100°, When welds ‘are deposited in angles between 80° and 60° o in angles ‘greater than 100° the contract documents shall specify the required effective throat, The shop drawings shall ‘clearly show the placement of welds and the required le dimensions to satisfy the required effective throat (see Annex II 2.3.3.3 Welds in Angles Between 60° and 30°. When welding is required in an acute angle that is less than 60° but equal to or greater than 30° [Figure 3.11(D)}, the effective throat shall be increased by the Z-loss allow: ‘ance (Table 2.2). The contract documents shall speci the required effective throat, The shop drawings shall show the required leg dimensions fo satisfy the required effective throat, increased by the Z-loss allowance (Table 2.2) (see Annex II for calculation of effective throat 2.3.3.4 Welds in Angles Less than 30°, Welds depos- ited in acute angles less the 30° shall not be considered as effective in transmitting applied forces except as mod- ified for tubular structures in 4.12.4.2. 23.3.5 Effective Length of Skewed T-Joints. The ‘effective length of skewed T-joints shall be the overall length of the full size weld, No reduction shall be as- sumed in design calculations to allow forthe start or stop ‘ofthe weld. 23. um _Skewed T-Joint Weld Size. The requirements of 2.3.2.8 shall apply. sion, The effective throat of a skewed T joint in angles shall be taken asthe shortest distance from the joint wot to the weld face 23.38 Effective Aven of Skewed T-Joints, The effective area of skewed Tejoints shall be the sped effective throat multiplied by the effective length. 2.34 Fillet Welds in Holes and SI lots ‘mum diameter of the hole or the width of slot in which a fillet weld is to be deposited shall be no less than the thickness of the part in which it is made plus 5/16 in, 8 mm] ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS 2.3.4.2 Slot Ends, Except for those ends which ex: tend to the edge of the part, the ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the comers rounded to a radius not less than the thickness ofthe part in which itis made, 23.4.3 Effective Length of Fillet Welds in Holes or Slots. For fillet welds in_holes or slots, the effective length shall be the length of the weld along the centerline ofthe throat 23.44 Effective Area of Fillet Welds in Holes or Slots. The effective area shall be the effective length multiplied by the effective throat. In the case of fillet welds of such size that they overlap at the centerline when deposited in holes or slots, the effective area shall not be taken as greater than the cross-sectional area of the hole or slot in the plane of the faying surface, 238 Plug and Slot Welds 23.5.1 Diameter and Width Limitations. The mini mum diameter of the hole or the width of slot in which 9 plug or slot weld is to be deposited shall be no less than the thickness of the part which it is made plus 5/16 in ‘8. mm.). The maximum diameter of the hole or width of slot shall not exceed the minimum diameter plus 1/8 in [3 mm] or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the part, which- ever is greater 23.8.2 Slot Length and Shape. The length of the slot in which slot welds are to be deposited shall not exceed ten times the thickness of the part in which it is made, ‘The ends of the slot shall be semicircular or shall have the comers rounded to a radius not less than the thickness ofthe part in which itis made. 238.3 Effective Area of Plug and Slot Welds. The effective area of plug and slot welds shall be the nominal area of the hole of slot in the plane of the faying surface. Part B Specific Requirements for Design of Nontubular Connections (Statically or Cyclically Loaded) 2.4 General ‘The specific requirements of Part B together with the requirements of Part A shall apply to all connections of nontubular members subject to static loading. The re- ‘quirements of Parts A and B, except as modified by Part , shall also apply to cyclic loading. PARTS A&B ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 2.5 Stresses 2.5.1 Caleulated Stresses. The v es to be compared with the allowable stresses shall be nominal siresses determined by appropriate analysis or stresses determined from the minimum joint strength require- ‘ments that may be specified in the applicable design specifications which invoke this code for design of welded connestions, 2.5.2 Calculated Stresses Due to Eccentricity. In the design of welded joints, the calculated stresses 10 be compared with allowable stresses, shall_include those ‘due to design eccentricity, if any, in alignment of con- nected parts and the position, size and type of welds, ‘except as provided in the following: for statically loaded structures, the location of fillet welds to balance the forces about the neutral axis or axes for end connections: ‘of single-angle, double-angle, and similar members is ‘not required. In such members, weld arrangements at the heel and toe of angle members may be distributed to con- form to the length of the various available edges. 2.5.3 Allowable Base Metal Stresses. The calculated base-metal stresses shall not exceed the allowable siresses specified in the applicable design specifications, 2.84 Allowable Weld Metal Stresses. The calculated slresses on the effective area of welded joints shall not ‘exceed the allowable stresses given in Table 2.3 except as allowed by 2.5.4.2 and 2.5.43. 2.84.1 Stress in Fillet Welds. Stress in fillet welds shall be considered as shear applied to the effective area for any direction of applied load, 2.5.42 Alternative Allowable Fillet Weld Stress. ‘The allowable shear stress on a linear fillet weld loaded in-plane through the center of gravity may be determined by Formula (1 Formula (1) F, = 0.30 Fexx (1.0+ 0.50 sin!) where F, = allowable unit stress, Fixx = electrode classification number strength angle between the direction of force and the axis of the weld element, degrees , electrode 2.84.3 Instantaneous Center of Rotation, The al- Towable stresses in weld elements within a weld group that are loaded in-plane and analyzed using an instan- taneous center of rotation method to maintain deforma- tion compatibility and the nonlinear load-deformation behavior of variable angle loaded welds shall be the following: ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 Fa Foi Fwy 0.30 Fxy (1.0 + 0.50 sin!*6) Fip) [p (1.90.99) Mo = EEF Fun 0) where F,,_= Total internal force in x direction F,,,_ = Total internal force in y direction Fu = X component of stress Fy, Fj, = y component of stress Fy; M_ = Moment of internal forces about the instanta- neous center of rotation P= Aim ratio of element “i” deformation t 60° ‘Thus for @ < 50° the heel, toe and sides of the branch ‘can be considered fully effective. For 8 2 60°, the heel is considered ineffective due to uneven distribution of load. For 50° < 8 < 60, interpolate. 2.23.5.2 T-, Y-, and X-Connections. The effective Tength of branch welds in structural, planar, T-, Y-, and X-connections between box sections, subjected to pre- dominantly static axial load, shal be taken as: 2a, +b, for 8 < 50° 2a, for 82 60" For 50°<0 <6 terpolate. 2.24 Limitations of the Strength of. Welded Connections 224.1 Circular T-, ¥-, and K-Connections (see 2.26.1.1) 224.1.1 Local Failure. Where a T-, Y-, or K- connection is made by simply welding the branch mem- ber(s) individually to the main member, local stresses at potential failure surface through the main member wall may limit the usable strength of the welded joint. The shear stress at which such failure occurs depends not ‘only upon the strength of the main member steel, but also ‘on the geometry of the connection, Such connections shall be proportioned on the basis of either (1) punching shear, or (2) ultimate load calculations as given below. ‘The punching shear is an allowable stress design (ASD) criterion and includes the safety factor. The ultimate load format may be used in load and resistance factor design (LRFD), with the resistance factor to be included by the designer, see 2.20.5, ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS (1) Punching Shear Format. The acting punching shear stress on the potential failure surface (see Figure 2.17) shall not exceed the allowable punching shear stress ‘The acting punching shear stress is given by acting V,~ tf, sin 6 The allowable punching shear stress is given by allow V5 = Qy- Qe-Fyu/(0.6 9) The allowable V, shall also be limited by the allowable shear stress specified in the applicable design specifies tion (eg, 04 Fo). ‘Terms used in the foregoing equations are defined as follows: +, 0,7, and other parameters of connection geometry ae defined in Figure 2.14(M) {ais the nominal axial (f,) or bending (stress in the iranch member (punching shear foreach Kept separate) Fyo = The specified minimum yield strength of the ‘main member chord, but not more than 2/3 the tensile strength, Qq, Qr are geometry modifier and stress interaction terms, respectively, piven in Table 2.9. For bending about wo axes (ey and 2), the effec- tive resultant bending stress in circular and square box sections may be taken as fm fy the For combined axial and bending stresses, the follow- ing forla shall be satisfied: Acting V,9!78 [aiowve] @) LRED Format (loads factored up to ultimate condition —see 220.5) +pamys ATW Vee Branch member loadings at which plastic chord wall failure in the main member occurs are given by: axial load: P, sin ®= € F,ol6 x B Qgl Qr bending moment: M, sin O= C Fyaldy/4][6 B Qu] Qr with the resistance factor © = 08, should be computed with T? redefined as (P./AF,.)? + (MJSF,q)? where P. and M, are factored chord load and moment, Ais area, Sis section modulus ‘These loadings are also subject to the chord material shear strength limits of: Pysin Sm die rl 3 _ PARTD ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 with © = 0.95 where te = chord wall thickness ‘d= branch member diameter and other terms are defined as 2.24.1.1 (1). ‘The limit state for combinations of axial load P and bending moment M is given by: (PP)! + MM, < 1.0 2241.2 General Collapse. Strength and stability of ‘a main member in a tubular connection, with any rein- forcement, shal be investigated using available technol- ‘ogy in conformance with the applicable design code. General collapse is particularly severe in cross connec- tions and connections subjected to crushing loads [see Figure 2.14(G) and (J)}. Such connections may be rein- forced by increasing the main member thickness, or by use of diaphragms, rings, or collars. (1) For unreinforced circular cross connections, the allowable transverse chord load, due to compressive branch member axial load P, shall not exceed Psin® SF, (19+ 7.2 JQ,Qr 2) For circular cross connections reinforced by a “joint can” having increased thickness t,, and length, L, the allowable branch axial load, P, may be employed as P= Puy + [Pay Po lL/2.5D for L<2.5D P=Pay for £22.50 ‘where Py) is obtained by using the nominal main mem- ber thickness in the equation in (1); and Py is obtained by using the joint can thickness in the same equation ‘The ultimate limit state may be taken as 1.8 times the foregoing ASD allowable, with ® = 0.8 (3) For circular K-connections in which the main member thickness required to meet the local shear provi- sions of 2.24.1.1 extends at least D/4 beyond the con- necting branch member welds, general collapse need not be checked 2.24.13 Uneven Distribution of Load (Weld Sizing) (1) Due to differences in the relative flexibilities of the main member loaded normal to its surface, and the branch member camrying membrane stresses parallel to its surface, transfer of load across the weld is highly non- uniform, and local yielding can be expected before the ‘connection reaches its design load. To prevent “unzip- ping” or progressive failure of the weld and ensure duc- tile behavior of the joint, the minimum welds provided in simple T-, Y-, or K-connections shall be capable of do- ‘veloping, at their ultimate breaking strength, the lesser of the brace member yield strength or local strength (punch- ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ing shear) of the main member. The ultimate breaking strength of fillet welds and PJP groove welds shall be computed at 2.67 times the basic allowable stress for (60 ksi [415 MPa] or 70 ksi [485 MPa] tensile strength and at 2.2 times the basic allowable stress for higher strength levels. The ultimate punching shear shall be taken as 1.8 times the allowable V, of 2.24.1.1 (2) This requirement may be presumed to be met by the prequalified joint details of Figure 3.8 (CIP) and 3.12.4 (PIP), when matching materials (Table 3.1) are used, (3) Compatible strength of welds may also be pre- sumed with the prequalified fillet weld details of Figure 3.2, when the following effective throat requirements are met (8) B= 0.7 & for elastic working stress design of mild steel circular steel tubes (F, < 40 ksi [280 MPa] joined with overmatched welds (classified strength Fx 70 ksi [485 MPa) (b) E= 1.0, for ultimate strength design (LRFD) of circular or box tube connections of mild steel, Fy S 40 ksi [280 MPa], with welds satisfying the matching strength requirements of Table 3.1 (6) E= lesser off. oF 1.07 ty forall other cases (4) Fillet welds smaller than those required in Figure 3.2 to match connection strenath, but sized only to resist design loads, shall atleast be sized for the following mul- tiple of stresses calculated per 2.23.3, to account for non- “uniform distribution of loa: ASD LRFD E60XX and E70XX. 135 Ls Higher strengths 16 18 2.24.14 Transitions, Flared connections and tube size transitions not excepted below shall be checked for local stresses caused by the change in direction at the transition (see Note 4 to Table 2.6). Exception, for static Toads Circular tubes having Df less than 30, and Transition slope less than 1:4, 2.24.15 Other Configur: 1s and Loads (1) The term “T=, Y-, and K-connections” is often used generically to describe tubular connections in which branch members are welded to a main member, or chord, at a structural node. Specific criteria are also given for cross (X-) connections (also referred to as double-tee) in 2.24.1.1 and 2.24.1.2. N-connections are a special case ‘of K-connections in which one of the branches is perpen- dicular to the chord; the same criteria apply (see Com- ‘mentary for multiplanar connections). PARTD ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS (2) Connection classifications as T-, ¥-, K-, or cross should apply to individual branch members according to the load pattern for each load case. To be considered a K- connection, the punching load in a branch member should be essentially balanced by loads on other braces in the same plane on the same side of the joint. In T- and Y-connections the punching load is reacted as beam shear in the chord, In eross connections the punching, Toad is carried through the chord to braces on the oppo- site side. For branch members which carry part of their Toad as K-connections, and part as T-, Y-, or cross ‘connections, interpolate based on the portion of each in total, or use computed alpha (see Commentary) 3) For multiplanar connections, computed alpha as ‘given in Annex L may be used to estimate the beneficial ‘or deleterious effect of the various branch member loads ‘on main member ovalizing, However, for similarly loaded ‘connections in adjacent planes, e., paired TT and KK ‘connections in delta trusses, no increase in capacity over that of the corresponding uniplanar connections shall be taken, 2.24.1.6 Overlapping Connections. Overlapping Joints, in which part of the load is transferred directly from one branch member to another through their com- ‘mon weld, shall include the following checks: (1) The allowable individual member load compo- nent, Py perpendicular to the main member axis shall be taken as P= (Vp & 11) + (Vy ty Is) where Vp is the allowable punching shear as defined in 2.24,1.1, and t._ = the main member thickness |= actual weld length for that portion of the branch ‘member which contacts the main member V, = allowable punching shear for the main member as K-connection (a= 1.0) ‘Vy = allowable shear stress for the weld between branch members (Table 2.5) the lesser of the weld size (effective throat) or the thickness t, of the thinner branch member I, =the projected chord length (one side) of the ‘overlapping weld, measured perpendicular to the main member. These terms are illustrated in Figure 2.18. ‘The ultimate limit state may be taken as 1.8 times the foregoing ASD allowable, with ® = 0.8 (2) The allowable combined load component parallel to the main member axis shall not exceed Vi ty Thi. where 3 is the sum of the actual weld lengths for all braces in contact with the main member. (3) The overlap shall preferably be proportioned for at least 50% of the acting P,. In no case shall the branch ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS member wall thickness exceed the main member wall thickness. (4) Where the branch members carry substantially different loads, or one branch member has a wall thick- ness greater than the other, or both, the thicker or more heavily loaded branch member shall preferably be the through member with its full circumference welded to the main member. (5) Net transverse load on the combined footprint shall satisfy 2.24.11 and 2.24.1.2. (6) Minimum weld size for fillet welds shall provide effective throat of 1.0 for F, < 40 ksi [280 MPa], 1.2% for F, > 40 ksi [280 MPa. 2.24.2 Box T-, Y, and K-Connections (see 2.26.1.1). CCiteria given in this section are all in ultimate load for- ‘mat, with the safety factor removed. Resistance factors for LRFD are given throughout. For ASD, the allowable capacity shall be the ultimate capacity, divided by safety factor of 1.44/®. The choice of loads and load fac~ tors shall be in conformance with the governing design specification; see 2.5.5 and 2.20.5. Connections shall be checked for each of the failure modes described below. These criteria are for connections between box sec- tions of uniform wall thickness, in planar trusses where the branch members loads are primarily axial. If compact sections, ductile material, and compatible strength welds are used, secondary branch member bending may be neglected, (Secondary bending is that due to joint defor- ‘mation or rotation in fully triangulated trusses, Branch member bending due to applied loads, sidesway of un- braced frames, etc., cannot be neglected and shall be designed for (see 2.24.25). Criteria in this section are subject to the limitations shown in Figure 2.19. 2.24.21 Local Failure. Branch member axial load P,, at which plastic chord wall failure im the main member ‘occurs is given by: : ‘ resin d= ot fg] and Y-connections with 0.25 0.85, using = 095, and Py sin O = (Fye/ 4/3) &D [20 * Boop + Basel for gap K- and N-connections with B > 0.1 + 9/50, using = 0.95 (this check is unnecessary if branch members ‘are square and equal width), where Bes = B for K-and N-connections with GS 1.5 (I-B) Bray = Bao forall other connections Ba (effective outside punching) = SBy but not more than B 2.24,2.2 General Collapse. Strength and stability of ‘a main member in a tubular connection, with any rein- forcement, shall be investigated using available technol- ‘ogy in conformance with the applicable design code. (1) General collapse is particularly severe in cross ‘connections and connections subjected to crushing loads. Such connections may be reinforced by increasing the main member thickness or by use of diaphragms, gus- sets, or collars, For unreinforced matched box connections, the ulti- mate load normal to the main member (chord) due to branch axial load P shall be limited to Py sin 8 = 2t, Flay +5 t) with ®= 1.0 for tension loads, rysin 8 = EERO atc. compression, and E = modulus of elasticity Pysin=15 € (1439) FF (Q) with © = 0.75 for all other compression branch loads ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 (2) For gap K- and N-connections, beam shear ade- quacy of the main member to carry transverse loads across the gap region shall be checked including inter- action with axial chord forces. This check is not required for U ¢ 0.44 in stepped box connections having B + 11$ H/D (His height of main member in plane of truss). 2.24.23 Uneven Distribution of Load (Effective Width). Due to differences in the relative flexibilities of the main member loaded normal to its surface and the branch member carrying membrane stresses parallel to its surface, transfer of load across the weld is highly non- iniform, and local yielding can be expected before the connection reaches its design load. To prevent progres- sive failure and ensure ductile behavior ofthe joint, both the branch members and the weld shall be checked, as follows: (1) Branch Member Check. The effective width axial capacity P, of the branch member shall be checked forall ‘gap K- and N-connections, and other connections having B > 0.85. (Note that this check is unnecessary if branch ‘members are square and equal width.) Py= Fyts(28 + bap + Boo — 4a) with ® = 0.95 where F, = specified minimum yield strength of branch ty = branch wall thickness b= branch dimensions [see Figure 2.14(B)] bg = b for K- and N-connections with ¢ < 1.5(1-B) bay = bas for all other connections b Fro beat Qe sb Note: TS 1.0 and F, $ Fy are presumed. (2) Weld Checks. The minimum welds provided in simple T-, Y-, or K-connections shall be capable of de- veloping st their ultimate breaking strength, the lesser of the branch member yield strength or local strength of the ‘main member. ‘This requirement may be presumed to be met by the prequalified joint details of Figure 3.6 (CJP and PIP), ‘when matching materials (Table 3.1) are used, ) Fillet welds shall be checked as deseribed in 2.23.5, 224.24 Overlapping Connections. Lap joints re- duce the design problems in the main member by tans- ferring most of the transverse load directly from one branch member tothe other (see Figure 2.20), The eriteria of this section are applicable to statically loaded connections meeting the following limitations: (1) The larger, thicker branch isthe thru member. (2) B 2028. PARTD ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS (3) The overlapping branch member is 0.75 t0 1.0 times the size of the through member with at least 25% Of its side faces overlapping the through member. (4) Both branch members have the same yield strength, (5) All branch and chord members are compact box tubes with widththickness < 35 for branches, and < 40 for chord ‘The following checks shall be made: (1) Axial capacity P, of the overlapping tube, using ® = 095 with Py = Fyty [Qor, 2a—4ty) + bey + bad for 25% to 50% overlap, with — Yeoverlap Qo. = eeree Py = Fy tela ay) + by + Bal for 50% 1 80% overap Py = Fy ty [2a—4i) +b + bad for 80% to 100% overlap. Py = Fyty [2a 41) + 2b.d for more than 100% overlap where bj is effective width for the fice welded to the chord, (Sb)F b= GOB:

D ~ sone I [pore frorxose]v Sodan) wontuosea sang Prowsoryy (Vez 90s) ssjoweseg uBIseq sseng onBRey vzede, ‘AWS D1.4/01.11-2002 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS (panamu0o) tals fori} a | py @ w We |sorxee] a prem a9 toa et 4 Suyorne prow Say ae A lem u soainupuoosp | (E81Z1 |s01x19 | a y pussy Jo songs wg ze w overt] a re ssaquaqy da-uing Jo susuodwo5 Suruior simor papea\—e won>9s (rani) 1 Sofa won duaseq My ssa prowsomu (penupues) rz e19eL ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 tay w oats aro i four 201021 ‘seus Jo uonoasp 24 01 [ae Xyenuasso punass spon {uss uoRD9s $8019 papla% 40 pajjor 1s papiam asoout a3 ov wasetpe 30 ut eto Pfam pu [eaU 2sUq_1'5 ‘ssanig Jo wonD231(| 0} 9510\SUEAL. SIMO PEPE PMS — © SS > Lo ~~ Lowen a w vr (slot lds 201X6E 501% magi) wz = zi wz St sossans ppm 2oueyeg 0 sx 9 uo potosoded 9g ys 5 "SuoNdeUUDD puD Papla% U9] yp siaquuaw papeoy 1 jou 250 TF pies aydsano jo puo se a8 Jo 80 uy aw 9 (siloz s01X6e ‘pus ot ss019e spam anoKN funy xp wey opus soqeydion09 papjam \p8uo4fensed yo spu we jiu aseg, 9°¢ (0) soxdionos Isiloz lids s01X6E 201% De) aig 0 = Ssou UE {uuu 9g] g'0 5 ssouyou aur ‘pus 241 ss019e SPAN, 4 a8 aqn we s9pum saredian0 o spup 4p ssa12e spo NOW 30 “spus paisdes Jo arenbs Surneq oun, ‘2 ung spouse sare 19900 POPP spat renued yo spus ye jou ase] $f sodurexg axvensny beawl sy Hy prousouyy 9 sumsuog ‘oda ssang wwonduoseq (penupuod) r'z 21921 ‘AWS D1.4/01.11-2002 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS {(panumu0d) w vs soyny mpanog 20 0 280g ow Surpass plow. yo 901 AunuU098 sous los]or sober ‘pasouwas tou sy yusmuaauqjuas PH UAH. /I-Ton | um sot ou sadoys Surany SSOUSH uy SuoRISUEL -sooyds 40 paxoutas Bup}9eq toH09 40-1 gf.) JO 901 241 1 WadEIE ypu raw ase Fg foul ,01%0C1 DPM aoa am punod® spam qu soonds papa ‘008 9 08 adele Jou} peau uy pu [eg 020] 4 06 ueNs owas so on yonba “4 yi you ase 5 - EB . Frrcclae <> es] cl four 0119 01 0c raw 029] 1910624 Teaw 029] 94 06> ‘4 z cop 208 ‘ou adojs © uo apeu yp 0 ssouyouy ren ssans Jo uous jan Sgeuasse punos® spam UN. s papjom anoos8 gf9 01 wa9¥pe 30 u aU 9] pur [OU aseq ZS soydurexg oan uo uoneanuy HD aod prousoruy ofa ssang wwonduasog (penuguod) 92 e192, ¢panunu09) ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS. ©) papisod ( Ww) S @ (a) (2) «. “ pepraoid ‘SS3ULS STISNSL ONIGNGE OL [69] 01 2 @ ©) Ww 7 sen eee | ss Joven] 3 @ f aorsip20 pian asoaus | PIL | s0lxee] a ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 (penuguod) yz e19eL ‘AWS D1.4/01.11-2002 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS {pana009) Ure] sy |,01% UL a acl Is} me (sri |yorxzz a {uw os] rz wwondusso ye pnwaied, iy ssang Prowssra {penupues) r'z e192 ‘AWS D1.4/01.11-2002 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS sowns useyry | [ss] 4 Spam 11820 Rad wozo4s FS rs ‘soydurexa asneusn rani] 19 | o8an5| wonduaseq My 109] ssang prow (penupues) rz e19eL 4 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 (panaiw09) 201777999) uonaouuos UO 094s a “AL wamnas usitog ‘avo [sto raw et posnaa | roayo | seo eg 080 aur aggoayo Uo 804s, saquit seg dn 7 su ong 0) sou PrmamJosneor ewe | nq yo sof yuprasue afuans emus om sous |S W eee uoyssautng 20 wos apna HH 430 septs oq wou peu pI>M ooss yo ranaaieayeve | spon gr3.03 ener ae Casy 205 | 2894810 “worssaiduoo woisuay ran pasnag | oud p2'2 995) Anowoes | suorsinoid p22 99s) SnaKu098 ‘Payeea noma se Yons Bupeo4 yeaau9 tgs eeu yy Banorery | ——-nonacu09 4q pause | uondonH09 hq put se fas eet eg span 2 pauisap samonns somaur sng nj seaters | so memarqaesseauns | paw gna orere par oe | __ S8ONRSIIO 20°} sainfig4o peop or Suruuoyuos | “1 fesmeaas w sO! Pa, Plan uofpe jaw aseq uo Bays 0 uossaudwo “uosu9y, a cy] Pram “4 so annoeye oxo uo wots sn00up af pameg | VASO | SORE PI a aseq 3 se a vate aynnaye 002004 gmaw.aiy samen | Soo | 60 jew asee een eae 7 pam anna a oy 2 oF rude worssaudwo 30 Sco mew =I aa 6 Stoo peu aeq a a Pan aro sao [ERE o eter arg 20) se aeons woyssoudtg 30 OHSU 1977 wang iauang @ ‘S590 IGENOILY ‘SANS J0 Puy wonroy dy 2e7qR, Praa1 24K, maysojta panndoy — | 1eewon, frowesaouesisal (aed wiseq (asv) eaisea soy 390811931 PUP PEO ss0ng a1gesoILV (€°0z'2 98S) spjam UORSEUUOD JejNqny UI sassang aIGemoI|y szegeL 35 ‘AWS D1.4/01.11-2002 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS ses ssoas® af 99 8ys vane woq2ouu09 2p NHL 9guU BL 3 UE ‘Sane aus gh yo tu anoy ps seas ase se ps0 a (ors 295g.) op 290X990 IHS PEA 8 2 pone ave 42 Jo sto.stoud a ato ‘aos ( grr oqpouuos ur S20. ogUi9 YossalUs09 0 wt) 30 0 gs ep 939 “pono UN I Jo YUN 350 pass 2q. legs resus ay Bay>HE (ane 395 sors -tnoud 42°7 998) Anowoo8 uwonaouuos 9248" FCAW-G 18 3 FCAW.G o 0 GMAW NA NA GMAW 0 0 GMAW-s 18 3 GMAWes us 3 SMAW va 6 SMAW v4 6 FCAW-S v4 6 FCAW-S 18 3 aso ge 30° FEAW.G 38 10 FCAW.G 14 6 GMa NIA NA ua 6 GMAW-S 38 10 14 6 39 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED CONNECTIONS ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 2.9 Terms for Strength of Connections (Circular Sections) (see 2.24.1.1) 1.7 ,0.18) gone ‘or axial loads (see Not —— a= (L228) 03% For axial loads (see Note 4) Geometry and load modifier Q, For bending ® For Bs06 (wesied for Q3) > RO For B>06 chord a= 10407 Bids For axial load in gap K-conneetions having all members in same plane and loads transverse to main member essentially 1sa<17 balanced (see Note 1) ao For axial load in T- and Y-connections a= 24 For axial lod in eross connections (owed fo «= 067 For in-plane bending (see Note 3) Cente for Qa) a= For outof-plane bending (see Note 3) ‘Main member stress Q= 10-2 U? ieraction erm Qe 0.030 For axial load in branch member (Gee Notes 2 and3) d= oss Forinplane bending in branch member = 0018 For out-of-plane bending in branch member Gover News +7.Bare geometry parameters defined by Figure 2.14(M). + Fos the specified minimum yield strength ofthe main member, but nt more than 2/3 the tensile strength Notes: 1 Gap gis define in Figures 2.14(E, (F) and (H; dis branch diameter 2, Ut the utlization rato (aio of actual to allowable) for longitudinal compression (xi, bending) in the main member atthe connection under consideration © -(aaig) *Coaig) 5. For combinations ofthe i-plane bending and out-of plane bending, we interpolated vals of ead 4 For general eollapse (wanserse compression) algo ave 22412. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 2, DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS 116 in [em 7 po, ES, BASE METAL LESS THAN BASE METAL 1/4 in. [6 mm] ‘W4in.[6 mm] THICK OR MORE IN THICKNESS “ ®) MAXIMUM DETAILED SIZE OF FILLET WELD ALONG EDGES: Figure 2.1—Maximum Fillet Weld Size Along Edges in Lap Joints (see 2.3.2.9) 4 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M2002 _> L> 25 r— (A) TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE REMOVE REMOVE > AFTER WELDING 1 AFTER WELDING 25 35 { 2 4 Es REMOVE 7 AFTER WELDING (B) TRANSITION BY SLOPING WELD SURFACE AND CHAMFERING 25 CHAMFER, 7 BEFORE WELDING (C) TRANSITION BY CHAMFERING THICKER PART Figure 2.2—Transition of Butt Joints in Parts of Unequal Thickness (Nontubular) (see 2.7.1 and 2.16.1.1) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 2, DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS 25 1 WIDTH OF NARROWER —“ WIOTH OF WIDER PLATE — BUTT JOINT a 25 Figure 2.3—Transition of Widths y Loaded Nontubular) (see 2.7.1 and 2.16.11) fiat rn st, mn | bi, (NOT LESS THAN 1 in [25 mm) Figure 2.4—Transversely Loaded Fillet Welds (see 2.8.1.1) ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M2002 Z T, LENGTH OF WELD NOT LESS THAN W DISTANCE BETWEEN. weips, w\. > NOT MORE THAN 16t Figure 2.5—Minimum Length of Longitudinal Fillet Welds at End of Plate or Flat Bar Members (see 2.8.2) HOLDBACK NOT LESS THAN WELD SIZE Figure 2.6—Termination of Welds Near Edges Subject to Tension (see 2.8.3.2) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 2, DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS Figure 2.7—End Return at Flexible Connections (see 2.8.3.3) Do NOT TIE WELDS TOGETHER HERE Figure 2.8—Fillet Welds on Opposite Sides of a Common Plane (see 2.8.3.5) 45 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M2002 TRANSVERSE WELDS MAY BE USED ALONG ‘THESE ENDS General Note: The effective area of weld 2 shall equal that of weld 1, butits size shall be effective size plus the thickness of the fle pate T. Thin Figure 2.9- ier Plates in Splice Joint (see 2.10.1) ‘TRANSVERSE. WELDS MAY BE USED ALONG ‘THESE EDGES General Note: The effective areas of welds 1,2, and 3 shall be adequale fo transmit te design force, and the langth of welds 1 and 2 shall be adequate to avoid oversiress of filer plate in ‘shear along planes xx. Figure 2.10—Thick Filler Plates Splice Joint (see 2.10.2) 46 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 2, DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS RANGE MAY BE TRUNCATED DEPENDENT UPON BASE MATERIAL Fy ‘ANO WHETHER RANGE IS TENSION TO TENSION OR COMPRESSION TO TENSION. (MAXIMUM TENSILE STRESS MAY NOT BE GREATER THAN STRESS ALLOWED BY TABLE 2.3) +00 ‘CATEGORY C—| CATEGORY A. ‘CATEGORY B. ‘CATEGORY 8 CATEGORY STRESS RANGE, Fn (ks) ‘CATEGORY E CATEGORY E 1 10,000 100,000 1,000,000 10,000,000 100,000,000 FE, N (CYCLES) (A)US. CUSTOMARY UNITS RANGE MAY BE TRUNCATED DEPENDENT UPON BASE MATERIAL F, [AND WHETHER RANGE IS TENSION TO TENSION OR COMPRESSION TO TENSION. (MAXIMUM TENSILE STRESS MAY NOT BE GREATER THAN STRESS ALLOWED BY TABLE 2.3) 1000: & g ccareaony ¢— | SATEGORY A a CATEGORY 8 8 10 cmEcOnVe ¥ ‘CATEGORY F- = 5 ‘CATEGORY D CATEGORY E caTegonY € 10. 10,000 “00,000 +,000,000 10.00,000 700,000,000 FE, N (YcLES) (e)merRic uns Figure 2.11—Allowable Stress Range for Cyclically Applied Load (Fatigue) in Nontubular Connections (Graphical Plot of Table 2.4) "7 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M2002 NARROWER PLATE wore of tie WITH OF WIDER PLATE: Ls WIDTH OF 25 NARROWER PLATE ran a bent F=2 (0.6m) 25 BuTTJONT = & ae PLAN We _ fomm —s4821. vew ‘WIDTH OF WIDER PLATE (9mm) ‘9/82 in sin ain, 2in. ° General Not: Mandatory fr stees with es a bale 2 ved strength greater than or equal to Cal ae mel ee ‘90 ks (620 MPa}. Optional for al other sees DETAIL OF CUT BUTT JOINT Figure 2.12—Transition of Width (Cyclically Loaded Nontubular) (see 2.16.1.2) 100 1690) = zs E18) CATEGORY _ g 2 i 2 39) 8 so g & CoANO Xe Z Gea ESN z = 200 Gs é S ins 3 g 100, 5 22 § vs o & CON ga gua gear ror 2 CYCLES OF LOAD N Figure 2.13—Allowable Fatigue Stress and Strain Ranges for Stress Categories (see Table 2.6), Redundant Tubular Structures for Atmospheric Service (see 2.20.6.3) 48 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 reac] SIDE BRANCH MEMBER Toe] mae MEMBER (A) CIRCULAR SECTIONS. MAXIMUM LIMIT OF ECONNECTIONS: sor (©) K-CONNECTION Note: ‘TOE ZONE SECTION 2, DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS HeEL- RANCH Hest a MEMBER connec CORNER Conner [ Ba sie F swe SIDE ae convent! conven \ CORNER BRANCH MEMBER OX SECTIONS (F) K-COMBINATION CONNECTIONS ‘TOE ZONE oT SIDE ZONE © «en GREATER THAN 10° (0)Y-CONNECTION a Y LE SSG WwW GAP g MEASURED ALONG THE SURFACE (OF THE CHORD BETWEEN PROJECTIONS (OF THE BRANCH MEMBER OUTSIDE SURFACE AT THE NEAREST APPROACH 1. Relevant gap is between braces whose loads are essentially balanced. Type (2) may also be referred to as an N-connection Figure 2,14—Parts of a Tubular Connection (see 2.21) 49 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M2002 (@) CROSS CONNECTIONS on — 1 EE Sto. | SS ee a pet : 2 ea (H DEVIATIONS FROM CONCENTRIC CONNECTIONS. PI scene _ OAPHRAGM STIFFENING [—\ i> ina omc ALS O crustine oAD () SIMPLE TUBULAR CONNECTION (J) EXAMPLES OF COMPLEX REINFORCED CONNECTIONS: ‘TRANSITION: ¥ r ‘TRANSITION A kh < (K) FLARED CONNECTIONS AND TRANSITIONS. Figure 2.14 (Continued)—Parts of a Tubular Connection (see 2.21) 30 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 2, DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS Ho , co DETAIL (N) ‘“. te + WATCHED STEPPED (CONNECTION TYPES FOR BOX SECTIONS (W GEOMETRIC PARAMETERS PARAMETER | GIROULAR SecTIONS [BOK SECTIONS e r 8 wif OR dy/D vip a = a0 7 Fle iat ee 7 wwe ‘oe MEASURED BY MEASURED By © _| ANGLE BETWEEN MEMBER GENTERLINES | EOCAL DIREDRAL ANGLE ATA GIVEN PONT ONWELDED JOWT (0) CORNER pmMENsiON on CORNER DIMENSION AS NEASURED TO THE RADIUS MEASUREMENT | Pont ortanceNey on CONTACT WITH A 59" SQUARE PLAGSD ON ThE CORNER Figure 2.14 (Continued)—Parts of a Tubular Connection (see 2.21) 31 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M2002 5 t) MIN (NOT LESS THAN 1 in. [25 mm) General Note: L = size as required Figure 2.15—Fillet Welded Lap Joint (Tubular) (see 2.23.1.3) OF EFFECTIVE THROAT Figure 2.16—Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connection Fillet Weld Footprint Radius (see 2.23.3) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 2, DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS Figure 2.17—Punching Shear Stress (see 2.24.1.1) SECTION A-A Figure 2.18—Detail of Overlapping Joint (see 2.24.1.6) 3 ‘SECTION 2. DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M2002 General Notes: 2 DSH =e = 0.25 tena" 1 Hit-and Dit < 35 (40 for overlap K- and N-connections) als and b= 35 Fig = 52 kei [60 MPa} SoSsH=20 + Fila S08 Figure 2.19—Limitations for Box T-, Y-, and K-Conneetions (see 2.24.2) (OVERLAPPING MEMBER ‘THROUGH: MEMBER Figure 2.20—Overlapping K-Connections (see 2.24.2.4) 34 SECTION 2, DESIGN OF WELDED JOINTS ‘AWS D1.1101.1M:2002 (57-7 995) (aeqny) ssouyoyy penbaug Jo syed UF sIMOL Ng Jo ssoUyDNL Jo uoNIsHEA,—T7'z ANSE 1ejop pue Bd) payyent 40 pomoye Aue 10 og Kew BRC + 'a10N [e10U05) ‘3M UaNOIH 4O GO HadVL AG NOLUSNYEL (4) AV UENOIKL ONIERINVHO AS Se (Q3R35Ud Gl INVISNOD ‘eNICTaM 34038 uB4NVHO CS “Ey z a ee ontaTam 340438 — owiaTaM 340338 ‘3aNL WSyOIHL LY 3HOS Had BENLUBNOIHLIO peeee Ca) NY LHDIVELS AG NOLUSNVEL() --3HOg WdV. Aa NOLLISNYEL (a) onaTam 92_ PNIDTSM 340436 HLOONS 1nd Sh SNIHOWIN re TWWUSHLYO 'GNID ‘NIHOVN—pyynsa4WVHO GNY ZOVSUNS OTM DNIdOTS AB NOLISNYHL (B) owen wen oe careers aes ay oniaTam uSLay > ONICTEM way BAOWH AONE gngune cam ‘3OV4HNS G13M ONIdOTS AG NOLLISNVHL (v) nase a " tay 3 eh, ‘NI 3ONSH3410 NMINIKWIN [URL €)°Ul Bh z 4 a Se i — r__# ANaWNOI seni 40 G0 HV 136340 ANaMNONTY ANTTHALNED gals 3NO WOH GaqTaM ‘S30IS OMLWOUd G3dTEM 38 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 3. Prequalification of WPSs 3.1 Scope Prequalification of WPSs (Welding Procedure Speci- fications) shall be defined as exemption from the WPS qualification testing required in Section 4. All prequal- fied WPSs shall be written. In order for a WPS to be prequalified, conformance with all ofthe applicable re quirements of Section 3 shall be required. WPSs that do not conform to the requirements of Section 3 may be qualified by tests in conformance with Section 4 (see Annex [V—Table IV-1), The use ofa prequalified joint shall not exempt the Engineer from using engineering judgment in determining the suitability of application of these joints toa welded assembly or connection, For con- venience, Annex H lists provisions to be included in a prequalified WPS, and which should be addressed inthe fabricator’s or Contractor's welding program. ‘Welders, welding operators and tack welders that use prequalified WPSs shall be qualified in conformance ‘with Section 4, Part C 3.2 Welding Processes 3.2.1 Prequalified Processes. SMAW, SAW, GMAW (except GMAW-S), and FCAW WPSs which conform to all of the provisions of Section 3 shall be deemed as prequalified and are therefore approved for use without performing WPS qualification tests for the process. For WPS prequalification, conformance with all ofthe appli- cable provisions of Section 3 shall be required (see 3.1) 3.2.2 Code Approved Processes. ESW, EGW, GTAW, and GMAW-S welding may be used, provided the WPSs are qualified in conformance with the requirements of Section 4 (see Annex A for GMAW-S), Note that the es- sential varinble limitations in Table 4.5 for GMAW shall also apply to GMAW-S. 3.23 Other Welding Processes. Other welding pro- ‘cesses not covered by 3.2.1 and 3.2.2 may be used, pro- 37 vided the WPSs are qualified by applicable tests as deseribed in Section 4 and approved by the Engineer. In ‘conjunction with the tests, the WPSs and limitation of ‘essential variables applicable to the specifie welding pro- ‘cess shall be established by the Contractor developing the WPS. The range of essential variables shall be based on documented evidence of experience with the process, ora series of tests shall be conducted to establish the limit of | ‘essential variables, Any change in essential variables out- side the range so established shall require requalification, 3.3 Base Metal/Filler Metal Combinations ‘Only base metals and filler metals listed in Table 3.1 may be used in prequalified WPSs. (For the qualification of listed base metals and filler metals, and for base met- als and filler metals not listed in Table 3.1, see 4.1.1.) ‘The base metal/filler metal strength relationships below shall be used in conjunction with Table 3.1 to de- termine whether matching or undermatching filler metals are required, Filler Metal Strength Relationship | Base Mutts) | Relatoasip Required Matting | Any stator Inthe same ero ‘ny filler melita the same group ‘Any see in one roup to any stain Any filler metal listed fora lower tenth group. [SMAW other letras shall bo the [ow hydrogen clasifcation) Under. | Any steltoany | Any filler etl sted fora matching | steel any group | lowerstngth group [SMAW electrode shall bo the [ow Iyogen clasifeaton) ‘General Noe Se Tables 2.3.25 wo determine the ler meal strength rouiement to mash orundsmatch base rt stength, ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. 3.4 Engineer’s Approval for Auxiliary Attachments ‘The Engineer may approve unlisted materials for aux- iliory attachments which fall within the chemical compo- sition range of a listed material to be welded with prequalified WPSs, The filler metal and preheat required shall be in conformance with the requirements of 3.5, based upon the similar material strength and chemical composition. 3.5 Minimum Preheat and Interpass Temperature Requirements ‘The preheat and interpass temperature shall be sufi cient to prevent cracking. Table 3.2 shall be used to de- termine the minimum preheat and interpass temperatures for steels listed in the code. 3.5.1 Base Metal/Thickness Combination, The mini- ‘mum preheat or interpass temperature applied to a joint composed of base metals with different minimum pre- heats from Table 3.2 (based on Category and thickness) shall be the highest of these minimum preheat 3.5.2 Annex XT Option. Optionally, minimum preheat and interpass temperature may be established on the basis of steel composition, Recognized methods of pre- diction or guidelines such as those provided in Annex XT, or other methods approved by the Engineer, may be used. However, should the use of these guidefines result in pre- heat temperatures lower than those of Table 3.2, WPS qualification in conformance with Section 4 shall be required, ‘The methods of Annex XI are based on laboratory cracking tests and may predict preheat temperatures higher than the minimum temperature shown in Table 3.2. The guide may be of value in identifying situations ‘where the risk of cracking is increased due to composi- tion, restraint, hydrogen level or lower welding heat input where higher preheat may be warranted. Alterna- tively, the guide may assist in defining conditions under which hydrogen cracking is unlikely and where the mini: ‘mum requirements of Table 3.2 may be safely relaxed. 3.8.3 Alternate SAW Preheat and Interpass Temper- atures. Preheat and interpass temperatures for parallel or ‘multiple electrode SAW shall be selected in conformance ‘with Table 3.2. For single-pass groove or fillet welds, for combinations of metals being welded and the heat input involved, and with the approval of the Engineer, preheat ‘and interpass temperatures may be established which are sufficient to reduce the hardness in the HAZ of the base ‘metal to Tess than 225 Vickers hardness number for steel having a minimum specified tensile strength not exceed- 38 ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ing 60 ksi [415 MPa), and 280 Vickers hardness number for steel having a minimum specified tensile strength ‘greater than 60 ksi [415 MPa, but not exceeding 70 ksi [485 MPa} Note: The Vickers hardness manber shall be determined in ‘conformance with ASTM E 92. If another method of hant- ress is to be used, the equivalent hardness munber shall be determined from ASTM ET 40, and testing shall be per- formed accanting to the applicable ASTM specification 3.8.3.1 Hardness Requirements, Hardness determi nation of the HAZ shall be made on the following: (1) Initial macroetch cross sections of a sample test specimen, (2) The surface of the member during the progress of the work, The surface shall be ground prior to hardness testing: (a) The frequency of such HAZ testing shall be at least one test area per weldment of the thicker metal in- volved in a joint of each 50 ft [15 m] of groove welds or pair of fillet welds. (b) These hardness determinations may be discon- tinued after the procedure has been established tothe sat- isfaction of the Engineer, 3.6 Limitation of WPS Variables All prequalified WPSs to be used shall be prepated by the manufacturer, fabricator, or Contractor as written prequalified WPSs, and shall be available to those autho- rized to use of examine them, The written WPS may fol- low any convenient format (see Annex E for examples), The welding parameters set forth in (1) through (4) of tion shall be specified on the written WPS for each applicable process. Changes in these parame- ters, beyond those specified on the written WPS, shall be ‘considered essential changes and shall require a new or revised prequalified written WPS: (1) Amperage (wite feed speed) (2) Voltage (3) Travel Speed (A) Shielding Gas Flow Rate 3.6.1 Combination of WPSs. A combination of quali- fied and prequalified WPSs may be used without qualifi- cation of the combination, provided the limitation of essential variables applicable to each process is observed. 3.7 General WPS Requirements All the requirements of Table 3.7 shall be met for prequalified WPSs. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 Vertical-Up Welding Requirements. The pro- gression for all passes in vertical position welding shall be upward, except that undercut may be repaired verti- cally downwards when preheat is in conformance with Table 3.2, but not lower than 70°F [20°C]. However, when tubular products are welded, the progression of vertical welding may be upwards or downwards, but only in the direction(s) for which the welder is qualified 3.7.2 Width/Depth Pass Limitation. Neither the depth nor the maximum width in the cross section of weld ‘metal deposited in each weld pass shall exceed the width atthe surface of the weld pass (see Figure 3.1) 3.7.3 Weathering Steel Requirements. For exposed, bare, unpainted applications of ASTM A S88 steel re- quiring weld metal with atmospheric corrosion resistance and coloring characteristics similar to that of the base ‘metal, the electrode or electrode-flux combination shall conform to Table 3.3, ‘The exceptions to this requirement are as follows: 3.73.1 Single-Pass Groove Welds. Groove welds made with a single pass or a single pass each side may be made using any of the filler metals for Group TT base metals in Table 3.1 3.73.2 Single-Pass Fillet Welds. Single-pass fillet ‘welds up to the following sizes may be made using any of the filler metals for Group II base metals listed in Table 3.1 SMAW V4 in, (6 mm] SAW 5/16 in. [8 mm) GMAWIFCAW 5/16 in, [8 mm] 3.8 Common Requirements for Parallel Electrode and Multiple Electrode SAW 3.8.1 GMAW Root Pass. Welds may also be made in the root of groove or fillet welds using GMAW, followed by parallel or multiple electrode submerged ares, pro- vvided that the GMAW conforms to the requirements of this section, and providing the spacing between the GMAW and the following SAW are does not exceed 15 in. [380 mm} 3.9 Fillet Weld Req ‘See Table 5.8 for minimum fillet weld sizes. ements 3.9.1 Details (Nontubular). See Figures 2.1 and 2.5 for the limitations for prequalified filet welds. 59 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs 3.9.2 Details (Tubular). For prequalified status, fillet \elded tubular connections shall conform to the follow- ing provisions: (1) Prequalified WPSs. Fillet welded tubular connec tions made by SMAW, GMAW, or FCAW processes that ‘may be used without performing WPS qualification tests are detailed in Figure 3.2 (see 2.23.1.2 for limitations). ‘These details may also be used for GMAW-S qualified in ‘conformance with 4.12.43 (2) Prequalified fillet weld details in lap joints are shown in Figure 2.15. 3.9.3 Skewed T-Joints, Skewed T-joints shall be in con- formance with Figure 3.11 3.93.1 Dihedral Angle Limitations. The obtuse side of skewed T-joints with dihedral angles greater than 100° shall be prepared as shown in Figure 3.11, Detail C, to allow placement of a weld of the required size, The amount of machining or grinding, etc., of Figure 3.11, Detail C, should not be more than that required to achieve the required weld size (W) 3.9.3.2 Minimum Weld Size for Skewed T-Joints, For skewed T-joints, the minimum weld size for Details A, B, and C in Figure 3.11 shall be in conformance with Table 5.8, 3.10 Plug and Slot Weld Requirements The details of plug and slot welds made by the SMAW, GMAW (except GMAW-S), or FCAW processes ‘are described in 3.10.1 through 3.10.3, 2.5.2 through 2.54, and 2.5.6, and they may be used without perform- ing the WPS qualification described in Section 4, pro- ‘vided the technique provisions of 5.25 are met. 3101 Diameter Limitations, The minimum diameter Of the hole fora plug weld shall be no less than the thick- ness of the part containing it plus 5/16 in. [8 mm], prefer- ably rounded to the next greater odd 1/16 in. (2 mm], The maximum diameter shall equal the minimum diameter plus 1/8 in, [3 mm] or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the member, whichever is greater. 3.10.2 Slot Length. The length of the slot for a slot weld shall not exceed ten times the thickness of the part con- taining it. The width of the slot shall be no less than the thickness of the part containing it plus 5/16 in. (8 mm], preferably rounded to the next greater odd 1/16 in, [2 mm]. The maximum width shall equal the minimum, ‘width plus 1/8 in. [3 mm] or 2-1/4 times the thickness of the member, whichever is greater 3.10.3 Depth of Filling. The depth of filling of plug or slot welds in metal 5/8 in. [16 mm} thick or less shall be equal to the thickness of the material, In metal over ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. 5/8 in. [16 mm} thick, it shall be at least one-half the thickness of the material, but no less than 5/8 in. [16 mm} 11 Common Requirements of PJP and CJP Groove Welds 3.11.1 FCAW/GMAW in SMAW Joints, Groove prep- arations detailed for prequalified SMAW joints may be used for prequalified GMAW or FCAW. 3.11.2 Corner Joint Preparation, For corer joints, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic groove configuration is not changed and adequate edge distance is maintained to support the welding operations without excessive melt 3.11.3 Root Openings. Joint root openings may vary as noted in 3.12.3 and 3.13.1. However, for automatic or machine welding using FCAW, GMAW, and SAW pro- cesses, the maximum root opening variation (minimum to maximum opening as fit-up) may not exceed 1/8 in [3 mm], Variations greater than 1/8 in, [3 mm] shall be locally corrected prior to automatic or machine welding, 3.12 PJP Requirements PIP groove welds shall be made using the joint details described in Figure 3.3. The joint dimensional limita- tions described in 3.12.3 shall apply. 3.12.1 Definition, Except as provided in 3.13.4 and Fig- ure 3.4 (BcLI-S), groove welds without steel backing, ‘welded from one side, and groove welds welded from both sides, but without backgouging, are considered PJP groove welds. 3.12.2 Weld Size. The weld size (E) of a prequalified IP groove shall be as shown in Figure 3.3 for the partic- ular welding process, joint designation, groove angle, and ‘welding position proposed for use in welding fabrication, 3.12.2.1 Prequalified Weld Sizes (1) The minimum weld size of PIP single- or double- V, bevel-, J-, and U-groove welds, types 2 through 9, shall be as shown in Table 3.4, The base metal thickne: shall be sufficient to incorporate the requirements of the joint detils selected, conforming to the variances out lined in 3.12.3 and the requirements of Table 3.4, (2) The maximum base metal thickness shall not be. limited, (3) The PIP square butt weld B-PI and flare-bevel groove weld BTC-P10 minimum weld sizes shall be cal- culated from Figure 3.3. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 (4) Shop or working drawings shall specify the design grooves depths “S” applicable forthe weld size “(E)"re- ‘uired per 3.12.2, (Note that this requirement shall not apply o the B-PI and BTC-P1O details.) 3.12.3 Joint Dimensions (1) Dimensions of groove welds specified in 3.12 may ‘vary on design of detail drawings within the limits of tol- cerances shown in the “As Detailed” column in Figure 3.3. (2) Fit-up tolerances of Figure 3.3 may be applied to the dimensions shown on the detail drawing. However, the use of fit-up tolerances does not exempt the user from_meeting the minimum weld size requirements of 3.12.21 (3) J and U-grooves may be prepared before ot after assembly. 324 Details (Tubular). Details for PIP tubular groove ‘welds that are accorded prequalified status shall conform to the following provisions: (1) PIP tubular groove welds, other than T-, Y-, and K-connections, may be used without performing the WPS qualification tests, when these may be applied and shall meet all of the joint dimension limitations as de- scribed in Figure 3.3, (2) PIP T-, Y-, and K-tubular connections, welded. only by the SMAW, GMAW or FCAW process, may be used without performing the WPS qualification when they may be applied and shall meet all of the joint dimension limitations as described in Figure 3.5. These details may also be used for GMAW-S qualified in con- formance with 4.12.43. 3.12.4,1 Matched Box Connections. Details for PJP ‘groove welds in these connections, the comer dimen- sions and the radii of the main tube are shown in Figure 3.5 Fillet welds may be used in toe and heel zones (see igure 3.2), If the comer dimension or the radius of the main tube, or both, are less than as shown if Figure 3.5, a sample joint of the side detail shall be made and sec- tioned to verify the weld size, The test weld shall be ‘made in the horizontal position. This requirement may be \waived if the branch tube is beveled as shown for CIP groove weld in Figure 3.6, 3.13 CJP Groove Weld Requirements CIP groove welds which may be used without per- forming the WPS qualification test described in Section 4 shall be as detailed in Figure 3.4 and are subject to the limitations described in 3.13.1 3.13.1 Joint Dimensions. Dimensions of groove welds specified in 3.13 may vary on design or detail drawin within the limits or tolerances shown in the “As Detailed” ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 column in Figute 3.4. Fit up tolerance of Figure 3.4 may bbe applied to the dimension shown on the detail drawing. 3.13.2 J-and U-Groove Preparation, J- and U-grooves and the other side of partially welded double-V and double-bevel grooves may be prepared before or after as- sembly. After backgouging, the other side of partially ‘welded double-V or double-bevel joints should resemble ‘a prequalified U- or Joint configuration at the joint root. 3.133 Tubular Butt Joints. For tubular groove welds to be given prequalified status, the following conditions shall apply: (1) Prequalified WPSs. Where welding from both sides or welding from one side with backing is possible, any WPS and groove detail that is appropriately prequal- ified in conformance with Section 3 may be used, except that SAW is only prequalified for diameters greater than ‘or equal to 24 in, [600 mm]. Welded joint details shall be in conformance with Section 3, 2) Nonprequalified Joint Detail. There are no prequalified joint details for CIP groove welds in butt joints made from one side without backing (see 4.12.2). 343.4 Tubular T-, ¥-, and K-Connections. Details for CIP groove welds welded from one side without backing intubular TY, and K-connections used in circular tubes are described in this section. The applicable citcumferen- tial range of Details A, B, C, and D are described in Fig- ‘ures 3.6 and 3.7, and the ranges of local dihedral angles, {¥],corresponding to these are described in Table 3.5. Joint dimensions including groove angles are de- scribed in Table 3.6 and Figure 3:8. When selecting a profile (compatible with fatigue eateyory used in design) 484 function of thickness, the guidelines of 2206.7 shall be observed. Alternative weld profiles that may be re- quired for thicker sections are described in Figure 3.9. In the absence of special fatigue requirements, these pro- files shall be applicable to branch thicknesses exceeding 5/8 in. (16 mm]. Improved weld profiles meeting the requirements of 2.36.6.6 and 2.36.6.7 are described in Figure 3.10 In the absence of special fatigue requirements, these profiles shall be applicable to branch thicknesses exceeding 1-1/2 in. [38 mm] (not required for static compression loading). 6 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs Prequalified details for CIP groove welds in tubular r, Y> and K-connections, utilizing box sections, are further described in Figure 3.6. The foregoing details are subject to the limitation of 3.13.3. Note: See the Commentary for engineering guidance in the selection of a suitable profile. ‘The joint dimensions and groove angles shall not vary from the ranges detailed in Table 3.6 and shown in Fig- ‘ure 3.6 and Figures 3.8 through 3.10. The root face of joints shall be zero unless dimensioned otherwise. It may be detailed to exceed zero or the specified dimension by not more than 1/16 in, (2 mm], Itmay not be detailed less than the specified dimensions. 334.1 Joint Details, Details for CIP groove welds in tubular T-, Y, and K-conneetions are described in 3.13.4. These details are prequalified for SMAW and FCAW. These details may also be used for GMAW-S qualified in conformance with 4.12.43, 3.14 Postweld Heat Treatment Postweld heat treatment (PWHT) shall be prequalified ‘provided that it shall be approved by the Engineer and the following conditions shall be met 1) The specified minimum yield strength of the base ‘metal shall not exceed 50 ksi [345 MPa] (2) The base metal shall_not be manufactured by quenching and tempering (Q&T), quenching and self- tem 16ST), thermo-mechanical_controlled_pro- cessing (TMCP) or where _cold_working is used to achieve higher mechanical properties (ez certain ‘grades of ASTM A 500 tubing} (3) There shall be no requirements for notch tough- ness testing ofthe base metal, HAZ, or weld metal (A) There shall be data available demonstrating that the weld metal shall have adequate strength and ductility in the PWHT condition (e.g., as can be found in the rele- vant AWS A5.X filler metal specification and classifies tion or from the filler metal manufacturer) (5) PWHT shall be conducted in conformance with 538. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. WWX-XLXL9 "X-XLXLA WX 1X95 ‘XXLX9 6rsv 06r-00F me 00 sa's'a'a'y sa sav ‘tr oe ar axe) sie oe amp BMY sso se 9f MRT EFESToC=IN GOL YRS ror oo sso peed, sos oS seme Ls VRISY WecINLa AKC ss oe sem “WXLX99 “X“LX9T orsv MOF humbsed saz ov Or PRI, oo seamen sss mts ome som wxxooaaesina ee swore omer Ste OF eee us vHUsY 7 (pono a ss So, sso owss soe oe namep ee ne avo | Pes sO On se 127e9 Fes V MUS psssir oes ox we oor isos sss se OF some) sis vis xenaoa Kt amis oz 3F 10s YHUSY SOAGKIARLE HY =s oe oo amo a ¥ore aos vise BOO a Xi oes XSL ore se SEA PRI — ISS VINLSW SSQOTARORKATARDL LTV avs m8 ped oR aSCESORVSIMD [ELYRISy oo os a2 SOL YRS smsty omeop ore SE am Ss ¥mISY xoca soa avws| —fose-tor owas ore EY NAS SRST a8 sou] [eS aN aire : aa ‘SUSAN RAP ‘uawarjnboy woRPaUTedS PIS D (e'¢ 208) yBueNs BuyreW 40 suoeUIqUIOD [eIW 40/1 I—EIOW eSeG PoyteNborg re eden ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ¢pananu0s) joco-oor OIL OS «IS «DEH DEH UEHY SPR lncsaor onic sit sp Sena'ceHarceHY spem sey fos oe Se txapen sid esesre oss {fos spe Hesre scor 052005 cobs acy ies iesre more cia ert oe netay ospate 26 nus WEXIXEX KIX ESV se tev nusy bee Sosy Wusy ose oy Rasy st ing i are RIS : sre ‘ene omen Spore) ose eeov nisy WAX“LXLA NALA ovsv VO ree SI9VWISY se : oe 09 v nasy ooros ANSON Be overs Sovy sir 9 pura sop (oso. 9 po 8 $9- 98 se Yara) sos V nusy sre (apun pue [ww ool] Ui) — 886 V WLSW neva ie ss 9puD SKOUIXSO STS vino ose spe owe trem TS VRISY ose sEapep roeeexoe nxt se oso ous vs “XXOXXXI-XXLA (sv sree Iss) LES VWNISW samp XXXOWNNLENRNERKLL LTS avs armed SEV RISY s92pu) ois v Musy irvnusy XsIOLa KIO XsION SHY sie leLvnusy scoca'wiova 910ca soca iy avns| [ieee Gee Ge SEVIISY TONED pone CSL) ae 7 arossata er 4 si eee reer ° 5 Suawanbay ARAN Syuouanboy WORPSUIAATS POS (penupues) be e19eL ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘woutpuo> paps mas 0 pounboxd ou sue 6S 2087S “E'S SY SAN MPU HANH Ae 0A “T8I A “TLT ‘Ld “TOMA (eee 209) 49 "(emsodua, | 30 Spon sodu Sursonuy suopenyaée ey) jw 909 Jo SeuyNE YOU ap AeyeU cans ag Seu (spansy> 591009 9810 Eo Ww SUT SAG PIO AE HSNO FHT A TAIT "aonroqsses apeno9} (Suu AEWONT ‘SA SV SHAY AB WX-X1X64 “X-XIX6I <60SV MVOd woxoom ccs AES avn ov-oco ours si oe ise husy SOERNROTANGL : ; 7 u RONOT ANS ay avs] [P09 O16 se oe noc oP GOL V MUS sv Avns oss aa oF pocxxsa woes uwise sie op velo hus “XXLX8A Orv MVOd MU Ssy UI OL OSP-SIF $9-09 OlL VWLSV tim Sor SmI TL OsF-S1F. s9-09 ou vnusy _XXXO08d _ Jo69-s1$ OOI-SL SiP-o8e o9-<¢s eos oe ee a) JO69-OSS OOI-08 SIF-SIE 09-9F Ls VINLSV wwxseocHxxes sm oss um Os OB 59 soem CLL wvs| musts wwe stro waren us VS sm 15 om se 19 FF 06-09 om AcIaY X-81089 “X-91084 “X-$1084 SV AVN SRLS MSL IZI-PIP 06-09 09 2p) Id TaD ag wey am] [AN aN TaRRVONSTNS F snows sary usghag 7 Sen peony ° ‘SuauaNbay TAH IAL “auowannboy wonvaypeds jag ° (panupuod) 1'¢ a1geL ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 {pnui09) a ate a smo emo uo TROORD Gee VNISY eon oe avenn savmuy) oem fee crea eee oe oe eee ee omy LOS “05 “Ch SPR ATV LOS “0S “Cr SpRIDY MT mse cL eer] me sey | tayo oon Goce a ome) ety wv nuy spn Ng es ssn ele VRS poeta S08 v RSY 8 NOLEN AWN quis os] SSE V APL OLE V INLSW OL os ‘PULSE “ANOS “OS: TED IE SAPRID GOL V NLSV SeA apr 18¢ VWLSV om Gen tom a‘vspmp ff VINISV @7PED 6E1 VWISY Jom Svan s¥em aia vemoy covnuny antec 0 we LUE OT OVE PURE MIT O*a ‘WV sepEIN $6 V NLSV a‘sa‘a‘so. Siynisy “Wisges iciyausy smo Etveusy "gap Sul vray Boseeey Gevwny —_ Gauy “evn sapeiB iW OLe V WIS [OUTOg) ure VWISY | oe $e) cosy rusy ep momeranrseses cxvnusy “gaya gt RLS sgapeiy fl WINISV a‘sa‘a‘s> v so Ost ‘your ge uy sepeid itv OLS VW NLS “a'vsepeiy el VW WLSV Fabre calcirs : acme Sry eay rs0p gesviusy Saye “UY uay oe | mone _poncora Siveasy (emmys sev ruse pe . Saupe STA aS z : ‘unuesodwoy ssedaoau : Saas ee A (g'¢ 008) eimesoduiay ssediequy] pue yeeyard wiNUUIUIN PoylIenbeld zeemen 65 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. sessamyony 11215 293 [9.062] 19st paes4snout {wus gem 2-109 dn sassouypm 2} [9.002] 1.0 P99xD tou ys sSMISduD sed) puEEyaA! WMUINLEL 34)" PD ZEB V ASV PE ANOL 2PED GOL W KLLSW JOE 16 ¥ NSW 00 std #540 suowena in 34 aS upon Bun pousurvu gos naan Sonu an pF [,E] 4A 90 NAAN oy psy Sou om 90] Ae MOON SHEN e569 AT SON syouannoy sno 86 PE NEE 9'§ HET TI'S 39S = “€'¢ 298 spon ada 20 ne pm ay’ 0} sous ys! yo woe PON 0 s240N 195 ‘ERY SMV 01 Buspioooe parsr way “(GU oot $30 wa09 uafoxpKy aaISNUTP 59°09 05 s9HID {16 VINLSV 0 ee wu g}-ut 1 zsoss0uy01H TV unuuyxew vipps [eSU pips Sunysodop a {Jo 24qedeo suosseuiqus xniy-2901129)9 30 (s2ssep9 ity) sepans9[9 nb AV PAE MVIND ‘AWS "MVINS yeptig OL WNISY 09 pe, AclV ost oe 9080, wit290, 09 pep, clay Wis8V NISY MOL 2981 (604 VWISV ({ww os] 22) €sse19'¥ 2pEDO1L V WAS¥ on sex rou s9 aayio VND M(umsos] 175) csmID‘VaRED OIL VIISY ran ¢ 4880) “AWS “S9pOND9|9 UBKIPAY-HO| IA MYINS, 59°09 EID 16 V WIS¥ esx apm as iav so os pm se aD ceo V ALSV "a 923090, 9°09 sepeiy us V WIS ou os poco De a aw Sse SUM, TORUS Pas * 3 ‘Sends ssa Bapiam owed ® pur wayaig wnenuyy | aug asoyoU LL Jo ssouyDML > (panupuos) z’¢ 1921 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs Table 3.3 (see 3.7.3) Filler Metal Requirements for Exposed Bare Applications of Weathering Steels Table 3.4 Minimum Prequalified PJP Weld Size (E) (see 3.12.2.1) Aws Filler Metal Process Specification Approved Electrodes! ~All electrodes that deposit weld metal SMAW ASS meeting a B2L, C1, CIL, C2, C2L, C3oc WX analysis per ASS {Al electrode-flax combinations that, SAW! A523 deposit weld metal with a Nil, Ni2, Ni, Nid or WX analysis per AS.23, Allelecrodes that deposit weld metal FCAW S29. with a B2L, K2, Nil, Ni2, NI, Ni, oc WX analysis per AS.29. {All electrodes that moet filler metal GMAW? A528 composition requirements of B2L, G', Nil, Ni2, N3, analysis per A5.28 General Note + Filler metals shall mect requirements of Table 3.1 in ation tothe cotmpsitionl requirements listed above. The we of he sae type (oF filler metal having next higher tensile srongth as listed in AWS, filler metal specification may be used + Composite etal cored) lectroes are designated as follows: ‘SAWe Insert ltr "C>betwsea te letters" and"X," eg ETAX: BCXXXNIL GMAW: Replace the eter "S" with the ltr (er°R.” eg, ESOCNIL + ‘Thistabl shal apply to ASTM A S88 and A 709 Grade $0 Note 1 Deposited weld meta stall have a hema composition the same as that fr anyone ofthe weld metas in this able and omit the et 6 Minimum Weld Base Metal Thickness (1)! in, fmm) in 18 [3] 10 3716 [5] inl ie 2 ‘Over 3/16 [5} 10 1/4 [6 inl us 3 ‘Over Ii [6] 0 1/2 [12] nel ye Over 12 [12] t 3/4 [20] ine. v4 6 (Over 3/4 [20] 1 1-17 [38] inl a0 0 (Over 1-1/2 [38] t0 2-1/4 [37] ine. 38 10 (Over 2-1/4 [57] 10 6 [150] incl ie Over 6 [150] S816 Notes: 1. For nolo hydrogen processes without probes calculated incom formance with 33.2, equals the thickness of the thicker part ined; ingle pass weids shal be used. For low-hydrogen proveeses Ind on-low hydrogen processes established to prevent cracking it Conformance with 3.5.2, T equals thickness of the thinner pat Single pass rguiement does no apply Eept thatthe Weld size nocd mot excced the thickness of the thins part joing Table 3.5 Joint Detail Applications for Prequalified CUP T., Y-, and K-Tubular Connections (see 3.13.4 and Figure 3.7) Detail | Applicable Range of Local Dihedral Angle, ¥ A | 180° 135° B | 150° so © | 75% 30° | Noe prequalified for D_| 40% 15° J groove angles under 30° ‘General Notes +The applicable joint dtl (A,B,C, oD) fora particular prt ofthe connection shal be detrined by the local ibe angle, wich hangcs continously progressing around the Branch member. + The angle and dimensional ranges given in Detail A, B,C. or D ince mest allowable tleranes + See Annex B for dftition of lea ikea angle, ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 fied Joint Table 3.6 ensions and Groove Angles for CJP Groove Weld: ‘Tubular T-, Y-, and K-Connections Made by SMAW, GMAW-S, and FCAW (see 3.13.4) Desai A Del B Deuit © Dewi D Y= 180° 138" Y= 150° 50° s—30? | w= dor—1s? End preparation (0) max 0 ete 1) win 10° or 45° for ¥> 105° ia Feaw-s | Gmaw-s | rcaw.s | GMAW-s (Newe3) swawt | Fcaw.cs | saws | FCAW-G Wimax. FCAW-S SHAW [ YBa, od v4in,(6mmj] 1) L316. [5 mm] forg> 45° Fitup or oot sia pening (R) tein Vin [Sm] oa ism] fmm _| ferosase GMAW-S [ U8in. (3 mm) inf wiein, | Gin FCAW.G J 1/4in. [6mm] (2mm | mm | inein | 116in ©) )38ia. (10mm) Noniafor | Nominfor | (2mm) | (2mm) in (12mm oe | ge i" Tint neuded 7 60° for 40°; if move ee be ws05° tse Detail B 7 FAY ifless 7 amin 4s ce nw 2 eisin¥ Completed ce a 2% AS burned not a exceed 1.75% aon Sain 2 tysin ® for Weld may be . L but aed not <0 built up exceed 1.75%, thee this Genera Notes + Tor GMAW-S soe 4.12413. These dts ae not intend for GMAW (spray tant) {See igure 3.8 for minimum standard pois (ited thickness), See Figure 39 foraltematetoe-filet profile + See Figure 3.10 for improved profil (se 2.20.66 and 2206.7), Notes: 1. Othrise as needed to obtain rue 6 2. No prewulified for groove angles (@) under 30°. 5 Initial pases of back-up weld discounted until width of groove (Ws stficien fe assure sound welding the necessary wid of weld groove (W) provided by back-up weld ‘These root dts apply to SMAW and FCAW-S. ‘Thase oot duis apply to GMAW: and FCAW-G. 68 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs Table 3.7 Prequalified WPS Requirements® (see 3.7) ow omawy Variable_| Position _| Weld Type sMAW Single_[ _Parti_| Multiple | _FCAW? Fillet 36 in. [BO mn] Fla Groovel 4 in, [6.4 mm) 14 in, (64 mm) 18in, [82 mm} axiom Root pase 316i, [4.8 mm] Electrode Fillet 4 in. (6:4 mm) Tin. [6am] Diameter | Her20nlT Groove 3/16in [48mm) | Reguies WPS Qualifaion Tex —_|'*™ B2mml Verical [All 3/16. [4.8 mm [353 in. [BA mm] ‘Overhead [ Al 3/6 in. [48 am S164. [2.0 mm] All Fille 1000 | 1200 Groove weld root pass 7008 with opening _| Within the Within the range of rimitea | FRE OF Maximum Coa ee) | oy a aa Cument | At Without opening | °Petation by ‘operation by the pening she filler metal filler metal Groove weld fil | spanufacsner 12008 smanfacirer passes cones Unlimited cap pass Fla 38in, [10 mm] 38in, [10m] Maximum THerizoaal | $116, [8 mm) ae 316 in. [Sm] Thorens [Neral 12 in [12 mm) Tin. {12 mm) ‘Overhead 516 in. 8m) 5716 in. [Sm] ‘Maximum ' Titres | a siin (sm | in United — | tin, mn) Thickness 6mm) Fh Sin. [10m timid Tain 2am) ‘Maximum 7 Ziéis. | si6in. | Dia Single Pass | Horizontal si6in.[smm | 516% ee 12. asin. [10 mm] Fillet Weld ue [smn] _|_[Simmj_|_ [12 mm) Soe erent (2. [12 wm) 1 mm) ‘Overhead S16. [S mm] 16 in. [Sm] Tatra Sada spines 8m | span stings 7 allie | 31m pli layers | jctroes oF ven) Split ay fximum | GMAW Split layer nie P| caw) Split layers i FaH Split layers | with andem | 1fw> Lin Ws | orsawy | Any aver or ifw>5°8 | electrodes | 25mm}, | Note 5 in {16 mm)] if w> 5:8 in. | spit ayers 16mm) Now Tacept root ps. 5/32. [40 mm] for EXX 4 and low-hyrogen electrodes 53. See 373 forroquitement for welding unpaintd and exposed ASTM A 588, 4. Soe 3.72 for widh-to- depth imitations. 5. Inthe FH, o¢ OH positions for woutubulrs, sit or 6 fe tbls, 6, Shaded area indates nonapplics 17. GMAW-S shall mt be nt proqul es when he ayer wid w> S18. [16 mn. In the vertical poston Fr nowtubulars rte 8G ayers hen the with w> lin [25 ma). 69 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 wit oF ne—| - Li J wm woot L— Figure 3.1—Weld Bead in which Depth and Width Exceed the Width of the Weld Face (see 3.7.2) 70 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs MIN LFOR Eso7| €-1 | e=107" HEEL < 60" ast | 1st [LARGER OF 1.51 OR 1At4Z SIDE = 100" t Tat 151 4 SIDE 100-110 | 1it_| 161 1751 ZONE SIDE 110-120" | 12] 1.8 200 TOE> 120° + | _4at | FULL BEVEL ever | pever | 60-90" GROOVE SIDE ZONE FOR ¥ > 120° EDGE SHALL BE CUT BACK TO FACILITATE ‘THROAT THICKNESS SIDE (CIRCULAR) TOE SIDE (ox) General Notes: + L= minimum size (see 2241.8 which may require increased weld size for combinations other than 96 ks! [250 MPa] base metal and 70 ksi 485 MPa] electrodes). + Root opening Oto 3/16 in. (5 me] (see 5.22) + = 18% min. Not prequalified for under 30°. For 6 < 60°, los dimension (Table 2.8) and special welder qualfeations (Table 48) apply. + See 2.28.12 for imitations on Figure 3.2—Fillet Welded Prequalified Tubular Joints Made by SMAW, GMAW, and FCAW (see 3.9.2) a ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 Legend for ures 3.3 and 3.4 Welding processes 'SMAW — shielded meta are welding GMAW — gas metal are welding FCAW — flux cored metal are welding SAW — submerged are welding ‘Symbols for joint types B— but joint C— comer joint T—T-joint BC — butt or comer joint TC —T- or eomer joint BIC — butt, T, or comer joint Welding postions ‘Symbols for base metal thickness and penetration F— fat P— PIP H— borizontal L— limited thickness-CIP V— vertical U— unlimited thickness-CaP OF — overhead ‘Symbol for weld types 1 = square-sroove Dimensions 2 — single-V-groove 3 — double-V-groove 4 — single-bevel-groove 5 — double bevel-groove 6 — single-U-groove 7 double-V-zroove 8— single-Fgroove E.E).E; 9 — double-I-groove 10 — faresbevel-groove R= Root Opening 6, B= Groove Angles = Root Face = For Usgroove Radius 8,81, 8,5 PIP Groove Weld Depth of Groove PIP Groove Weld Sizes corresponding to S, 8, Sp. respectively ‘Symbols for welding processes if not SMAW. Joint Designation S— SAW ‘The lowercase letes, ea, b, cet. ate used to differentiate —oMaw ‘between joints that would otherwise have the same joint F—FCAW designation. Notes for Figures 3.3 and 3.4 Notes: 1, Not prequalified for GMAW-S nor GTAW (refer to Annex A). 2. Join shal be weldes trom one side ony 3. Cyclic load appicaton mits these jos to te horizontal welding position (see 227-5) 44. Backgouge root to sound metal before welding Second sige 5. SMAW detailed joints may be used for prequalified GMAW (except GMAW-S) and FCAW. 6. Minimum wel size (E) as shown in Table 34. Sas specified on drawings. 7. Illt welds are used in statically loaded structures to relnforce groove welds in comer and Tons, these shall be equal oT 10. ", 2 butneed rot exceed 38 in. (10 min), Groove welas n corner and Tints of cycscally loaded structures shall be reinforced with flied ‘welds equal to T,/4, bt need not exceed 28 in. [10 mm) Double-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, but the dept o the shallower groove shal be no less than one-fourth of ‘he thickness of the thinner par joined. DDouble-groove welds may have grooves of unequal depth, provided these conform tothe limitations of Note E, Also the weld size {apis niga to each groove ‘fentation ofthe two members in thejcints may vary from 135" to 180" for butt joints, or 45° to 135° for comer joins, oF 45° to Ber ior Tyan For corner aits, the outside groove preparation may be in either or both members, provided the basic gove configuration Is rot changed and adequate edge Gistance is maintained fo suppor the welding operations without excessive edge melting. Weld size (€) shall be based on joins welded fish. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Square groove weld) Sanat) is = 7 penececsnent wet ve aja No Toushance Base Metal Thickness Cela eames Taras samme ed ae FaDemies | Asrtup | ‘welt |wes sae Feces | oocgrawn | ts | ts | Rosopong | (tn Siz) | nity | Penton |") | news a TT CA san 7. ; erie | wm [—[aeBnn | owe fan | m | & [ac Reeaegere TT Brac am, e,+e:musrwor exces ST! len Base Metal Thickness Goce Erornee eae Tana soma | toa vesting | sont Fataniee | aatiap | ed | wean eens | oedirawn | ts | to | Rowoponna| Gee ateny | cowi’y | Posten |r| naws th 3, aww [ore | vm [| ae | oreo | ae f a [om | s Figure 3.3—Prequalified PJP Groove Welded Joint Details (see 3.12) (Dimensions in Inches) ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIF ICATION OF WPSs ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Single-V-groave weld Buon) Comrie) ——— Groove Preparation Udy [oper Toerarces a wading | sot Towra” | Asoatiee | Asritup | acing [Wet Size Proces | vesnaton | tr _| Te | croove are | (0 212) | (e032 | Pontos |" IE) | Note Toaams | se a sua | scee | umn | u “oe | ne | ow | os [Fee soe: | aioe Dein] a6 caw | sceace | umn | u bicom |bercinome |p my ee) cae odie | aioe 20. | stn saw | ecers | meme | u weo | “Hn? |e | 5 [zen sot | ios. Doubie-V-groave weld (3) Burt joint (B) Sa(Ea) Base Metal Thickness Gece Eroraeee ee Serene Root Opening ae Allowed Total weting | sont RoxFacs” | AsDatiee | Asritup | (ang | Wel Sze Prose | vesnaton | Tr _| Te | creove are | ow'st2) | (coe | postions [ED | Notes S60] 08,76 cos ete en |= puto eaereme |) ear al ferean oe soto |store Téa Bae aww | eescr | tamn | — Meo] eine | an | sess | HSE st | ios ei eres sw | eras | sam | — eo | “ane, | oF | see [aoe st | io! Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Inches) 4 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Single-bovelgroove weld (4) Sanne) selats ‘Comer joint (C) Base Metal Thickness cots Erepaaeon eg eee] eee Se ore9 | coaaall aura oaeel ease M8 | alin | ts | va | ceo | OES [ cei | AS [S| ee ped min ‘unlimitec 1 ant Jercrsct] ven | u ins | I. vor | ee elena eee la ee eect ie shale Doutie-bavelgroove wold) Butt joint (B) Tae) merle (©) Base Metal Thickness Soo Eepeeen (= unlinted) | got Opening Tleaneee Atowed | Total Wotdng | Joint Roctece’ | AsDaaied | ASFIUp | Woldng | Wel Sze Process | pestnaton | Ts | Ta | croove angle | (ese 2120) | (eeeart2%) | Postons | Er*E0 | Notes in, -0 | 18,176 3,43, [887 ow | erces | stemn | u sniniod | “sige” | oan | Sit: | Se: Some | sovss ta | Ot we,-0 | v8.6 [EH [SS | ae7, ouaw | ercesce | szmn | u snimiod | “Siae Sas] 810 07,0" Mode eae leat 20 saw | topss | aumn | u seo | ses [828 +10", -0" 7 Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Inches) 15 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Single U-groove weld @) Bunort Comet) ——— Grove Preparation (US vnimtos) [Roo penne Toerarces Roa Face towed weding | sot eovelRades | asbaaiee | asriup | dng |e ze Froses | oesgnaon | Ts | Te | Groow ange | (re at29) | (ota | Footone |" "fE) "| Nowe Tin6 <0) 918,76 sua | see | umn |v we | ame] ow | os [aes sora_|_ iets 6-0 | 8a cua ta | eine 126 cuw | scescr | umn | u ww | ame] ow | os [8B sot Fa eee 23 ss Soe. Dake gore wa TY Batinet @) oe Preparaon Base Metal Thickness S Pe {US vimod) | Root png Taare Roa Face Atowes | tt weaing | Joint bvcrasts | asvemies | asriup | cary [wee Sze Prose | oesgnaon | Ts _| Te | Groomange | (te 129) | oo3'a | Peotone |(E1°E:) | Nets 6,9] 8-8 Mea” | "ine ws: | 869. sua | eer | tama | — wy | ae | ow | ses, [88 Sore | dot Sie. -0 Po, a6 cua toe” | "eine vs, | 18s gw | eerce | smn | — we, | ame | ow | ses, | He Soe. | sions 20. | se 0 vino | “tne . saw | cers | aume | — wh | ate |e | ves: feet sora | ie! Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Inches) 16 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Single-Tgroove weld (@) Butt joint (B) Treat (1) Comer joint (C) Base Metal Thickness ——_ (U= unlimited) | Root Opening Tolerances Root Face ‘Allowed welding | Joint BavelRacus | AsDetaies | Asritup | Welding | weld size Process | Designation % Te | Groove Anale | (see 3.123) | (6003123) | Positions | (E) | Notes 7in6,-0 | +18, 176 . +U,"0 in6 5.8,7, smaw | Tops wsmin | ean ee al a | Sea soja | +1075 +116, 0 | +18, 1718 a +0 iN 5,8,7, smaw | acre vam | u a ae a s |S8r Ho | +0 FTG, -0 448, 1716 cuaw . +u, 0 sine 1.6,7, Faw | TOPSGFY | amin | U 14,0, a6 a S| to soa | +1075 6,0 | 08, 16 cMaw = *U,-0 #in6 1.6.7, ircaw, | oc ee-chee)| seme | +14,-0 a6 a S| toa soo | +t0%-5" 20 -It6, -0 ; +0,-0 6,7,10, saw | topes: | 76min | u cues F s A +10") 20" 20 +1it6, 6 5 +00 ante 6.7,10, saw | cress | ztemn | u ola, ae F s ui soo | 10", “Applies to inside comer joints. “Apples 0 cuside comer jon Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Inches) n ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 Doubiesr-groove wold (@) Sane sae ‘Comer joint (C) Ne ® ' ; = batts Saree Base Metal Thickness . paral sam opens | are ae saoes | ts vosny | srettets | peomas | serray_| S$ [ult Mets |oadtten | vs | [Baan | anno | tetas, | A EES] noe peed sets ou lcm Ee valine Peaw [ercre-ces| tzmin | U #118, -0 ar] StS | tot oo le ea wis | BR] es [ous fee ai a aoe oaeee eee oe +14, 0. £116 : SiS | 0,1 “Applies to inside comer joins. “Applies to utside comer joints Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Inches) 8 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, Flare bovel groove wold (0) Butt joint (B) Treat (1) Comer joint (C) Base Metal Thickness Ketel U = unlimited) Tolerances s ) | Rot Opening Allowed welding | Joint RootFace” | AsDetaled | ASFIUp | Welding |Weld Size Process | Designation | Ts Ts_| Bond Radius" | (see 3123) | (6003.12.3) | Positons | (E) | Notes sne,-0 | +78, 176 a6 ™ tuo | uae sty |s,7,10, SMAW | BTC-PIO | min | UY | min -0,4Not- | “0, snot td e fa Uimted | Limites wie,-0 | +118, -196 maw 36 % wu-0 | su, an6 sty | 4.7.10, Foaw |BTOPIOSE| ig | | in -0.4not- | 0, snot te] e | Limited | “Limites 20 +1716,-0 we | 42 +0 | u,-in6 on saw | TP10S | min | min | NA 0, tno. | “0, iNet c ate |e Limied | _Limites “For cold formed (AS00) rectangular tubes, C dimension isnot limited, See the folowing Effective Weld Size of Flare-Bevel-Groove Welded Joints. Tests have been performed on cold formed ASTM A500 material ext ling ae" dimension as small as T, with a nominal radus of 2. As the rads increases, the “c" dimension also Increases. The comer curvature may not be a quadrant ofa cic tangent tothe sides. The comer cimension, c" may be les than the radius of the corner. Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Inches) ” ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Square groove weld (7) Butt joint (B) fee Secor ALL DIMENSIONS INram Base Metal Thickness cra reralee co) =) a Allowed susing | sn Tabsuies | AFIGm | iy | a se BEES | oeiton| ts | te rosomwire| auSie | cesta’ | ress [ES | ee su eee | onm |—laetan| 20 | 2 |» | & | es 3 ‘Square-groove weld (1) sant «,+€,musrnorexceso 21 oe Fe Base Metal Thickness . paral uemanae vom] vay | ta ving | st Faveases | eran | MONS | nl B88 | oesiton| restopena | ae SES [ chet | SMBS ET | pee ih 3, cw | cow | orm |—| nee | 20 | 2 | mw | | s sure 3.3 (Continued) (Millimeters) 80 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Single-V-groave weld Buon) Comrie) a ee ALL DIMENSIONS en ——— Groove Preparation Udy [oper Toerarces a wading | sot Towra” | Asoatiee | Asritup | acing [Wet Size Proces | vesnaton | _tr__| Te | croove are | (0 212) | (e032) | Pontos |" E) | Notes T= Oneg | go oe geo noe sma | scer | omn [ul fim | io | “i a | os [ase oo" | sto | oe Oa aww | ecece | enn | u pode ee am | os [tee woe | ace 2. Pe sw | ecers | timo | u sino r | s |zew soi | ad ed) Butt joint (8) S2(E2) [AL OMENSIONS IN mn Base Metal Thickness Gee Erne aaa Root Opening Tolerances Allowed Total wecing | Jit RoaFace’ | Asbaiee | Asriup | Wedny |Wolt Sze Process | oesgaton | Ts __| Te | croowarge | (ce 129) | oo | Poatons |E1°E.) | Nets dP nee sua | ees | mn | — S| a | ses [5% soi | ae 72-0 cua % ve, | hae cmw | apsce | tamn | — Rey wm | ses, | ¥8 Fa aw | ers | 20mm | — wo Fr | are [enw ae Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Millimeters) 81 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, Shei rarer WOR) aunjont@) od ‘Comer joint (C) ALL DIMENSIONS en Base Metal Thickness cots Erepaaeon Umea)” [5 opaany Terence a vieing | sit Rosace’ | pbaaies | asFiup | Qicdmn |welsze Prose | oesgnaon | Ts _| Te | cwowande | Geeaias) | Geesizy | Postone [Key "| Nowe Ro a0 | a2 258 sua | eroee | ou fu] sfomn | aninaog a | ss [330 coe | ana a FHS cau cuw Tercescr| —omn | u ies ra Fa saw | ropes | timo | u wieo r [os soa Danae aaa wad) Butt joint (B) omit) Comat) ALL DIMENSIONS Wen Base Metal Thickness Soo Eepeeen (= unlinted) | got Opening Tleaneee Atowed | Total wing | Jot RaaFace’ | Asbaaies | asriup | tang [Wel Sze Process | pesgaion | Ts __| te | crime Ange | Greases) | cesta’ | pontans |'E7E) | noes a 375, [582 cm | oroes | emn | u wnt a | Ses [880 +10", 0", +10", 5" nid W 92.0 a CE sua | eroescr | t2mn | u wrt Se] 80 07-0" LOH Aol ra saw | rors | 20mm | uv wo | ses [578 +10", -0" 7 Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Millimeters) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Single U-groove weld @) Butt joint (8) Comer joint (©) ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm Base Metal Thickness cuore Eryn (Us uimted) | Root Opera Terence a Face towed woting | soit sovelRaces | Asogaice | Asritup | Woting [Wot Size Proses | vesonaton | __t,__| Te | Stove are | (ee 212) | (eee | Pontos |G) "| Note 20 | 32 smw | sces | omin | u v2 a | os 288 soe sa cua wo 120, cmw | eceecr | 6mm | u wo a | os [3% ste ry ‘ wo saw | scecs | tim | u a r | os few soho Dae Ugaoe wd Batinnt O) AL DMENSIONS I mn cove Pepraion Base Metal Thickness 7 a= (Us enimtes) | Root pera Torarces Roa Face stoned | Tol weting | Jit ovelRacis | Asdaiee | Asriup | Waking [Wel Size Proce | vecnaion | Tr _| Te | eoveance | (oe tz) | (eee | Pustine [1 *ED | Note dP sua | per | t2mn | — wo | “2 a | sis, [888 se | ae a cua a3 | os, | 689. cmw | perce | tamn | — v8 2 a | sis | oS sie | ws 7 7a saw | cers | am | — we | 8 | ses foo se | ade Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Millimeters) ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Single-Tgroove weld (@) Butoent®) enn ‘Comer joint (C) ALL DMENSIONS 1 mn Base Metal Thickness cuore Eryn (Us uimted) | Root Opera Torna Roa Face ‘ones woting | soit sovelRaces | Asogaice | Asritup | Woting [Wot Size Process | pestraton | Ts | Ta | Grooveange | (ese a120) | (eseart2a) | Postine |G) | Notes 20 | 32 suaw | tore | onin |v 22 aw | os |&@z soe sa : wi-9 5.7, suaw | sore | min |v wo a | os {82 soo sz cone : uo to, GMAW | Tope.cF 6mn ju oy Al S| ao stoic | a gees caw 7 2 19.7 ew | eceecr| —emin | u 2 aw | os [ter ss saw | ropes | timn |v r | os en saw | cress | tim |v r | os fone “Applies to inside comer joints. “Apples 0 cuside comer jon igure 3.3 (Continued) (Millimeters) 84 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, Doubiesr-groove wold (@) Butt joint (B) Treat (1) Comer joint (C) ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm ove Peparatn Base Metal Thickness 7 es ‘U'Svmimtos) [Roo Gpenra [____Torarcs Reet Pace stones | Ta wen | Jot sovenaces | asveaiee | asrtup | wedny |Welr Sze Process | pesgnaton | Ts __| Ts | Groene | Geos) | oosd'y | Pentre |1E°E) | Noes 22 | 567 suaw | arcex | tania | u B | a | ses | Be 7 ‘" cuaw : vse | 47 caw lerces.cr| oma | u a | ses | 8 : _ sw | cease | aomin | u | ses: | 4% 0s "2 2 ws, [oz ‘SAW Pas 20min u 2 ‘i SiS | 0,1 10 "a0 ‘e os, [Ore saw | ress | 20mm | u 2 | ses [8% a0, “Applies to inside comer joins. “Applies to utside comer joints Figure 3.3 (Continued) (Millimeters) 85 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 Flare bovel groove wold (0) Butt joint (B) Treat (1) Comer joint (C) ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm Base Metal Thickness Rad (U=unimted) Tolerances fe ) | oot Opening owed Weng | Joint RootFaoe, | AsDeiaies | ASFRUP | Weng | Wels Size Process | Designation | Ts Ts_| Bend Radius | (oe 312.3) | (6003.12) | Positons | 1) — | Notes aco 2-0 32 5 a mo | woo | wie sty |5,7,10, smaw | BtoP10 | min | Y | min 5 ino | -osnor | MM | gt | te c= min | Tinted | “tinted fe, | 22 | 32 cuaw 5 ty] tsmn | oo | aie sty | 4,710, Foaw [BTCPIOSE in | Ul mn | at, -0,tNo | oso | AN | gt [ae c= St min | Linted | “tinted neo) 20 20 2} 2 mo | wo | sue sty | 10, saw | TRIOS | oon | min | NA IT, -0,4Not. | 0, Not : es | 2 c= min | “Limted | “Lines “For cold formed (AS00) rectangular tubes, C dimension isnot limited, See the folowing Effective Weld Size of Flare-Bevel-Groove Welded Joints. Tests have been performed on cold formed ASTM A500 material ext ling ae" dimension as small as T, with a nominal radus of 2. As the rads increases, the “c" dimension also Increases. The comer curvature may not be a quadrant ofa cic tangent tothe sides. The comer cimension, c" may be les than the radius of the corner. 86 igure 3.3 (Continued) (Millimeters) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, Sane gone wa Ste Be TT TT TT t rer oe f bite Base Metal Thickness | ears Espen wu Tolerances Allowed Gas surg | sn Tadaaies | Aram | f0ily | aetna BSS | owtion| 1s | ts [rosommna| aes | cS | SUSE | EER ae ea arc Ee heated Cita 4 max u +1116, -0 +114, 1716 Al = 5.10 ai : a Same gone wT sate sncxsouse ee) 2s i a lL. Base Metal Thickness uae repo uh women | any | con wang | set Tebasies | Aram | Oy | aetna BS | owtion| ts | ts [rostomenna| See | cet | SUSE | SEC | nae cu | eae | wm f—] re | vineo fous | om | — [ass saa : a BEY [exwor | sone [—[ Roose | vine [rece | a | aRR [aac Sess} aera — a Sav sucs | —s8nar |= 2 — bane} | =a Figure 3.4—Prequalified CJP Groove Welded Joint Details (see 3.13) (Dimensions in Inches) 87 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Square groove weld) Tot) N. Comer joint (C) ps BACKGOUGE Base Meta Thickness Kad (U= unlimited). Tolerances ‘moves | cas Welding | Joint ‘As Detaled | ASFILUp | Welding | Shielding Process | Designation Ts Tz | Root Opening | (see 2.13.1) | (s0e3.131) | Positions |torFCAW | Notes smaw | Tou | tema | +1t6,-0 | e1716,16 | an — |as7 AW 7 > Wor SHAW Trcic | vema |u| R=owv8 | +116.-0 At | ng [147 ‘saw | Touts | seme | U | Reo 2 F Smear Single-V-groave wold Tolerances Butt joint (8) “As Detaled | As FILUP (see 3.13.1) | (900 3.13.1) 6-0 | 4, 6 Ho" [10 ‘Base Metal Thickness (U= unimited) Groove Preparation ‘Alowed | | Gas welding | Joint ‘welding | Shielding Process | Designation T T, | Root Opening Groove Ange | Pestions | for FCAW | Notes A = [a0 smaw | BU28 v - von | — | 8.10 Fv.on | — | 5,10 F.V.OH | Required | 1.10 ouaw GMAW | p.u2e.oF v = F.VOH | Notrea. | 1.10 F.VOH_| Notrea | 1.10 SAW | Bias | Pmax FE = [7 ‘saW | 62S vu = F = [710 Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) 88 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘SingleV-groave wold Toone comer) ‘epaaies | ase a (sce 3.13.4) | (see 3.131) ee TT wy sa oa ys 8 Te sao me usm cena pt fiowes | cee voting | set frei | siadeg BSCE | veiiion | T.| evn hago | Pent | TEESE | te af su | cum | ou fu ener [=p rier —=—few WOR [Reged | cae aww | cursor | ou | u : Euorfiwee Lo ¢ Econ [wares [11 sai ees [aa 7 ep a : p= SraSaTE Tee Bion Base Metal Thickness cuore Erepaeeon v ed) Root Opening ws Allowed Gas voting | Joe wae? | eoaaies | moray | (ling | stig Process | Designation Te | Groove Angle | (see 3.13.1) | (see 3.13.1) | Positions | for FCAW | Notes nro ie] neo] sie ia cw | ex | uv |—| too | ames |i | ow | — [aa sae_| Ns Sine o} ie ow [ouzce | ou | Thee | relied | ow | NL, [a0 +10", 0" +10", 5° ‘a owrizier | — aoso, | -tns.-0 caw | sizes fowrtw rie] — of eke | oe | | aw io) ails oer tizie2| — Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) 89 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘SingleV-groave wold Comer joint (C) MN, Cp BACKGOUGE Yo ty A u oe Preparaon Base Metal Thickness 7 Pe eaters) Root Opening —— Allowed Gas wading | Jot RoaFace” | AeDaaiea | AeRtup | (waking | teing Proce | vecraton | Th cron kre | Gee i3) | Gees | posto [FCA | Noes R008 | 18,0 | iMG -16 aa smw | cus vu ful ects | AAS | Mitte | on [= 145 Soete_| ums Sine.-0 Ps =18 owl oucr | ou fu Sine.-e | Mattes | an | ot | a7 foscat_| Sos! ane sw | cums] ui |u worm | vue | oe | — fant ciate | sit. Doe y goo wed Tose Banco) fe Saied| As FAUp poco (083%) | oe 843) Rew [a= =i =0 10% ae ower oaelaanco pacer | SMAW. 20 +178, Baca ea Tose a yoo repeaton wv ed) 7 = Allowed Gas weting | Jit Goon | weting | sheting Preces | Oesgraion | Tr __| T: | eatopening | Rootrece | rg | Postons_| frFCAW | Noes 7 Tow te A = saw | 9use | spore | — Toe Eon = “88 Teck Totes Evon [= v saw | euses | space | — room fara] F = [een Teck Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, oe ee S81 = 2/3 (T,- 144) aera Base Metal Thickness S sr emu =r om fees yosing | set Bsa aa jrabsanal| prareastl| festa || cae BS | oaitlon| oe eel Pee eee swaw | 6. neon | seo | sea a | — |*5e Berle | tees [powers eee |e wee | |e oT) ie cae bam | aR = ae : a ay ke RK rcruoa rasa eee | ees lier iso sspatalenioe|| ete frm oom corgl Gees eeoea | ees Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) 91 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘S00 Notes on Page 72, Sige bever groove wad) Taro Tem Sierra) TAsDaated | _ASFIUp (00 3.13.1) | (980 3.13.1) 6,0 | 8, 176 107-0" | +107, -8° Base Noial ioe ‘US umaedy rove Prpeaon ‘atowes | cas wing | sot tiecing_ | sting Proce | pesonaton | Tr | Ta | Rootopenng | Groow ange | Penvons |frCait| Notes a a | [eam swan | rou | ou fu aie es ea A = ian | Recuiea | P70 cay coe TH cu brcuscr} ou | u ona F | note, | nas 17.10 ones ar _| woes, [7 aa 79, sw [reues} uv |e orm rn Shel borer gor wT) Buna) Te L nf Ink BACKGOUGE Base Metal Thickness. Stowe Prenseae (= unlined) | Root Opening Tienes Alowed | _ Gas wing | sot aaFace’ | Asbaaies | asriup | tradhy | sheng Process | Designation h Ta _| Groove Angle | (see 3.13.1) | (see 3.13.1) | Positions | for FCAW | Notes: suaw | eu vu [Jaro | sme | ve | a | — [25° wo | Tane20 | Naltnaed SHAT rowse | sine.0 S waa Foaw | 8-U4b-GF u - 45° 10", -0" 10", 6 a required 40 a ee sw sues} uv |v wove | ‘tie | e | — |aaw ite | ats. Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘S00 Notes on Page 72, ‘Single-bavelgroove weld A) Treat (7) N Comer joint (©) eS BACKGOUGE cove Preparation Base Metal Thickness - paral eaters) Root Opening Tolerances Allowed Gas wading | Jot Raaace’ | Asbaaiea | AsFtup | dna | sheng Pte’ | oecton | Ts crore digi | (ee38a} | Gow | pestans |iorrAW | Notes cuaw | rove |u| v| now | veo | nea] a | — [fed core | sine-0 | Natnged ou rowye | sins.co | Noxarme wah Ba frouwer| vu fu asi | tone | MOMS [a | RS [ya aes sw [roues| ou |u Pen ere eo eae foes Doub bareraroove we) Tena Binion) 7 Tjoint (T) iS ‘As Detailed | As Fit-Up Cameron) Geoatany| oostsy eee ax | Ha Teneo a8 i oe v “48,0 Croove Preparation a weitng | Jot Gow | Weting | sheng Freces | oesgnaion | Tr __| T2 | eatoperng | roatraco | gio | Poston | ferFCAW | nos a eu | sme [ul rem | tow lana] am Saks Tack a571 Maw : nem | teow [axa] at aH tousa | Space= | u a W4xR 45,7, a-se | sow fa-w| nov | — [tie 4 Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, Doutie-beve-groove weld (5) Butt joint (B) LW BACKGOUE anh Base Metal Thickness = imi Tolerances a 8) | Root Opening = ‘Alowed | _ Gas Welding | Joint RootFace | AsDelaied | ASFIUp | Welding | shielding Process | Designation % Ts | Groove Angle | (see 2.13.1) | (eee 3.131) | Postions |forFCAW | Notes Fine, 0 | +6, 18 ww |e Flows | 16-0 | Notwnted | 245, sh U5 v - aapea | qaprtor — | eho a5 “ Fig, 0 | 6-18 cuaw wows | +4716,-0 | Notiimited Not | 1,3,4, Foaw | B-USGF a - a+B a+B AN | requires | 8, 40 soa | stor Doutie bevel groove wold Toit (T) Comer joint (©) roove Preparation ‘Base Meta Thickness & = (OF untinted) | Root Opening Mild Alowed | _ Gas Welding | Joint Root Face. | AsDetaied | ASFIUp | Welding | Shielding Process | Designation t Te | Groove Angle | (see 3.13.1) | (se03.13.1) | Positions |forFCAW| Notes 45,7, coe | eee ie U | Reon | s6,-0 | sv6,-ve | eae wove | +7t6,-0 | Notimited a Maw s0",-ar | st07 5 no] 540 GMAW | To.us.cF v u ar | petites | 8, R=0 w vate, 0 ae saw | TOUSs v u | teatemax | +0,-316 | s1t6 F - (476 asco | st -0 | +105" : Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, Single-U-greove weld (6) Butt joint (B) = omar) Aedaaies | A FOp Geena) | gost) Re 76-0 6,=18 0" Tot Lited sD Base ial oes US uaedy rove Preparaon stones | can weding | sot Groove | Root] Bevel | wocing | sheting Prost | oesgnaton | Ts _| Te Root pening] ‘angor|Face_| Radin | Poston |trFCAW| Note Roeser [Te [| a} fae cue om [Reo [a=20" | (a1 [14 FLOW = 4.5.10 uw to te feu > oa | — [8s cus v fu eae 01 reve [eam | ron | — [*% San EEE] oA ee remem | at fis Pee Feaw | cusor | _u wo eve [=i [at | nota [ MASP Doki D gone wT) Tasanaes Binion) cee 7 Wp BACKGOUGE | (see 3.13.1) (see 3.13.1) 1 FoeBUT an BUTE Re | v6 a= o107, 0" | +1075" 1/16, 0 | Not Limited 14,0 sii16 For UTS =e ae Basotetal Tatras una cove Preparation ew ea 7 * Allowed Gas wecing | Joint Gove | Reet] Seat | Weicng | sneidng Process | Designation al - Angle Face | Radius | Positions | for FCAW| Notes 1-18 a | sw | eur v fe f=08 ron | — Sua 7 Wat CUT T eurcr | ou | — rave [rave | a | hit saw | urs vu f= a Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) 95 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘Single-Tgroove weld (@) Butt joint (B) 1 w F ' Tolerances “As Detaled | As FILUp (e0e3.13.1) | (see 3.13.1) Ree 0 | 6,18 soo | a0 160 | Wet Lined pi. uaa | a6 DoT ta xoKaouse Basta Ticks ‘US umaedy rove Preparation ‘ones | cus wading | sot ost] Groove | Root | Bevel | Wesing | sheting Process | pesgon | _ Tr | te | opuana | noe | Face | roa | rosters |trPcait| notes saw | ee vu fe (8 a | — [ee cua 734 een geo mue = 8 | notre | P85 3a sw [ews | uv fule won| “Mie | rae | oe | — [oat S610 | ots Tage arco wo Tame Toint (T) = ert) py Aedaaled | ASAUp teeea2)_| oo) encxcouse [Reine -0| rim. =18 . Ee ' 6-0 | Wa Ud | uaa [a6 1 Te Ss ne Base etal Tones ‘Unies roove reparation saones | coe wedng | Joint Rast] Goove | Root | Bevel | Waring | shettng Prose | vecorason | tr _| Te | opwang | ‘ange | Face | raaus | Postine [treca| Note R=oo1m [ana | ew [rae] a | — | aes suav | rouse | ou fu Jaw Reowr [ana | mm [rae | non | — |e AT Te wa a7 SW Trcussar | uv |v [Reowww [anor | rw [reas | wn | NR | ha 0] wa -0 a saw | rouses | ou |u| retin | ove | Mie’ | 38] oe | — [sts ane | S620 ios Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) 96 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs Dane Taoare waa) Tasanaes Barnet) 1h : Aedeties | _AFUp i eel Geena) | woos) = R= +116,-0 | +1/16,-118 Sioa oo \, 16-0 | Na Uae veo —[ a8 at acKsoUGE Bas tal Tce ‘Us evn Groove Preparation saonea | coe wecing | Jot Rat] Gove | Root | Bove] Woiiny | shetdna Prose | oosgnaon | Ts | Te | oponna_| tngu|Face_| Radin | Postons [trECaW | Note cmw | ove ae eee me aT wa aw Teuecr |v |—|R-oww reve [aoe | wr | ty [if Double Faoore wa) Toeances Paont ‘ aot) is Ae Datsied | ASFUe b Geese) | eed) Re 76-0 16, =18 f—Knereouee Fibre | ar 4 t 26-0 | Wa Uted 7 rated [ae 4 4 q oF Bs ital Tess ‘Us oun) rove Propeaon owes | con wecing | Jit aa] Groove | Root | Bova] Wocing | sheting Process | Designation u Te | Opening Angle Face | Radius | Positions | for FCAW| Notes a57 wore tee feos] om | — | 8a suw | rouse | ou fu ‘t . Tr R=0w 8 rave [oe | non | — [ei 1a7 cua ete cm Trowecr| ou | u | R-oo1 va] on | a, | Bio Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Inches) ” ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 sete onPage 2 apa Sion) Samer) TI TT = TT i i oS + Ea + Lreeler ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm — cael Base Metal Thickness | exes wu Tolerances Allowed Gas voting | Joe Tebaaies | meta | Wt | sera Hees | oedgation| | re | rosommna | Ge | cS) | Mesh | SPECIE] news Bis Enar [= x heated Clta 6 max u 42,0 +6,-2 All = 5,10 roa : Tek TERY [etiecr | tom |—| ey | 20 | 22 | a [ahs [ ato Saapewey Bion) sxcxcouse Beer at) 2s i a lL. AL DMENSIONS Hn Base Metal Thickness uae repo Utama Tee] owe | cos vig | st Tebaaies | meta | (eg | sidng Fes | oesgmion| 1 | 1. | rosommana | Gestion) | coy | Poems | Erect] nos cu | ore | om |-| nee | 20 | 2a | m | — fase Sa rar By | euvor | wm | aa [23 [wath [pare Sw [ Burs [oma = Bee sa} eties [omar f= as =e igure 3.4 (Continued) (Millimeters) 98 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘Square groove weld) joint 1) N, Comer joint (C) ea BACKGOUGE Sat ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm % Base Meta Thickness Kad (U= unlimited). Tolerances ‘moves | cas Welding | Joint ‘As Detaled | ASFILUp | Welding | Shielding Process | Designation Ts Tz | Root Opening | (see 2.13.1) | (s0e3.131) | Positions |torFCAW | Notes smaw | Toth oma | u 2,0 2.3 al — |as7 AW a 2 a Wor Cu | toutcr | tomx | u | R=003 2-0 2-3 Al | eenttg | 147, ‘saw | Tears | iomex | U | R=0 2 mo F Smear Single-V-groave wold Tolerances Butt joint (8) “As Detaled | As FILUP (00 3.13.1) _| (oe 3.12.1) +62 ie ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm ‘Base Metal Thickness (U= unimited) Groove Preparation ‘Alowed | | Gas welding | Joint ‘welding | Shielding Process | Designation T T, | Root Opening Groove Ange | Pestions | for FCAW | Notes Ree A = [a0 smaw | B.U28 v - 10 von | — | 8.10 Rt Fv.on | — | 5,10 3 F.V.OH | Required | 1.10 cuaw GMAW | p.u2e.cF v = 10 F.VOH | Notrea. | 1.10 é F.VOH_| Notrea | 1.10 Sw] is | oma 6 FE = [7 ‘saW | 62S vu = 16 F = [710 Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Millimeters) ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, —=—= tae a | elton [| | mace oem | Melt | SEE es oo ee zor fone LS BACKGOUGE SSeS ( ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm R Base Metal Thickness Grows Erepaaion: sen | ees oe | Sas aww | eo | ou | Ba, | natintes | oan | NO, | 14,40 +10", 0" +10, 5° ‘at new | vas saw | eins | os | _ : 2 5 Sao eo) 3 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘SingleV-groave wold Comer joint (C) MN, oS ‘BACKGOUGE "Wa f TE, AR b ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm roove Preparation Base Meta Thickness = (0 enlinted) | Root Opening ewes towed | _ Gas Welding | Joint Root Face” | AsDetaied | ASFIUp | Welding | Shilcing Process | Designation t Groove Angle | (see 2.12.1) | (eee 3.131) | Positions |forFCAW| Notes 2-0 72-3 ea smaw | cue v u 42-0 | Notlimited | An - 48 08-0 | Horns 42,0 22,3 Gua | cu2cr v u 32-0 | Notimited | An ea FCAW ae eee required | 10 20 +20 saw | cums v u 40,6 F — |a710 +0" 0" Double-V.groove weld (3) — But joint (B) ‘AsDetied | _ AS FitUp ieee (9003.13.1)| (600 3.13.1) Re | 16-0 42.0) ae HOO] +107 = Spacer SAW] 20 12.0 pacer Tswiawi| 20 +30 ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm ‘Base Metal Thickness (U=unimited) Groove Preparation pee welding | Joint Groove | Welding | Shilcing Process | Designation ts Te | Root pening | _RootFace | Angle | Positions | forFCAW | Notes R=6 ‘Al = Thee smaw | B-USa = EV, OF = . acer = 1/8 xR, 4 ‘Spacer = 1/8 FV OH = 0 vu saw | BUS [eoacertiaxr| — | R=1 a= 20 F — |4a10 Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Millimeters) 101 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 DoubieV-roave wold (3) For B-U30S ony ALL DIMENSIONS IN am at | anak Batt) BACKGOUGE Li St oer [Te a wera a [60 [as eee so —[ ie] 00 | 2070 20 [40] 80 a0 | ~150—[85 Fort > 0 oT, «60 ALLOIMENSIONS mm Ti fernes cove Pepraion Base Metal Thickness S sr ‘US imted Toeranaee Root Opeing towed | cas wecing | it RoaFace” | AeDaaiea | AeRtup | (wating | seting Proce | vecraton | Th crore angie | (ee384} | Gow | pustans |iorreAW | Notes swaw | 6. r-003 | 20 | 2s | a | — [58 vu |- 223 | nett uA args. | 2-0, | Nate waa, SHAW ease prod | sigan | MoS! [Tar | Sa TP a0} a] ao eon || oat | aa saw | evs | ou | ee ele ae To in so te above SS Te= (Se Snole-bever groove wid) Tances Bato 8) Te baied | AB FVUp teees2)_| Gee) 44 Reez-0 | 06,2 Toe oe : Bosna Tnes Sm cece rpraten owes | cee vii | si 15a | axieg Hecate | oelgtin [—_T.__| Te | _RestOperng | Grom ange | mints [SPEEA notes as as ea Se ne Ge u _ R=10 All = {3.5.10 cue cw | suecr | ou | — fe At weg P13 1 F [nates P18 1 sw | eves} uv [vP—® e | — [ae sure 3.4 (Continued) (Millimeters) woz ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘S00 Notes on Page 72, Sagi gaor wo) Toman et Ea etc) Fedgaies | A Ap Gerster | ceeitn se Tr HO rove Preperation stones | cas weding | sot ted | siting Prose | oesgnnon | Tr | Tz | RostOperng | Grove Ange | Poster [er FCAW | Note Ree onde a | eae smw | tous | ou fu E70 Rw es ee Res oar ran | Rogues | * 7 cu 5 ee 770, aww | rouwor} ou | u R=10 ona F | mata. | Ree ae ar_[ natea, |? R= =a 710, sw [roues| vu |v ce a= * | — |r ‘Single-bevel-groove weld (4) Bunion @) ALLDIMENSIONS Nem sucohoal namo Groove Preparion Tolerances Allowed Gas weding | sot Fedasies | Are | Wold | shetirg Prowess | Oesgnaton | Ts__| Ts | Root opening | (66184) | Geo | Posten [terFCAW| Notes cmaw | ous vu f- zo f 2s | a | — [eae 33 | nates cua 2, | ae wa Ta, MW Teuwor | uv | — ‘oie | Nore [an | ty |e 7 aw | sus | ou |u wea | a eal or ees ioe Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Millimet 103 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘Soe Notes on Pago 72 ‘Single-bavelgroove weld A) Treat (7) N Comer joint (©) eS BACKGOUGE y a zl si ‘ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm Te cove Preparation Base Metal Thickness - paral {U= wiimited) Root Opening Leman Allowed Gas wong | Ji FootFace’ | AsDaaied | SEIU] Welding | sheting Prscet | Destpton | _Ts crore digi | (ee38a} | Gow | pestans |iorrAW | Notes ‘SMAW TC-Uab u u R=0t03 42,0 42,3 All - 47. 42,0 Not limited aa aa feos | 2-0. | Note Wa. 87 BN frouwer| vu fu ‘aw | voice | ON [ar | RR [ya 30 eo sw [roues| ou |u woes 2 oa st | wits Double-bevel-groove weld (5) y, a) Baton) 7s Deaied| As Fp Tee oc) (see 3.13.1)| (see 3.13.1) eve et (©) zen | 6.0 z me sa ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm ‘Base Metal Thickness nim roove Preparation — = e Atowed | _ Gas Weting | Joint Groove | Welding | Shielding Process _| Designation Te | Rootopening | RootFace | “Angle | Postons | forFCAW | Notes : a 345 Bus u t=003 [a=ar| al — [sas B57 ‘sMaw ts003 |a=a| at — [Bier Tous u aw tz0ws |a=30| ROH — | Bio ‘ Figure 3.4 (Continued) (Millimeters) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs ‘See Notes on Page 72, Doutie-beve-groove weld (5) Base Metal Thickness Eee co) =) Root Opening ws Allowed Gas Bee | aed | ns [x | cet | ess | Ca, | ASR [SRE noe es esa es - a | — fase . aa 0 as pttor | qapttor 8, 10 ag | ecw za | is = Saale ve ay Foaw | B-US-GF u ~ a+B a+B oa required | 8,10 a ay : oe SAE J Base Metal Thickness S Pe (= untied) | Root Opening Teens Alowed | _ Gas wt | S282" aoe | a | AS [alte Wine [oats [ss [|i | Gos | i | eee [SE] ne oe oe aoe aa laa l | — |S ow | wes} v [ol am |e |e) | — [ee sure 3.4 (Continued) (Millimeters) los ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 Tigre wad Tolerances sition) omer ©) Rebates | _ADFIUp (seo3t8-)_| (eoe.18%) 72.3 a0 ot Lined 0 ALL DIMENSIONS 1mm Basontal Tess (Us ursiiosh Croove Preparation a Wotdng | nt Groowe | Root | Gavel | Wed | shaking Process | pestgtion | Ts RootOpenina| ‘ange. | Face | Radus | Posters |‘orFCaW| Notes R003 [ass] tea | 6 | A | = 128.70 cu uy UP Re0t3 0" OH = 145,10 sMaw R=009 | aaa a = [fn cus uo fu TBF R=008 | «nar row | — [*3" Gan DEES oes ae a [wae [8.1 reaw [cuscr |u| u| r-owa | a-ao ar | notrea. | P45 Doubt groowe wad) Tela Baton @) ‘AsDatatea | _ASFLUp (seo3.t81)_| (soe3.t8%) ForB.UT and BUTE az Hoa 8 at ited z FoBUTS za | ALL DIMENSIONS IN mm E] BaseNetalTnainess (Usury roove Preparation oa Weting | int Roa] Groove | Root | Bowel | Wedng | Sneting Process | pestaton | Ts | Tz | opening _| ‘Anger | Face | Radue | Pontons |'orFCAW | Nots R=008 | «nas es ce om | eur vu f= a R=008 ee ee HAW 7 WaT Su eurcr | uv | —| R-ows ee Sav [BUTS T= Ta a sure 3.4 (Continued) (Millimeters) 106 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs Sige Taioove wed By Tolerances Buin) X ' Rebates | _ADFIUp (seo3t8-)_| (eoe.18%) or a0 Tat Lied Z A BACKGOUGE ALL DIMENSIONS 1mm BaveNtalThness Us mts) rove Preparation ‘owes | con wecing | it Roa | Groove | Root | Bevel | Woding | Sheting Proce | pestaton | Ts | Tz | openng_| ‘Ange | Face _| aun | Pontons |'orFCAW | Notes suaw | eve vf a | — [eee HAW 73.4 cu [euecr | ou | — ran | metres. | PS saw | sues vu fu r | — [ast Tigo Faroove wo Taare Toint (T) = omer jot ©) ps ‘AsDatatea | _ASFILUp teeea2")_| oo) tAcKGOUGE 7,3 . aoa i Nailed i Z 7 Te Ss ne ALLDMENSIONS mm Base etal ones (Us uwimed roove reparation stoma | cas weaing | Joint Root] Groove | Root | Bevel | Wedng | Sneting Process | Destaton | Ts | Ta | opening _| ‘Angor | Face | Aadue | Postone |'orFCAW | Nots 45.7, R=003 |e m | — [tea smw | roue | ou fu fon R=008 |e row | — [aor SHAW : Wa]. 47 Foaw | TC-U8aCF v ee bial required | 10, 11 Ao saw | rouss | ou |u| reemn e | — [ayo aaa oT sure 3.4 (Continued) (Millimeters) ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M:2002 ‘See Notes on Page 72, Dane Taoare waa) Terence Barnet) Aedeties | _AFUp Geesite) | oo. a a0 Tat Lited 3 ALLDMENSIONS tim Bas tal Tce ‘US umaedy Groove Preparation saonea | coe weding | sot Rat] Gove | Root | Bove] Woiiny | shetdna Prose | oosgnaon | Ts | Te | oponna_| tngu|Face_| Radin | Postons [trECaW | Note cmw | ove u_ [=| reows | amar | tes mw | = (he aT 7 wa FCAW BusGr u = | Re0t3 A required | 6. 10 Double Faoore wa) Tasers Paont ‘ aot) is Ae Datsied | ASFUe b Geese) _| aoe) a f — 9230" Figure 3.5 (Continued) Prequalified Joint Details for PJP = Y-,and K-Tubular Connections (see 3.12.4) no ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 3. PREQUALIFICATION OF WPSs t| ep er] feist min =| Fe asemin 1.5 MIN] E y= 150-105" Y= 105"-00" Y= 907-75" TOE TOE OR HEEL SIDE OR HEEL CORNER DIMENSION to C2ty+ 18in. (9 mm) AND 'r2 21, OR ROOT OPENING 2 1/16 in. [2 mm OR SEE 3.124.1 = RADIUS: 1.5tyMIN OR AS REQUIRED TO FLUSH THIS LINE. 1.51 MIN parle Lora ISLES) ATW. ‘TOE CORNER: SIDE MATCHED General Notes: 1s Iickness of thinner section Bevel to feather edge except in transion and heel zones. Root opening: Oto 3/16 in (5 mn]. Not prequalified for under 20” Weld size (effective throat) t, =; Z Loss Dimensions shown in Table 28. Calculations per 2.24.1.3 shall be cone for leg engi less than 1.5% as shown. For Box Section joint preparation for comer transitons shal provide @ smoot traniion fom one deta to another. Welding shall be suonisog | od41 BAO0I-Y *) aaoouD-UN ‘PAOOI-H “AL -aoauD-ung ao0un) | AOR _ i Bupa a OA ONION FTO Bap A wOHPNP = TALON upon a somo (e'y 008) sysey eqns xog pue ‘edig ‘121d Aq paytleND suoNIsod BulpjaMm YORINpod—UONeINEND SdM by oren ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Range of Thickness and Diameter Qualified (see 4.4) (Dimensions in Inches) Table 42 WPS Qualification—CJP Groove Welds: Number and Type of Test Specimens and TL Tests on Patol Nominal Pate, Pipe or Tube Thickness** Number of Specimens alien, Reduced NominatPlate] Section | Root Bend | Face Bend | Side Bend Thickness (1)| Tension ee | Gee Fig. | Gee Fig. | (ee Fig Tested,in. | Fig dé) | 12) | aay | ais)” | oMin | Max Tsetse] > Z z = 17 or weeT<1 |? = = z i or Tand over? z 1s | Glimied 2. Tests on Pipe or Tobing!? Nominal Plate, Pipe or Tobe Wall Thickness Number of Specimens Nominal | __ Qualified, i. Reduced Diameter’ Nominal [Nominal Wall] Section | Root Bend | Face Bend | Side Bend | of Pipe or Pipe Sizeor | Thickness, [Tension Gee] Gee Fig, | (ee ig. | GeeFig. | Tube Size Diam, ia, | Trin. | Fig-d.id) | 412) | 412) | 4.13) | Qualified, in.| Min | Max oleae : > Test dam, vsstsas] 2 2 2 — [me [os [or | — | — | [Se pe [= Job Size > 3 = — Ttdan esaelipasss ‘Test Pipes ce) 2 4 Teetoecr | 308 | Unlimited ugsts38| 2 a 2 a ee a w8 — ‘eomn a] i ‘Standard or 3in, Sch. 40 i 7 i anaes ae Test Pipes} 6, Sch. 120 y te eee 2 4 | sandover | arte | untimitea Tests on ESW and EGW'* Nominal Plate Thickness Number of Specimens Qualified Reduced] ATE-Wel- Nominal Plate| Section | Metal | Side Bend Thickness | Tension (sce |Tension ee] (eee Fig. | CVN Tested | Figstts) | Fig ts) | 413) | Tess | Min Max T z i 4 [Roe [ost Tar Toes All tet plate, pie o tbe welds shal be visual inspected (see 48.) and subject o NDT (oe 4.82), One test plate, pipe or tube shal be required foreach qualified poston Soe Figure 410 and 11 forts plate reguirements For square groave wells that are qualified without bakouping, the maxintm thickness quale sal be lmited othe ts plate hikes. 4. CUP groove weld qualification on any thickness or diameter shall qualify any size of fille or PIP groove weld for any thickness, 5 ‘Quaifiation with any pipe diameter shall qualify all box section widths and depths 6 When speifed, CVN tts shall conform to Annex I 17, See Table To the groove dts ruited fo qualification of tubule but and T, 8 See Figure 49 forplate equtements BL K-conecton joints ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 4.2 WPS Qualification—CJP Groove Welds: Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness and Diameter Qualified (see 4.4) (Dimensions in Millimeters) [Tests on Patel ‘Nominal Pat, Pipe of Tube Thickness!* [Number of Specimens ‘Qualified, mm Reduced Nominal Plate | Section | Root Bend | Face Bend | Side Bend Thickness (7) | Tension see | (Gee Fig. | Gee Fig. | (see Fig Tesed,mm | Fig dis) | 412) | 412) | 413) | Min Max gets [2 z z = 3 or texters [2 = = a 3 or 2sand over | 2 S Ss 4 =| Walinited 2. Tess on Pipe or Tubing"? ‘Nominal Plate Pipe oe Tube Wall ‘Thickness Number of Spesimens Nominal |__Qualiied, mm Reduved Diameter? Nominal [Nominal Wal] Section | Root Bend | Face Bend | Side Bend | of Pipe or Pipe Size or | Thickness, [Tension see] Gee Fig. | (Gee Fig | (seeFig. | Tube Size Diam.mm | Tmm "| Fig4t4 | 4.12) | 42) | 413) [Qualified mn] Min | Max 3 Tet dam. 5 sets] 2 2 2 — | tem [os for < 6 mm WT 2 100 a Test Pipes 150 mm Ox 14 mm WT Peeone ean ee 7 = 4 | t00andover| 5 | Unlimited 3. Tess on ESW and EGW"* Nominal Plate Thskness [Number of Specimens Qualifies Redvsed | ATE-Weld- Nominal Plate} Section | Metal | Side Bend ‘Thickness | Tension (ee | Tension (see| (see Fig. | CVN Teed | Fiesta) | Fig dis) | 413) | tess | Min Max T z 1 << [ee [05 Tar Noes 1D All tet plate, pip o tube welds shal be visual inspected see 4.8.1 andsubjct to NDT (5504.82). One test pate, pipe or tube shall be required {reach qualified positon 2, See Figures 4,10 an 11 forts plate reauirements 5 For que groove welds that are qualified without backgouging, the maximum thickness quite shal limited tothe ts plat thickness. 44 CP groove weld qualifiaton on ny thickness o diameter sally any size of filet o PP groove weld fr any thickness, ‘5, Qualiestion with ny pipe diameter shall qualify al box section widths and dept 6. Whon specified, CVN dts shal conform Annex I 7. See Tble forthe groove details required for qualification of tubular but and T. V-, K-conpection oi. 8 See Figure 49 forplate equrements 132 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Table 4.3 Number and Type of Test Specimens and Range of Thickness Qualified— WPS Qualification; PP Groove Welds (see 4.10) ‘Number of Specimens)? ee ee Qualication Ranges WeldSize(E) Section Nominal Plt, Pipe or Tubing TesGroove | 4.102 Tension Root Bend Face Bend Side Bend Pino Theta te [oor] Depth, T $103 (eeFig. GGeeFig(GeeFig. (Gee Fig. | Groove J in. fmm) Sioa 44) tty 13) | Depth | Min Max igsTsse ; : : ae 3 2 2 2 = rt | ise) Ea 38 7% ines | > Pincwase f25 ines oe lyitccoce| ordre | ordzowne | ordanene’ | rdonene manufacturer ‘ontinued) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Table 4.5 (Continued) Process Essential Variable Changes to PQR Requiring Requaifieation ‘SMAW SAW GMAW FCAW GTAW Electrical Parameters (cont) 16) An increase or decrease inthe wire feed speed] foreach electrode diameter (if not amperage | > 10% > 10% > 10% controled) by: 17) A change inthe travel speed® (unless heat [> 15% inorease] > 25% inerease| > 25% ineease| > 50% increase input controls required) by: cordecrease | ordecrease | ordecrease | ordecrease “Any (when 18) An increase in heat input by: > 10% > 10% > 10% >io% | CVNtests are required) Shielding Gas 19) A change in shielding gas froma single gas to] any other single gas or mixta of ea, or in . the specified nominal percentage composition ofa gas mixture, orto no gas x Increase > $0%2| increase > 50% Ineease > 507 20) A change in tora gas flow rate by: crease = SOPe| Karen = re] Kntease= Se] e ‘AWS ‘AWS 21) A change toa shielding gas not covered in ae ee ‘SAW Parameters 22) A change of > 10%, or 8 in. [3 mm), hictever is greater inthe longitudinal spacing ofthe ares 23) A change of > 10%, or U8 in. [3 mm \whietiever is greater, inthe lateral spacing of theares 24) An increase or decrease of more than 10" {nthe angular orientation of any parallel electrode 25) For machine or automatie SAW; an increase for decrease of more than 3° in the angle of the electrode 26) For machine or automatie SAW, an increase ‘or decrease of more than 5° normal tothe sirection of travel General 27) For the POR groove area, an inerease or decrease > 25% in the numberof passes? 28) A change in position not qualified by Table 4.1 29) A change in diameter, or thickness, or both, ot qualified by Table 4.2 30) A change in base metal or combination of ‘base metals not listed on the PQR or qualified by Table 4.7 ‘ontinued) 135 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 4.5 (Continued) Process Essential Variable Changes to PQR Requiring Requalification SMAW SAW GMAW FCAW GTAW General cont'd) 31) Vertical Welding: Fr any pas from uphill todowntill or vie versa i x i 7 32) A change in groove Ope (eg. single-V 10 double-V), except qualification of any CIP] roove weld qualifies foray groove detail x x x x x ‘conforming withthe requirements of 3.12 or3.13 33) A change in the type of groove to a square = = groove and vice versa 34) A change exceeding the tolerances of 3.12, 3.13, 3.134, 5.22.4.1, 0¢ 5.22.42 involving: a) A decrease in the groove angle x x x x x 'b) Adeerease in the root opening ©) Am increase inthe root face 35) The omission, bu not inclusion, of backing x x x x x or backgouging >ase | >256 | >256 | >25% | >10% 26) Decrease from prebeat temperature” by nec | usa | wer > 100F 37) Inerease on interpass temperate? by [S5°C]ifCVN tess required pase | >2sr | >2se | >2se | > 100% Se eae nesucnuatacmcem teas se s05tC1e ee 05:Ciied fe ilistles| a UISCl lee OSC] 39) Adon or deletion of PWHT x x x x x “General Not: An" ndtes applicability forte proces a shaded lock indicts nowaplicbliy. Notes: 1 The filler metal strength may be decreased without WPS requlifcation. 2. For WPSe using alloy Mx, ay increase or dztease in the eletode diameter shall equire WPS requlication. 53, Teel speed tangs fr ll ies of ile welds maybe determined by the largest single pass Gilet weld apd the smallest mullile-pass Fillet weld qualification tests. 4, These essential variables shall apply only when best input control is «contract document requirement. Hest input in joules pe in (mm) sll be GOL where POR voltage = POR amperage Y= POR travel sped (rnm/min) fr joules per mm, inn) fe joules pee in 5. Ifthe production weld proove area differ from that ofthe PQR groove ae, the numberof PQR passes may be changed in proportion tothe ares without requiring WS roquaifistion. 6, The prodction welding prebet or nterpass temperature may be les than the POR pebeat or interpus temperature provide thatthe provisions of ‘and Table 32 are mc, andthe base metal temperature sal ot be les than the POR temperature atthe tne of subsequent welding 7. AWS ASM (SI Unis) clectodes of he same clasfication may be used in lieu ofthe AWS AS (U.S. Customary Units) elect clasication 136 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION PQR Supplementary Essential Variable Changes for CVN Testing Applications Requiring WPS Requalification for SMAW, SAW, GMAW, FCAW, and GTAW Variable smaw] saw |amaw| rcaw | craw Base Metal 1) A change in Group Number x 2) Minimum thickness qualified is Tor $38 in, [16 mum] whichever i less, except SET is less than 1/4 in, [6 mm], then the minimum thickness qualified is US in. S mm] Filler Metal 3) A change in the AWS AS.X Classification, or w a weld metal or filler metal lassification not covered by AS.X specifications 4) A change in the Flux/Wire classfiation, ora change in either the electrode or ‘ux tade name when not classified by an AWS specification, orto a crushed slag 5) A.change inthe manufacturer or the manufacturer's rand name or type of eleetrde Position '6) A change in position to 3G vertical up. 3G vertical up qualifies forall positions and vertical own Preheat/Interpass Temperature ‘An inerease of more than 100°F [56°C] in the maximum intespass temperature ualified Post Weld Heat Treatment '8) A change in the PWHT temperature andior time ranges. The POR test shal be Subjeet to 80% ofthe aggregate times at temperatures). The PWHT total time(s) at temperature(s) may be applied in one heating eyele Electrical Character 9) An inerease in heat input or volume of weld metal deposited per unit length of ‘weld, over dhat qualified. exeept when u grain refining austenitizing hea weat- ‘ent is applied ater welding, The increase may be measured by eiher ofthe followings a 1 = Het input in) TERRE ED «Travel Sped (in-niny 'b) Weld Metal Volume—An increas in bead siz, ora decrease in the length ‘of weld bead per unit length of electrode Other Variables 10) A change from single electrode to mulkple electrodes inthe same weld pool and vice versa 11) In the 3G position, a ebange from stinger to weave 12) A change from multipass per side to single pas per side bx |e 15) A change exceeding 420% in the oscillation variables for mechanized or automatic welding 137 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 4.7 PQR Essential Variable Changes Requiring WPS Requ: ication for ESW or EGW (see 4.7.2) Requalifiation Requalification Essential Variable Changes to POR Requiring Requalification by WPS Test by RT oe UT! Filler Metal 1) A significant” change in filler metal or consumable guide metal composition x ‘Molding Shoes (ixed or movable) 2) A change from metallic 1 nonmetallic or vice versa 3) A change from fusing to nonfusing or vice versa x 4) A reduction in any cross-sectional dimension or area ofa solid nonfusing " shoe> 25% 5) A change in design from nonfusing solid to water eooled or vice versa x Filler Metal Oscillation 16) A change in oscillation traverse speed> 10 ipm (4 minis) x 17) A change in oscillation traverse dwell time > 2 seconds (except as necessary - to compensate for joint opening variations) 8) A change in oscillation traverse length which affects by more than 1/8, 5 {3 mm], the proximity of filler metal tothe molding shoes Filler Metal Supplements 9) A change in consumable guide meal core cross-sectional area > W% x 10) A change in the flux system, ie, cored, magnetic electrode, extemal, et x 11) A change in ux composition including consumable guide eoating x 12) A ebange in Mux burden > 3076 x Electrode/Filler Metal Diameter 13) Increase of deevease in electrode diameter > 1/32 in, [1 mn x 14) A change in the numberof electrodes used x Electrode Amperage 15) An increase or deerease inthe amperage > 20% x 16) A change in typeof current (ae or de) or polarity x Electrode Are Voltage 17) An inerease or decrease inthe voltage 10% x Process Characteristics 18) A change toa combination with any other welding process x 19) A change from single pass to multi-pass and viee versa x 20) A change From constant current o constant voltage and vie vem x Wire Feed Speed 21) An inereave or deorease in the wire feed speed™> 40% x ‘Travel Speed 22) Am inerease or decrease inthe travel speed (if not an automatic funetion of ae length or deposition rate) > 20% (except as necessary to compensate for x variation in joint opening) (continued) 138 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Table 4.7 (Continued) Requaliication Requalifieation Essential Variable Changes to POR Requiring Requalification by WPS Test by RT or UT! Electrode Shielding (EGW only) 23) A stange in telding ga ompostonoFay one const > 5% of x 24) An increave or decrease inthe total shielding Now rate > 25% x ‘Welding Position 25) A change in vertical postion by > 10 x Groove Type 26) An increase in eross-sectional area (Tor nonsquare grooves) x 27) A decrease in eross-seetional area (for nonsquare grooves) x 28) A change in PQR joint thickness, T outside limits of 0ST=1.1T x 20) Aan inerease or decrease > 1/4 in, [6 mn] in square groove root opening x Postweld Heat Treatment 30) A change in PWHT x ‘General Noe: An 5° indents applicability for the roquaification method a shaded block indeates nonapplicabilily. ote: 1 Testing shal be formed in conformance with Section 6, Pats For Fa applicable Table 4.8 Table 3.1, Annex M and Unlisted Steels Qualified by POR (see 4.7.3) PQR Base Metal! WPS Base Metal Group Combinations Allowed by PQR ‘ny Group | Steel to Any Group I Steel ‘Any Group I Steel to Any Group I Steel Any Group I Stet to Any Group 1! Steet “Any Group I Steel to Any Group I Stee! ‘Any Group I Steel ro Any Group 1 Stee! Any Group Il Steel © Any Group I Steel Any Specifie Group Il or Annex M Steel Any Group I Steel The Specifie POR Group Ill or Annex M Steel Tested to Any Group I Steel ‘Any Specific Group IT or Annex M Steel t0 Any Group If Stee ‘The Spovifie POR Group II or Annex M Stee! Tested to Any Group Tor Group IT Steel ‘Any Group HI Stel tothe Same or Any Other Group It Steel Any Annex M Steel tothe Same or Any Other Annex M Stee Steels shall be ofthe same material specification, gradetype and minimum yield strength as the Steels listed inthe POR ‘Any Combination of Group II and Annex M Steels (Only the Specific Combination of Steels listed inthe POR ‘Any Unlisted Stel to Any Unlisted Stel or ‘Any Stet Listed in Table 3.1 or Annex M ‘Only the Specific Combination of Sees listed inthe POR (General Noes 2 Groups trough I ae found in Table 3.1 {Reduction in yeld strength with nereased metal thickness where allowed by these speciation, 139 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION “gc -2m8iy opus) wounded sop Jo touo9 po pounnped aq Su I POEUN "ejsaeyp [ta 9) tre 2x0 er Snay209 ope SIP ON OH {LTP a1 95) woneENsrEzMo SuPION Wy GEAR YON ON IUD ogensa>g mor yeseg— ara wodeno4s a og au) —ae> ay | na poo az | lid a Powe a Gervicr y Bi) YOO a wera @ uw 9 | Gog | GN Jo ayy} 98+92 | ax00i0| cae | os o pee D1 SupM, Ta absde ae] a | soma |g a L al iv RT THON 7 or soe xo's | “or _ POA | BE [eso wa | oo 4 ol ats ai | sonsea | AL 2100157 OUT axoi5 ane axoaip | anocin PRM POUND HPA AN XO wOHTNPONG aged Huipram adeq woRINPONA TUE SL BORTTETD Supieya aed wononporg (F--81'p 298) S189 aqny xog pue ‘odig ‘areld Aq paylend suonisod BurpjaM uononpord—uonedy end 42PIEM 40 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Welder and Wel Thickness and Diameter Qualified (Dimensions in Inches) (see 4.18.2.1) Table 4.10 1g Operator Qualification—Number and Type of Specimens and Range of (1) Test on Pate Number of Specimens! Qualified Dimensions Nominal Plate, Pipe ‘or Tue Thickness Production Groove or Plug Welds Qualified, in Nominal Thickness Typeot Test Weld | of Test [Macro Applicable Figures) Plate (T) in| etch | Min Max Groove (Fig. 4300r431] 38 = us| 34 max’ Groove (Fig. 421.4 pete 3 : foo 3i8 | ca | or over 2]— us [untimites Plug Fig. 437) 38 2 18 __[Unlimitea| Production Fillet Welds (Tjoiat and Skewed) Specimens! Qualified Dimensions Nominal Nominal Plate Dinedral Angles Test Pate ‘Thickness Qualified, in Qualified? ‘Type of Test Weld | Thickness, (Applicable Figures) Tin, Min Max Min ‘Max Grove Fig 4300r430] 38 [0 18 | Unlimited | 30° [Unlimited Groove Fig. 430 0r430] B= TI = 18 Unlimited [30° [Untimited Groove (ig 421,422.04 = 21 Si v8 Untinited | 30° | Untinitea Fille Opion 1 Fig 435 12 Sa v8 | Untimiea [oo [135° Fillet Onion 2g. 432)| 38 = 18 Unlimited | oo | 135° Fillet Option 3 Fig. 4.20)] 1g -|- us ‘Unlimited | 30° | Unlimited {ny cia, piel (2) Tests on Pipe or Tubing’ Specimens! Nominal Pate Pipe ‘or Tube Wal SG, 6G and 6GR | Nominal Pipe or Tube Thickness? Produeton CHP Groove But Joints Positions Only | SizeQuahified.in. | Qualified, ‘Nominal Test, Type of icknes, Face | Root | Side Test Weld in P| Bend |Bend?|Bend?| min | Max | Min | Max Grove Unlimited 2[2[-| + [mw | Groove 38 2 [2 | — [voce | untimies | ie [3m Groove 2a = [= [= [oes [untinites | 376 [atin (continued) 141 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 4.10 (Continued) (2) Test on Pipe or Tubing’ (cont'd) Qualified Dimensions: ‘Nominal Wall or Production T,Y-,orK-Comection | Number of | Nonsival Pipe or Tube | Pate Thickness? | Diheal Angles CP Groove Wes Specimens' | Size Qualified, in. | Qualified in Qualified? ‘Nominal Nominal | Test typeat [sizeof Text] Thickness, Side] Macro- est Weld | Pipe. | in. | Bend? | etch | Min | ax | ain | max | tin | Max PireGroove | econ.| 202 | 4 | — | 4 [Umimiea ane [Untinnea] 30° [Untinitea Uaimited | Unlimited 30° | Untied BoxGroove | Untinita | 212 | 4 | 4 316 | Uniniea “ atin (Box only) | Box only) \ Produetion TY, oF K-Connecton| Fillet Welds "Number of Specimens! alii Dimensions ‘Nominal Pipe or ] Nominal Wal or [Nominal | Nominal [Tube Size Qualified) Plate Thickness. | Dibedral Angles Sizeof | Test | Fillet in, Qualified Qualified” Type of Test Test Pipe, [Thickness] Weld | Macro-| Root | Face Weld D in. Break | etch | Bend* | Bend? | Min Max Min Max | Min | Max 5G position 7 ae > [wows lmimneal © Jatin] so. [aims Geen Tainted] 2 v8 2 | 2 | note) untnited| At, | Rtmiet| 30° [atid Option — Fieri | — | eur for {oa | — | = | 24 fuotimitea] v8 funimitea} 60° | ustinited 436F Option 2 Fieri | — | 38 | — | — | 2 | — | 2 fuotimitea) 18 funtimitea} 60° | uotinited 432 Option — Fier (Fig. [Uatiniea) 2s f — | 1 | — | — ] o vs Juonimitea]_ 30° | ustinited 420) 3) Tests on Electrosiag and Electrogas Welding Production Plate Groove Welds ‘Number of Specimens! | Nominal Plate Thickness Qualified in. Nominal Plate Thickness Side Bend? o a ‘Type of Test Weld ‘Tested, (ee Fig. 4.13) S112 2 18 T Groove (Fig. 4.35) 112 2 vs Unlimited Nowe: [All weld shall be visually inspected (sce 430.1). One test pip, pate or tubing sal be equted fr each position tested, unless otherwise noted. 2 Radiographic examination ofthe tt pao, pipe oF tubing ay be made incu ofthe ed ests (2 4.1.11) 5. Als qualifies for welding any filet of PIP wed sie on any thickness of plat, pipe or ebing, 14 The minimum pipe sie qualified shall be 12 the est damotr or tin, whichever i greter 5. See Table 48 for appropmate groove details. 6. Two plates required, cach subject tothe fst pocimen rumen described, One plate sal he welded in the 3 position an the other in the positon 7. For ileal angles <8 366426. 142 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Table 4.10 (Continued) Thickness and Diameter Qualified (Dimensions in Millimeters) (see 4.18.2.1) (1) Test on Plate Number of Specimens! ‘Qualified Dimensions: Nominal Plat, Pipe or Tube Thickness Production Groove or Plug Welds Quaid, om Nominal | Face | Root | Side ‘Thickness of | Bend] Bend? | Bend? ‘Type of Test Weld | Test Plate, T, | (Fig. | (Fig. | (Fig. |Macro-| Applicable Figues) | mm "| 412)| 4.12) | 413) | eten | in| Max Groove Fig. 4300r430) 10 t[+ f-[- 3 | 20mae Groove ig. 421,422,0F] yy op 2 : wereas | — | — = 3 | arma Groove F442. 55 ep ‘| on 25 0r | . 3 Patines Plug ig 437) » [-|-l-l2 3__ [Unlimea Production Filet Welds (Tjoint and Skewed) | Number of Specimens! | Qualified Dimensions Nominal Test Nominal Plate Thickness | Dibedral Angles Plate | Flt ‘Qualified, mm Qualified” ‘ype of Test Weld | thickness, | Weld (Applicable Figures) mm Break Min Max =| Min | Max Grove Fig a0oraanf 10 | —|—|—]1]2 3 Unlimited] 30° | Unlimied Groove Fig 4300ra 30] 9i0 [| 20 |—[—]| 2 |—|—| 4 | noes [unica] 5 [Untied (continued) 143 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 4.10 (Continued) (©) Test on Pipe or Tubing’ (cont'd) Qualified Dimensions ‘Nominal Wall or Prodvetion T-,¥-,orK-Conneetion | Number of | Nominal Pipe or Tube | Plate Thickness? | _Dihedral Angles CIP Groove Welds Specimens' | Size Qualified,mm | — Qualified, mm Qualified” ‘Nominal Nominal | Tes Typeof [Size of Test} Thickness, | Side | Macro TestWeld | Pipe.mm | mm | Bend? | atch | Min | Max | Min | Max | Min | Max PipeGroove [2is00D.| 212 | 4 | — | 100 [Unlimited] 5 [untimted] 30° [Unlimited United | Unlimited 30° | Unlimited Box Groove | untimied | 212 | 4 | 4 5 |Untimitea (Box only) | ox only) Prodvetion TY oF K-Connecton Fillet Welds "Number of Specimens! Qualified Dimensions Nominal Pipe or ] Nominal Wall or Nominal | Nominal [Tube Size Qualified) Plate Thickness. | Dibedral Angles Sizeof | Test | Fille m= Qualitid. eam | Quaid” ‘Type of Test| Test Pipe, [Thickness] Weld | Macro-| Root | Face ‘Weld | Do | mm | Break| etch | Bend? | Bend? | Min | Max | Min | Max | Min |] Max spose [ovmeal 23 | | cmneal > [Unlimited 5. Tena Geeiton|atimiea] 23 2 | 2 [notes] vatinited] 3) times] 30° |otinited Open I ries. | — | 21 | 1 | 1 | — | — | oom |untimitea} 3 |timites) 60° | untied 4367 Opdion2 FileFig. | — wo | — | — | 2 | — |} e00 |untimites} 3 funtimited} 60° | untied 433° Opsion 3— FilevFig. JUnimied] 23 | — | 1 | — | — |p |untimites} 3 |untimited} 30° |ntimied 420) (G) Tests on Elecrosiag and Eletrogas Welding Production Plate Groove Welds ‘Number of Specimens! [Nominal Pate Thickness Qualified, mam ‘Nominal Plate Thickness Side Bend? Min Max ‘Type of Tes Weld ‘Tested, T; mm (cee Fig. 4.13) =38 2 3 T Groove (Fig. 435) Pe s9) 8 2 3 Untimid ows 3 5 “All welds shal be visually inspected (se 430.1). Ons tet pips, plat or ting shall be equte fr each potion ete, uns otherwise nota Radivgraphic examination of the test plate, pie o tubing may be made in ew ofthe bend tests (68 4.19.11, Also quaifis for welding any filet or PIP weld size on any thickness of pate, pipe ot bing 44. The minimm pipe size quai shall be 17 the tet damcer or 100 mm, whichever spent See Tale 4.8 for appropriate groove deals. 6. Two plats required, each sujoc to tots specimen requirments desided, One plate sal be welded in the 3F position and dhe ther inthe 4 positon, For diteral angles < 30" see 4261 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Table 4.11 Requiring Requalification (see 4,22) 1g Personnel Performance Essential Variable Changes ‘Welding Personnel Welding Essential Variable Changes to WPQR Requiring Requalification Welders | Operators®* | Tack Welders () Toa process not qualified (GMAW-S is considered a separate process) x x x (©) Toan SMAW electrode with an F-number (ee Table 412) higher than the a eS WPOR electtode F-number @) Toan electrode and shielding medium combination not approved by an AWS a 5 a AS document ©) Toa position not qualified x x (5) Toa diameter or thickness not qualified x 3 (©) Toa vertical welding progression not qualified (uphill or downhill) x (7) The omission of backing (if used inthe WPQR test) x 3 (8) To moliple electrodes (i single electrode was used in the WPOR test) but . General Notes An + WPOR = Welding Performance Qualification Record ‘See Tble 49 for postions guaified by welder WPOR ‘See Table 410 for anges of diameters ot hicknesss qualified Notes: 1. Not for SW oF EGW, "indicates applicability fr dhe wolding forthe welding personnel; shaded ate indicats nonsppicbiity. 2, Welders sualified for OMAW, FCAW ot GTAW shall be considered as qualified welding operators inthe same proes(e), subject othe welder sential variable imitations and provided the welders receive taining and demonstrate thet abit to make satislactry production wes 3. A groove weld qualifies slot weld forthe WPOR poston and the thickness ranges as sown in Table 4.10. Table 4.12 Electrode Classification Groups (see Table 4.11) Group Designation AWS Electrode Classification Fe EXXIS, EXX16, EXX18, EXX48, EXXIS-X, EXX16-X, EXXI8-X BB EXX10, EXXI, EXX10-X, EXXIL-X, rR EXX12, EXXI3, EXXI, EXXI3X Fl EXX20, EXX24, EXX27, EXX28, EXX20-X, EXN27-X ‘General Note:The eters "70" use in the clasfcation designation in this table stand forthe various strength levels (6 (415), 7 (485), 80 (530). 90 {620}, 100 (690,110 (760), and 120 (830) of eleodes 145 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Tabulation of Positions of Groove Walds| ae Dee aes en ar = : we cars Overhas c ort080" ee, vet g ue ea [AXIS LIMITS FOR C PLANE, ‘AXIS LIMITS FORARB gu G=— Le 0 HORIZONTAL PLANE General Notes: +The horizontal reference plane shall always be taken tole below the weld under consideration, {The incSnalion of axis shallbe measured rom the horizontal reference plan toward the vertical eference plane. + The angle of rotation ofthe face shall be determined by a ine perpendicular tothe theocetical face of the weld which passes through the avs ofthe weld. The reference poston (0°) of rotaion ofthe face Invariably pons nthe dection opposite to that in whieh the as angle increases. When looking at poit , the angle of rotation ofthe face of the weld shal be measured ina clockwise direction from the reference positon (0") Figure 4.1—Positions of Groove Welds (see 4.2.4) 146 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Tabulation orPostions ofFiietweds Position ____DiagramReference __—_—inciationof Ais __—=—=éRotalion of Face Fa”™~—“CASC“‘CSC*#PWONYS™CO*“‘C#C#O#NSOPWOZNNSCOC™*# Horizontal 8 ows 20" 285° Ovemnead c oto 80" 22810 380" Vera e oto 90" ere AXIS LIMITS FOR C ‘AXIS LIMITS. FORARB o> {or HORIZONTAL PLANE Figure 4.2—Positions of Fillet Welds (see 4.2.4) 147 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 PLATES HORIZONTAL PLATES VERTICAL; ‘AXIS OF WELD HORIZONTAL (A) FLAT WELDING TEST POSITION 16 (8) HORIZONTAL WELDING TEST POSITION 2G PLATES VERTICAL; AXIS OF WELD PLATES HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (C) VERTICAL WELDING TEST POSITION 36 (0) OVERHEAD WELDING TEST POSITION 4G re 4.3Positions of Test Plates for Groove Welds (see 4.2.4) 148 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION 15° PIPE HORIZONTAL AND ROTATED. ‘yg¢ WELD FLAT (215%), DEPOSIT — FILLER METAL AT OR NEAR THE TOP. (A) FLAT WELDING TEST POSITION 1G ROTATED PIPE OR TUBE VERTICAL AND NOT ROTATED DURING WELDING. WELD HORIZONTAL (215°) (8) HORIZONTAL WELDING TEST POSITION 2G LL Fene ie 18° PIPE OR TUBE HORIZONTAL FIXED (+15") AND NOT ROTATED DURING WELDING. WELD FLAT, VERTICAL, OVERHEAD. VY CO , ous a Va (€) MULTIPLE WELDING TEST POSITION 6GR WITH (©) MULTIPLE WELDING TEST POSITION 66 [RESTRICTION RING (T-,-, OR K-CONNECTIONS) Ss PIPE INCLINATION FIXED (45° 25°) AND NOT ROTATED DURING WELDING. Figure 4.4—Positions of Test ipe or Tubing for Groove Welds (see 4.2.4) 149 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AXIS OF WELD THROAT OF WELD HORIZONTAL VERTICAL (A) FLAT WELDING TEST POSITION 1F [AXIS OF WELD VERTICAL See I (©) VERTICAL WELDING TEST POSITION 3F ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 AXIS OF WELD HORIZONTAL ~ Note: One plate must be horizontal (8) HORIZONTAL WELDING TEST POSITION 2 AXIS OF WELD HORIZONTAL Note: One plate must be horizontal. (0) OVERHEAD WELDING TEST POSITION 4F Figure 4.5—Positions of Test Plate for Fillet Welds (see 4.2.4) 150 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Ct 8 p BY (A) FLAT WELDING (8) HORIZONTAL WELDING (C) HORIZONTAL WELDING ‘TEST POSITION 1F ‘TEST POSITION 2F ‘TEST POSITION 2F (ROTATED) (FIXED) (ROTATED) Ca (0) OVERHEAD WELDING (€) MULTIPLE WELDING TEST POSITION 4 TEST POSITION 6F (FIXED) (FIXED) Figure 4.6—Positions of Test Pipes or Tubing for Fillet Welds (see 4.2.4) ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION CVN TEST SPECIMENS, WHEN REQUIRED (TYPICAL) ‘TOP OF PIPE FOR 5G, 6 AND GR POSITIONS: TENSION AND CVNTEST SPECIMENS ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 TOP OF PIPE FOR 5G, 6G AND 6GR POSITIONS FACE BEND BEND SPECIMENS DETAIL A—2 in. OR 3 in. IN DIAMETER [50 mm OR 75 mm IN DIAMETER] ‘TOP OF PIPE FOR 56, 6G AND 6G POSITIONS SIDE 90" BEND Gyn Test ‘SPECIMENS, WHEN REQUIRED CTYPICAL, SIDE BEND SIDE BEND [TENSION DETAIL B—6 in. OR Bin. IN DIAMETER, [150 mm OR 200 mm IN DIAMETER) c TENSION "yY SIDE BEND O 10" CVN TEST SPECIMENS, WHEN REQUIRED (TYPICAL) so" HORIZONTAL REFERENCE LINE FORTHE 5G OR 6G POSITIONS DETAIL. C—_CVN TEST SPECIMEN LOCATION FOR JOB SIZE PIPE, IF REQUIRED General Note: Duplicate tes pipes or tubes or larger ob size pipe may be required when CVN testing is specied on contract documents or specieations Figure 4.7—Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Pipe (see 4.8) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION ‘TOP OF TUBING 5G, 6G, AND 6GR POSITIONS TENSION: FACE OR SIDE BEND ROOT OR SIDE BEND FACE OR SIDE BEND. ROOT OR SIDE BEND- ' TENSION Figure 4.8—Location of Test Specimens for Welded Box Tubing (see 4.8) ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION .. + DIRECTION OF ROLLING (OPTIONAL; > DISCARD THIS PIECE WELD METAL TENSION SPECIMEN t General Notes: ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 24m [600 mm) EXTENSIONS NEED NOT BE USED IF THE JOINT 1S OF SUFFICIENT LENGTH TO PROVIDE 19 in, (480 mm OF SOUND WELD EXCLUSIVE OF RETESTS. +The groove configuration shown i fo usrtion only. The groove shaped tested shall conform othe production groove shape that is being quai. + When CVN test specimens are required, see Annex Ill for requirements {All cimensions are minimum Figure 4.9—Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plates— ESW and EGW—WPS Qualification (see 4.8) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION cor or -¢— biREcTION oF ROLLING (OPTIONAL) t “DIRECTION OF ROLLING (OPTIONAL) tate SFr 3 DISCARD THIS PIECE Bin. | 3 Lonaruoinal race BeNp specMEN & =| 1180 rm] a g ‘SIDE BEND SPEOMEN in. (50 mn} 2 in. (60 mmi| — REDUGED SECTION TENGION SBECIMEN —| | REDUCED SECTION TENSION SPECIMEN | 2in. (50 mm] Tie TE 2 See bck sreouEN Zin 60 mm) IS 11m) § LoNcTUONAL Hoot peo srecmen § ae (320 mm ain jee ee ec ‘CVN TEST SPECIMENS oh, Seon Sreein = _ Wieeguineny som nes fiom 8 cw tis seccniens SPECIMENS WHEN. 180m] =ei— REQUIRED ene ay rEguiaED) eet ies srtomens Jk = = FS=s =I neaune> * [pe - @ | | reouceo secrion Tension srecwen |? .(50 mn) 1cafnm] § Loncruomit race Ben sreciwen 8 feta e “ra 5 in 60mm atte DISCARD THIS PIECE a hi (1) LONGITUDINAL BEND SPECIMENS (2) TRANSVERSE BEND SPECIMENS General Notes: +The groove configuration shown i for ilustration only. The groove shaped tested shall conform to the production groove shape that is being quaitied + When CVN tests are required, the specimens shall be removed fom their locations, as shown in see Annex Il, Figure I + All dimensions are minimum Figure 4.10—Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate Over 3/8 in, [10 mm] Thick—WPS Qualification (see 4.8) ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 or / p-—C or ease eee aN “= DIRECTION OF ROLLING (OPTIONAL) 7 fat — LONGITUDINAL Face Reno sPcoMEN wpe mt Bi om _t a 2h. dni — HELE SN Eto SPEDE —| | eoucen scores Tension sreowen [in 0 mi ot fe iba. ‘SDE BEND SPEOMEN 20 mn 23 in| & LONGITUDINAL FOOT BEND SPECIMEN == = tore) § or Sse ! 3 1 Ee inn Sn, eon en, +E==4 wrt sranene sity Meee pea. ‘= ie aEauIReD ones ohn ee SPECIMENS aaa com fst seecliens eae WHEN [150 mm (IF REQUIRED) ee REQUIRED ene eon Soe eeto spzomen 260mm) Sane {== == = ome OB =F wasucco vert hemnsraan [2m p0 11S nim] 3 LONGTUDINAL Face Benib SPECIMEN 3 ee 2mm inam ab een ee Daca ee seae a fe that. B| rin ti00 mm —fe—7 it100 om) | (en) § tonaruond oor pelo srecmen f==deeb==4 OBCARD Tig PIECE bri tt80 mm —=— 7 10 mn) (1) LONGITUDINAL BEND SPECIMENS. (2) TRANSVERSE BEND SPECIMENS General Notes: +The groove configuration shown i for ilustration only. The groove shaped tested shall conform to the production groove shape that is being quaitied + When CVN tests are required, the specimens shall be removed fom their locations, as shown in see Annex Il, Figure I + All dimensions are minimum Figure 4.11—Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test Plate 3/8 in. [10 mm] Thick and Under—WPS Qualification (see 4.8) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION 318 in my pe I in 10 in {10 mi 1 LI Re ms 0 sen] J 1 3 n 2) a py | i 0 ees fennel Rees of Enoo BEND BEND 28 in, [10 mm) TEST PLATE TEST PLATE ovER 38 in, [10 mm] THICK (1) LONGITUDINAL BEND SPECIMEN 6 In, [150 mm MIN RADIUS 1/8 in. [9 mm] MAX P——" ‘(ee Note 1), ——} ia i fom wom 27 ae eee \ ava 3/8 in, —— #3 Be Tavera 10 86 newoven aS an 2h FoR CLEANUP 110 mn} FACE BEND SPECIMEN 6 In. [150 men] MIN. RADIUS 1/8 in. Li ei “7 Lf ae Ee in Sa a+ 110 mmi Se : (PLATE) (PIPE) [10 mm} ROOT BEND SPECIMEN (2) TRANSVERSE BEND SPECIMEN Dimensions ‘Test Specimen Width, W In, (rm) 1-17 (60) 1 [285] <4 in. [100 mm} in dlameter ‘Test pipe or tubo 1-172 (40) > 4 In. [100 mm} in diametor General Notes: + T= plate oF pipe thickness. + When the thickness of the test pate I ess than 3/8 in. (10 mm), the nominal thickness shal be used for face and root bends. Notes: 4. Alonger specimen length may be necessary when using a wraparound type bending fixture or when testing steel witha ye strength (0f 80 (620 MPa] or more 2. These edges may be thermal-cut and may or may not be machined. 83, The weld reinforcement and backing, if any, shall be removed fush wit the surface of the specimen (see §.24.8.1 and 6.24.4.2). a recessed backing is used, this surface may be machined to a depth not exceeding the depth ofthe recess fo remove the backing in Such a case, the bickness ofthe finished specimen shall be that specified above. Cut surfaces shall be smooth and parallel Figure 4.12—Face and Root Bend Specimens (see 4.8.3.1) ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 6 In, 1150 mm 18 in (Note 1) A_! ft +e ae | 7 mal Tan NOT LESS THAN 1/8 in. [3 mm] TO BE MACHINED FROM EDGES 6GR SPECIMEN — 1 1 / ial it L WHEN 1 EXCEEDS 1-12 in. 98 ma, MACHINE THE wiNiauM AMOUNT CUT ALONG THIS LINE EDGE hin NEEDED TO OBTAIN PLANE PARALLEL BE TERNAL Cur PAGES (OPTIONAL) t m Ta = > 1412 (Note 2) > 38 Note 2) Notes: 1 Alonger specimen length may be necessary when using a wraparcund-type bending fixture or when esting stool witha yield strength (990 ks! (620 MPa] or more 2, For plates over 1-4/2 In [38 mm] tick, the specimen shal be cut into approximately equal srps with T between 34 in, [20 men and 4472. (38 mm and tot each strip. 3. 1 plale oF pipe thickness. Figure 4.13—Side Bend Specimens (see 4.8.3.1) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION MACHINE WELD REINFORCEMENT FLUSH WITH BASE METAL THESE EDGES MAY BE THERMAL CUT A 116 In : £00 oF woesr mssscnon | FASE OF Wako PREFERABLY BY MILLING _—— 6GA SPECIMEN (7 MACHINE THE MINIMUM AMOUNT NEEDED TO OBTAIN PLANE PARALLEL FACES OVER THE REDUCED SECTION Dimensions In inches mm} “Test Pate Nominal Thicke Test Pipe ‘inf150 mm] & in. 200 mm 1. (25 mm) 2in. (60mm) & Diameter or Tpstin — ———+| TAPPED HOLE To SUIT TESTING MACHINE PLUNGER MEMBER of ssncaunes fo} ahh bas] al ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ¥ V2 in. svourven Haneneo ) ! | -{12:7'mm AND GREASE 4.19 128.8 mm) at 16.4 mm] 5-1/4 in. a nee Lan snl a7 Lott oP] aie {50.8 mm} [19 mm] BE SUBSTITUTED: rabies om peer eee eee) eet ‘General Not: Plunger and interior de surtaoes shall be machine-inished. Figure 4.15—Guided Bend Test Jig (see 4.8.3) 160 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION X« [2 mj ROLLER ANY DIAMETER WeLo CW 2] Y BaA2 ZZ ‘Specified or Actual a ® a = Base Mell Ved Strength ksi(MPe]__in in mm mm 501845] 8 under Hz a 34 190 ‘over 50 [345] to 80 [620] 2 1 508 254 90620) over 242 18 635 318 Figure 4.16—Alternative Wraparound Guided Bend Test Jig (see 4.8.3) ro B= AR MIN = 9/4 in, 18 rami IL. Specied or Acta A 8 c A 3 c Bee Meta Yee Seen ksi [MPa] in fn in om i fat 20045] & under 1 ae 238 364 180 03 cove 50 [245] 90 (620 2 1 2108 sos 264 730 80 (6201 & over 22 1448 338 es ae 857 Figure 4.17—Alternative Roller-Equipped Guided Bend Test Jig for Bottom Ejection of Test Specimen (see 4.8.3) 161 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Dimensions ininehes ‘Standard Specimen ‘Small Size Specimens Proportional to Standard Nominal Diameter (0.500 in. Round (0.360 in. Round (0.260 in. Round (Gage lenath 2.000 0.005 1400 = 0.005 1.000 = 0.005 D—Diameter (Note 1) 0.800 #0.010 0.350007 0.250 + 0,008 /—Ragius of filet, min 38 a a6 ‘A—Lenath of reduced section ea Aaa arr (ote 2), min Dimensions (metic version par ASTM E 6M) Standard Specimen ‘Small Siza Specimens Proportional to Standard Nominal Diameter 125 mm Round ‘@mm Round | ‘mm Round (6 — Gage length 625204 “450204 300204 D—Diameter (Note 1), mm 125202 90204 e004 Radius of let, mm, min 10 8 6 ‘A—Lenath of reduced secton, mm - Ei A (ote2), min ‘General Notes +The reduced section may have a gradual taper rom the ends toward te center, with the ends not more than one percent larger in ameter than the center (zontrling dimension), + I'desired, the length ofthe reduced secton may be increases to accommodate an extensometer of any convenient gage length. Re ‘erence marks forthe measurement of elongation shoul be spaced at the Indicated gage lenath + The gage length and filets shal be as shown, but te ends may be of any form to ithe holders of the testing machine in such a way that the foad shall be aia. the ends are to be held in wedge grips, its desirable, i posible, to make the length of the grip section ‘Feat enough to allow the specimen to extend into the rps adstance equal to two-thirds or more of the length ofthe grips. Figure 4.18—A\ |-Weld-Metal Tension Specimen (see 4.8.3.6) 162 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION DISCARD xX é - 4in,[100 A ? 4in.{100% DISCARD Lo ys A" a 12.n. {900 mm] MIN, 6 in, (180 mm MIN bin, [150 me ane Wp » MINIMUM MULTIPLE: Wy = MAXIMUM SINGLE PASS FILLET WELD PASS FILLET WELD USED IN USED IN ‘CONSTRUCTION ‘CONSTRUCTION MACROETCH TEST ‘SPECIMEN INCHES MILLIMETERS Wels weld Sze Thin Temin Size Thin Temi a6 2 a6 5 2 5 ua a uA 6 20 6 516 1 5116 8 28 8 38 1 38 10 28 10 2 1 12 2 2 2 58 1 58 16 2% 16 aia 1 sia 20 28 20 > 1 4 >20 2 25 General Note: Where the maxmum plate thickness used in production f less than the value shown above, the ‘maximum thickness of te production pieces may be substtted for T1 and T2. Figure 4.19 Fillet Weld Soundness Tests for WPS Qualification (see 4.11.2) 163 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 MAXIMUM a vay aoe fi pee pe ocr eee MACROETCH ONE Yn ET A-PraTo Pie ASSEMNLY ocrocTas ON a) eames pound cone SSE or ston rons Bete C ) SWZ snoraren 2 2F nore aa ecm oe eer eee eore: Gece eat fon weecercH pieaee weer Seween Ba Le 7 t atmos gee | “*Srecmen arn DETAIL B—PIPETO PLATE ASSEMBLY General Notes: + See Table 4.1 for poston requirements + Pipe shal be of sient thixnese to prevent mettthraugh, + Aldimensions are minimums. Figure 4.20—Pipe Fillet Weld Soundness Test—WPS Qualification (see 4.11.2) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION “in in, 5 mon) SIDEBEND [25 Simp SPECIMEN. SIDE BEND ‘SPECIMEN DIRECTION OF ROLLING OPTIONAL, General Note: When RT is used, no tack welds shall be i test area Note: 4. The backing thickness shal be 1/4 in [6 mm] min to 38. [10 mm] max; backing width shall be 3 in. [75 mm min when not removed for RT, otherwise tin. [25 mm] min. Figure 4.21—Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness— Welder Qualification (see 4.23.1) SIDE BEND SPECIMEN. / DIRECTION OF ROLLING OPTIONAL General Notes: + When RT's used, no tack welds shall be in test area + The jlnt configuration of qualified WPS may be used In leu ofthe groove configuration shown here. Note: 4. The backing thickness shall be 8/8 in. [10 mm] min to 12 in. (12 mm max; backing width shal be 3 in. (75 mm] min when notre moved for RT, otherwise 1-12 in 40 mm] min, Figure 4.22—Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness—Welding Operator Qualification (see 165 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION << DIRECTION OF ROLLING (OPTIONAL) —> [ ns nm —o—an 75mm} un—| 4! 318 in. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 401m, (250 mm) MIN Way Figure 4.23—Location of Test Specimen on Welded Test Plate 1 in, [25 mm] Thick— Consumables Verification for 166 let Weld WPS Qualification (see 4.11.3) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION @= PRODUCTION GROOVE ANGLE (60° RECOMMENDED) C7 V7 t SE} | VA | be tom comm Evin tom ol fein temm Evin tom) Max wax wax (A) FOR WELDER QUALIFICATION (B) WPS QUALIFICATION General Note: T= qualification pipe or box tube wal thickness, Figure 4.24—Tubular Butt Joint —Welder or WPS Qualification — without Backing (see 4.12.1, 4.12.2, and 4.26) = PRODUCTION GROOVE ANGLE (60° RECOMMENDED) V7 YZ ry WG a NW | T —-] E proouction sont —F proouction sot ROOT OPENING ROOT OPENING (A) WELDER QUALIFICATION (8) WPS QUALIFICATION General Note: T= qualication pipe or box tube wal thickness, Figure 4,25—Tubular Butt Joint—Welder or WPS Qualification — with Backing (see 4.12.1, 4.12.3, and 4,26) 167 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ot e In 0 tin cg us na = Bin, 150 mn} + tin, BACKUP WELD AREA [25 mm] MIN (GROOVE WIDTH ISLESS THAN DIMENSION W 15° OR MINIMUM ANGLE fasusae) / TO SE QUALINED BACKUP WELD ARE/ DETAIL A ‘SOUND THEORETICAL WELD Figure 4.26—Acute Angle Heel Test (Restraints not Shown) (see 4.12.4.2) 168 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION 6in. [150 mm MIN. RESTRICTION RING 6m [150 me MN ( \ SAME 0.0. AS TEST PIPE MINIMUM NOMINAL. TEST PIPE O.D. = 6 in. [150 mm OF SAME SE AS TEST NO LIMIT FOR BOX TUBES _ boRTuane bin, (0-1/16 in. (0-2 mm} [150 mmj Min ie ein SY [12 ene] MIN, KT He eon a Figure 4.27—Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Connections without Backing on Pipe or Box Tubing— Welder and WPS Qualification (see 4.12.4.1 and 4,26) MACROETCH TEST SPECIMEN LOCATION , aril Les oi. (150 mm) San MACROETCH vay ‘TEST SPECIMEN (10mm MIN ay es “2 in (12. MAX einen a oem NO s 8. (9 mm 6 in. [150 rm) MIN igure 4.28—Corner Macroetch Test Joint for T-, Y-, and K-Conneetions without Backing on Box Tubing for CJP Groove Welds— Welder and WPS Qualification (see 4.12.4.1 and 4.26) 169 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Sin(t25!mm Mint) DIRECTION (OF ROLLING OPTIONAL K (ote 1) SIDE BEND SPECIMEN tin [25 mmi SIDE BEND SPECIMEN Notes: {+ When RT is used no tack weld sal ben test area 2. Thabacing tuckwes chal be 4. [ nn] mint 3 in, [10 mm] max; backing width shal be 3 in. (78 mm nin when nol removed tori; omerwee tin. (25 mm min Figure 4.29—Optional Test Plate for Unlimited Thickness— Horizontal Position—Welder Qualification (see 4.23.1) 170 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION i. [25 mm} ROOT BEND (oto 1) ‘SPECIMEN, = Tr FACE BEND [25 mm ‘SPECIMEN DIRECTION OF ROLLING OPTIONAL (sn na od 1. When RT i used, no tack welds shall bein test area, 2. Tho backing thickness shal be 1/4 in. (6 mm] min Lo 38 in. (10 mm] max; backing width shal be 3 in. [78 mm] min when not removed for RT, otherwise tin. [25 mm} min. Figure 4.30—Test Plate for Limited Thickness—Alll Positions — Welder Qualification (see 4.23.1) m ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Tin [180 mmj MIN DIRECTION OF ROLLING oe OPTIONAL [150 men} MIN N (Note 1) ROOT BEND SPECIMEN in, [25 mm ain U fh FACE BEND specimen) 9mm Notes: 4. When RT is used, no tack welds shall bein test area, 2. Thebacking thickness shal be 1/4 in. (6 mm] min to 38 in. (10 mm] max; backing width shal be in. [78 mm] min When not removed for RT, otherwise tin. [25 mm) min Figure 4.31—Optional Test Plate for Limited Thickness—Horizontal Position— Welder Qualification (see 4.23.1) m ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION DIRECTION OF ROLLING + oPTional) ————» a reienwonm ROOT BEND SPECIMEN Vin. [25 mm) b---= ——-—— eee +4----- ye ‘ - ba —— roar eso reach |_ ____Roor SMM 1 in 25 mm) | 1-172 40 mm THESE EDGES MAY BE THERMAL-CUT AND MAY OF MAY NOT BE MACHINED: f | f s-172n | 1-1/2 [40 mi 4 (40 man 16/16 in. f2¢ mm] f—_ sin, | 5 —_ in, —_.| RADIUS 1/8 in. (75 mm] MIN (75 mm MIN eee wad ‘THE PORTION BETWEEN FILLET WELDS. paeeionm MAY BE WELDED IN ANY POSITION. MAXIMUM SIZE SINGLE < [AT LEAST 9/8 x2 in, (10 x 80 mm] IF RT 1S USED, PASS FILLET WELD 8/8 in. (10 mm] ‘THEN USE AT LEAST 9/8 x 9 in [10 x 75 mm] BACKING. ‘THE BACKING SHALL BE IN INTIMATE CONTACT WITH THE BASE METAL ‘THE WELD REINFORCEMENT AND THE BACKING SHALL BE REMOVED FLUSH WITH THE BASE METAL (SEE 5.24.41), THERMAL CUTTING MAY BE USED FOR THE REMOVAL OF ‘THE MAJOR PART OF THE BACKING. PROVIDED AT LEAST 118 in. [3 mem] OF ITS THICKNESS IS LEFT TO BE REMOVED BY MACHINING OR GRINDING. in. [128 me] min (welder), L= 18 in. [880 mm] min (welding operator, Figure 4,32—Fillet Weld Root Bend Test Plate—Welder or Welding Operator Qualification—Option 2 (see 4.28 or 4.25) 173 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION FACE BEND, SIDE BEND- ROOT BEND PIPE WALL 3/8 in, [10 mm] ‘AND UNDER PIPE WALL OVER 8 in. [10 mm] ‘SPECIMENS FOR 1G AND 2G POSITIONS. ‘TOP OF PIPE FOR 5G, 6G, AND 6GR POSITIONS ROOT BEND SIDE BEND: SIDE BEND SIDE BEND- ROOT BEND FACE BEND soon PIPE WALL 2/8 in, [10 mm] "AND UNDER PIPE WALL OVER 3/8 in. (10 mm] ‘SPECIMENS FOR 5G, 6G, AND 6GR POSITIONS Figure 4.33—Location of Test Specimens on Welded Test n (see 4.19.1.2) Box Tubing—Welder Qualificati 14 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ROOT BEND ‘ALLWALL THICKNESSES. TOP OF TUBING FOR 5G, 6G, AND 6GR POSITIONS: FACE OR SIDE BEND ROOT OR SIDE BEND ‘ALLWALL THICKNESSES ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION Figure 4.34—Method of Rupturing Specimen—Tack Welder Qualification (see 4.31) [fT DIRECTION OF ROLLING ar -— win in. [180 mm] MIN (OPTIONAL) ———> ar | — wit —o} 6 in, [150 mm] MIN CD Notes: 1. Root opening "R" established by WPS. 2. T= maximum to be welded in construction but ned not exceed 1-172 i. [38 mm}. me a 53. Extensions need not be used if joint sof euient length to provide 17 in [430 mm] of sound wel, Figure 4.35—Butt Joint for Welding Operator Qualification—ESW and EGW (see 4.23.2) 175 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 = 3. (75 mm] MIN 6 in. (150 min] MIN FILLET WELD BREAK DISCARD SPECIMEN [rem a CUTLINE SR U7 stor ao nestaRt WELDING HEAR CENTER NX CUTLINE A {ETCH INTERIOR FACE)? Notes: in. [200 men min welder, 15 in. [360 mm] min (welding operator 2. Either end may be Used forthe required macrostcn specimen, The other end may be discarded Figure 4.36—Fillet Weld Break and Macroetch Test Plate— Welder or Welding Operator Qualifieation—Option 1 (see 4.28 or 4.25) 176 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 4, QUALIFICATION a4 in| In (20 mn} | 10 mm 3/4 in FT wen ; : ry eee t WachOEToN TEST Tsai oman Seaman 4 ' MAGROETCH 1 ‘SPECIMEN (ETCH INTERIOR. si4in, 1 FACE) (75mm) 1 1 1 1 1 wen | 1 1 ! curuine———] eee PLUG WELD TEST PLATE (MACROETCH BOTH INTERIOR FACES) Note: 2 in (50 mm] min (welder, 3 in (75 mm min (welding operator) 3 in. [75 mm] min (weiden, 5 in. (125 mm] min (welding operator, Figure 4,37—Plug Weld Macroetch Test Plate—Welding Operator or Welder Qualification (see 4.29) 7 ‘SECTION 4. QUALIFICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 arin lie [100 mm] (12mm — in, (100 men) —+} ‘ein. 2mm)—>} | Beart in. [100 mim} walk J Figure 4.38—Fillet Weld Break Specimen—Tack Welder Qualification (see 4.19.2) 178 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 5. Fabrication 5.1 Scope All applicable provisions of this section shall be ob- served in the fabrication and erection of welded assem- blies and structures produced by any process acceptable under this code (see 3.2 and 4.13). 5.2 Base Metal 52.1 Specified Base Metal. The contract documents shall designate the specification and classification of base metal to be used. When welding is involved in the structure, approved base metals, listed in Table 3.1 or ‘Annex M, should be used wherever possible. 5.2.2 Base Metal for Weld Tabs, Backing, and Spacers 52.2.1 Weld Tabs. Weld tabs used in welding shall conform to the following requirements: (1) When used in welding with an approved steel listed in Table 3.1 or Annex M, they may be any of the steels listed in Table 3.1 or Annex M. (2) When used in welding with a steel qualified in conformance with 4.7.3 they may be: (@) The stee! qualified, or (b) Any stee! listed in Table 3.1 or Annex M 5.2.2.2 Backing, Steel for backing shall conform to the requirements of 5.2.2.1 or ASTM A 109 T3 and TA, except that 100 ksi [690 MPs] minimum yield strength steel as backing shall be used only with 100 ksi [690 MPa] minimum yield strength steels. 5.2.2.3 Spacers. Spacers shal be of the same material as the base metal 5.3 Wel g Consumables and Electrode Requirements 53.1 General ion for Electrodes or Electrode- 1s. When requested by the Engineer, 179 the Contractor or fabricator shall furnish certification that the electrode or electrode-flux combination con- forms to the requirements of the classification 53.1.2 Suitability of Classification. The classifica- tion and size of electrode, are length, voltage, and amper- ‘age shall be suited to the thickness of the material, type of groove, welding positions, and other circumstances at- tending the work. Welding current shall be within the range recommended by the electrode manufacturer 53.1.3 Shielding Gas. A gas or gas mixture used for shielding shall be of a welding grade and have a dew point of ~40°F [-40°C] or lower. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor o fabricator shall furnish the gas manufacturer's certification that the gas or gas mix ture conforms to the dew point requirements. When mixed at the welding site, suitable meters shall be used for proportioning the gases. Percentage of gases shall conform to the requirements of the WPS. 53.1.4 Storage. Welding consumables that have been removed from the original package shall be pro- tected and stored so that the welding properties are not affected. 53.1.8 Condition. Electrodes shall be dry and in suitable condition for use. 53.2 SMAW Electrodes. Electrodes for SMAW shall ‘conform to the requirements of the latest edition of AWS AS.1, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Are Welding, ot to the requirements of AWS AS.5, Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Are Welding 53.2.1 Low-Hydrogen Electrode Storage Condi- tions, All electrodes having low hydrogen coverings con- forming to AWS AS.1 and AWS AS.S shall be purchased in hermetically sealed containers or shall be baked by the user in conformance with 5.3.2.4 prior to use. Immedi- ately after opening the hermetically sealed container, ‘electrodes shall be stored in ovens held at a temperature of at least 250°F [120°C]. Electrodes shall be rebaked no ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION ‘more than once. Electrodes that have been wet shall not be used. 53.2.2 Approved Atmospheric Time Periods. After hermetically sealed containers are opened or after elec- ‘odes are removed from baking or storage ovens, the electrode exposure to the atmosphere shall not exceed the values shown in column A, Table 5.1, for the specific electrode classification with optional supplemental desig nators, where applicable. Electrodes exposed to the atmo- sphere for periods less than those allowed by column A, ‘Table 5.1 may be returned to a holding oven maintained at 250°F (120°C) min; after a minimum hold period of four hours at 250°F min, the electrodes may be reissued. 53.2.3 Alternative Atmospheric Exposure Time Periods Established by Tests. The alternative exposure time values shown in column B in Table 5.1 may be used provided testing establishes the maximum allowable time, The testing shall be performed in conformance ‘with AWS AS.S, subsection 3.10, far each electrode clas- sification and each electrode manufacturer. Such tests shall establish that the maximum moisture content values of AWS A5.5 (Table 9) are not exceeded. Additionally, ETOXX or ETOXX-X (AWS AS.1 or A5.5) low-hydrogen electrode coverings shall be limited to a maximum mois- ture content not exceeding 0.4% by weight, These elec- ‘trodes shall not be used at relative humidity-temperature ‘combinations that exceed either the relative humidity or ‘moisture content in the air that prevailed during the test- ing program, For proper application of this subsection, see Annex ‘VIII for the temperature-moisture content chart and its examples. The chart shown in Annex VIII, or any stan- dard psychometric chart, shall be used in the determina- tion of temperature-relative humidity limits, 53.24 Baking Electrodes. Electrodes exposed to the atmosphere for periods greater than those allowed in ‘Table 5.1 shall be baked as follows: (1) All electrodes having low-hydrogen coverings. conforming to AWS AS.I shall be baked for at least two hours between 00°F and 800°F [260°C and 430°C], or Q) All electrodes having low-hydrogen coverings conforming to AWS AS.5 shall be baked for at least one hour at temperatures between 700°F and 800°F [370°C and 430°C], Al electrodes shall be placed in a suitable oven at a temperature not exceeding one half the final baking tem- perature for a minimum of one half hour prior to increas- ing the oven temperarure to the final baking temperature, Final baking time shall star after the oven reaches final baking temperature. 53.2.8 Electrode Restrictions for ASTM A 514 or A517 Steels. When used for welding ASTM A 514 or 180 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 A517 steels, electrodes of any classification lower than EI00XX-X, except for E7018M and ETOXXHAR, shall be baked at least one hour at temperatures between 700°F and 800°F [370°C and 430°C} before being used, Whether furnished in hermetically sealed containers or otherwise. 53.3 SAW Electrodes and Fluxes. SAW may be per- formed with one or more single electrodes, one or more parallel electrodes, or combinations of single and parallel ‘electrodes. The spacing between arcs shall be such that the slag cover over the weld metal produced by a leading are does not cool sufficiently to prevent the proper weld deposit of a following electrode. SAW with multiple clectrodes may be used for any groove or fillet weld pass. 53.3.1 Electrode-Flux Combination Require- ‘ments, The bare electrodes and flux used in combination for SAW of steels shall conform to the requirements in the latest edition of AWS A5.17, Specification for Car- bon Steel Electrodes and Fluxes for Submerged Are Welding, or to the requirements of the latest edition of AWS AS.23, Specification for Low Alloy Stee! Electrodes ‘and Fluxes for Submerged Are Welding. 53.3.2 Condition of Flux. Flux used for SAW shall be dry and free of contamination from dirt, mill scale, or ‘other foreign material. All flux shall be purchased in packages that ean be stored, under normal conditions, for at least six months without such storage affecting its welding characteristics or weld properties. Flux from ‘damaged packages shall be discarded or shall be dried at a minimum temperature of S00°F [260°C] for one hour before use. Flux shall be placed in the dispensing system immediately upon opening a package, or if used from an ‘opened package, the top one inch shall be discarded. Flux that has been wet shall not be used. 53.3.3 Flux Reclamation, SAW flux that has not been melted during the welding operation may be reused after recovery by vacuuming, catch pans, sweeping, or ‘ther means. The welding fabricator shall have a system for collecting unmelted flux, adding new flux, and weld- ing with the mixture ofthese two, such that the flux com= position and particle size distribution at the weld puddle are relatively constant. 533.4 Crushed Slag. Crushed slag may be used provided it has its own marking, using the crusher’s name and trade designation. In addition, each dry batch ‘or dry blend (lot) of flux, as defined in AWS AS.O1, Filler Metal Procurement Guidelines, shall be tested in ‘conformance with Schedule T of AWS A5.01 and classi- fied by the Contractor or erusher per AWS AS.17 or 45.23, as applicable ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 534 GMAW/FCAW Electrodes, The electrodes. and shielding for GMAW or FCAW for producing weld metal with minimum specified yield strengths of 60. ksi [415 MPa} or less, shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of AWS A5.I8, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes and Rods for Gas Shielded Are Welding, ‘or AWS A5.20, Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Flu Cored Are Welding, as applicable. 53.4.1 Low-Alloy Electrodes for GMAW. The elec- trodes and shielding for GMAW for producing weld metal with a minimum specified yield strength greater than 60 ksi [415 MPa] shall conform with the latest edi- tion of AWS A528, Specification for Low Alloy Steel Filler Metals for Gas Shielded Are Welding. 53.4.2 Low-Alloy Electrodes for FCAW. The elec- trodes and shielding gas for FCAW for producing weld metal with a minimum specified yield strength greater than 60 ksi [415 MPa] shall conform to the latest edition of AWS A5.29, Specification for Low Alloy Steel Elec- trodes for Flux Cored Are Welding. $38 GTAW 53.8.1 Tungsten Electrodes. Welding current shall be compatible with the diameter and type or classi- fication of electrode. Tungsten electrodes shall be in conformance with AWS AS.12, Specification for Tung sten and Tungsten Alloy Electrodes for Are Welding and Cuating. 53.8.2 Filler Metal. The filler metal shall conform to all the requirements of the latest edition of AWS AS.18 or AWS AS.28 and AWS A5.30, Specification for Consumable Inserts, as applicable. 5.4 ESW and EGW Processes SA.1 Process Limitations. The ESW and EGW pro- ‘cesses shall not be used for welding quenched and tem- pered steel nor for welding cyclically loaded structural ‘members subject to tensile stresses or reversal of stress. 54.2 Condition of Electrodes and Guide Tubes. Elec- trodes and consumable guide tubes shall be dry, clean, and in suitable condition for use. $4.3 Condition of Flux. Flux used for ESW shall be ry and free of contamination from dirt, mill scale, or other foreign material. All flux shall be purchased in packages that can be stored, under normal conditions, for at least six months without such storage affecting its welding characteristics or weld properties, Flux from packages damaged in transit or in handling shall be dis- carded or shall be dried at a minimum temperature of Isl ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION 250°F [120°C] for one hour before use. Flux that has been wet shall not be used. 5.4.4 Weld Starts and Stops. Welds shall be started in such a manner as to allow sufficient heat buildup for ‘complete fusion of the weld metal to the groove faces of the joint. Welds which have been stopped at any point in the weld joint for a sufficient amount of time for the slag ‘or weld pool to begin to solidify may be restarted and ‘completed, provided the completed weld is examined by UT fora minimum of 6 in, [150 mm] on either side of the restart and, unless prohibited by joint geometry, also con- firmed by RT. All such restart locations shal be recorded and reported to the Engineer. 54.5 Preheating. Because of the high-heat input char- acteristic of these processes, preheating is not normally required. However, no welding shall be performed when the temperature of the base metal at the point of welding is below 32°F [0°C]. 54.6 Repairs, Welds having discontinuities prohibited by Section 6, Part C shall be repaired as allowed by 5.26 utilizing a qualified welding process, or the entire weld shall be removed and replaced, 5.4.7 Weathering Steel Requirements. For ESW and EGW of exposed, bare, unpainted applications of ASTM A588 steel requiring weld metal with atmospheric cor rosion resistance and coloring characteristics similar to that of the base metal, the electrode-fhux combination shall be in conformance with 4.17.2, and the filler metal ‘chemical composition shall conform to Table 3.3, 5.5 WPS Variables ‘The welding variables shall be in conformance with @ written WPS (see Annex E, Form El, as an example). Each pass will have complete fusion with the adjacent base metal, and such that there will be no depressions or ‘undue undercutting at the toe ofthe weld. Excessive con- cavity of intial passes shall be avoided to prevent crack- ing in the roots of joints under restraint, All welders, ‘welding operators, and tack welders shall be informed in the proper use ofthe WPS, and the applicable WPS shall be followed during the performance of welding 5.6 Preheat and Interpass ‘Temperatures Base metal shal be preheated, i required, to tem- perature not less than the minimum value listed on the WPS (see 3.5 for prequalified WPS limitations and ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION Table 4.5 for qualified WPS essential variable limita- tions). For combinations of base metals, the minimum preheat shall be based on the highest minimum preheat ‘This preheat and all subsequent minimum interpass temperatures shall be maintained during the welding op- eration for a distance at least equal to the thickness of the thickest welded part (but not less than 3 in, [75 mm] in all directions from the point of welding. ‘Minimum interpass temperature tequitements shall be considered equal to the preheat requirements, unless oth- cerwise indicated on the WPS, ‘The preheat and interpass temperature shall be checked just prior to initiating the are for each pass, 5.7 Heat Input Control for Quenched and Tempered Steels ‘When quenched and tempered steels are welded, the heat input shall be restricted in conjunction with the ‘maximum preheat and interpass temperatures required. Such considerations shall include the additional heat {input produced in simultaneous welding on the two sides ‘of a common member. The preceding limitations shall be in conformance with the producer's recommendations. Oxygen gouging of quenched and tempered steel shall be prohibited. 5.8 Stress-Relief Heat Treatment ‘Where required by the contract drawings or specifica tions, welded assemblies shall be stress relieved by heat treating. Final machining after stress relieving shall be con- sidered when needed to maintain dimensional tolerances. 58.1 Requirements. The sress-relief treatment. shall conform tothe following requirements (1) The temperature of the furnace shall not exceed (600°F (315°C) atthe time the welded assembly is placed init. (2) Above 600°F, the rate of heating shall not be more than 400°F per hour divided by the maximum metal thick- ness ofthe thicker part, in inches, bt in no case more than 400°F per hour. Above 315°C, the rate of heating in °Crhr shall not exceed $600 divided by the maximum metal thickness, but not more than 220°C/hr. During the heating period, variations in temperature throughout the portion of the part being heated shall be no greater than 250°F [140°C] within any 15 f [5 m] interval of length. The rates of heating and cooling need not be les than 100°F [55°C] per hour. However, in all cases, consideration of closed chambers and complex structures may indicate re- 182 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 duced rates of heating and cooling to avoid structural ‘damage due fo excessive thermal gradients () After a maximum temperature of 1100°F [600°C] is reached on quenched and tempered steels, or a mean temperature range between 1100°F and 1200°F [600°C ‘and 650°C] is reached on other steels, the temperature of the assembly shall be held within the specified limits for ‘atime not less than specified in Table 5.2, based on weld thickness. When the specified stress relief is for dimen- sional stability, the holding time shall be not less than specified in Table 5.2, based on the thickness of the thicker part. During the holding period there shall be no difference greater than 150°F [85°C] between the highest and lowest temperature throughout the portion of the as- sembly being heated. (4) Above 600°F [315°C], cooling shall be done in a closed furnace or cooling chamber at a rate no greater than 500°F [260°C] per hour divided by the maximum metal thickness of the thicker part in inches, but in no cease more than S00°F [260°C] per hour. From 600°F [315°C], the assembly may be cooled in stil ar. 5.8.2 Alternative PWHT. Alternatively, when itis im- practical to PWHT to the temperature limitations stated in 5.8.1, welded assemblies may be stress-relieved at Tower temperatures for longer periods of time, as given in Table 5.3 5.8.3 Steels Not Recommended for PWHT. Stress re- lieving of weldments of ASTM A S14, ASTM A 517, ASTM A 709 Grades 100 (690) and 100W (690W), and ASTM A710 steels is not generally recommended, Stress relieving may be necessary for those applications ‘where weldments shall be required to retain dimensional stability during machining or where stress corrosion may be involved, neither condition being unique to weldments involving ASTM A 514, ASTM A S17, ASTM A709 Grades 100 (690) and 100W (690W), and ASTM A710 steels. However, the results of notch toughness tests have shown that PWHT may actually impair weld metal and HAZ toughness, and intergranular cracking may some- times occur in the grain-coarsened region of the weld HAZ, 5.9 Backing, Backing Gas, or Inserts CIP groove welds may be made with or without the use of backing gas, backing or consumable inserts, or may have the root of the initial weld gouged, chipped, or ‘otherwise removed to sound metal before welding is started on the second side. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 5.10 Backing Roots of groave or fillet welds may be backed by copper, flux, glass tape, ceramic, iron powder, or similar ‘materials to prevent melting through. They may also be sealed by means of root passes deposited with low- hydrogen electrodes if SMAW is used, or by other are welding processes. Steel backing shall conform to the following requirements: 5.10.1 Fusion, Groove welds made with the use of steel backing shall have the weld metal thoroughly fused with the backing, 5.10.2 Full-Length Backing. Steel backing shall be made continuous for the full length of the weld, All joints in the steel backing shall be CIP groove weld butt joints meeting all the requirements of Section 5 of this code. 5.10.3 Backing Thickness. The recommended mini- ‘mum nominal thickness of backing bars, provided that the backing shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent ‘melt-through, is shown in the following table: Thickness, min Process in, mm GTAW 18 3 SMAW 36 5 oMaw va 6 FCAW-S va 6 FCAW-G 38 10 SAW 3/8 10 Note: Commercially available steel backing for pipe and tubing is acceptable, provided there is no evidence of ‘melting on exposed interior surfaces. 5.10.4 Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Connections. For cyclically loaded structures, steel backing of welds that are transverse to the direction of computed stress shall be removed, and the joints shall be ground or fin- ished smooth, Steel backing of welds that are parallel to the direction of stress or ate not subject to computed stress need not be removed, unless so specified by the Engineet, 5.10.4. Externally Attached Backing. Where the steel backing of longitudinal welds in cyclically loaded structures is externally attached to the base metal by ‘welding, such welding shall be continuous for the length of the backing, 5.10.5 Statically Loaded Connections. Steel backing for welds in statically loaded structures (tubular and non- tubular) need not be welded full length and need not be removed unless specified by the Engineer, 183 ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION 5.11 Welding and Cutting Equipment All welding and thermal-cutting equipment shall be so designed and manufactured, and shall be in such con- dition, as to enable designated personnel to follow the procedures and attain the results described elsewhere in this code, 5.12 Welding Environment 5.12.1 Maximum Wind Velocity. GMAW, GTAW, EGW, or FCAW-G shall not be done in a draft or wind unless the weld is protected by a shelter. Such shelter shall be of material and shape appropriate to reduce wind velocity in the vicinity of the weld to a maximum of five miles per hour (eight kilometers per hour). 5.12.2 Mi not be done (A)when the ambient temperature is lower than O°F [20°C], or (2)when surfaces are wet or exposed to rain, snow, or )high wind velocities, or (4) when welding personnel are exposed to inclement conditions jum Ambient Temperature. Welding shall Note: Zero°F does not mean the ambient environmental temperature, but the temperature in the immediate vicin- ity of the weld. The ambient environmental temperature may be below 0°F [-20°C), but a heated structure or shelter around the area being welded may maintain the temperature adjacent to the weldment at O°F [-20°C] or higher. 5.13 Conformance with Design ‘The sizes and lengths of welds shall be no less than, those specified by design requirements and detail draw- ings, except as allowed in Table 6.1, The location of welds shall not be changed without approval of the Engineer. 5.14 Minimum Fillet Weld Sizes ‘The minimum fillet weld size, except for fillet welds, used to reinforce groove welds, shall be as shown in Table 5.8. The minimum fillet weld size shall apply in all cases, unless the design drawings specify welds of a larger size, ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION 5.15 Preparation of Base Metal ‘Surfaces on which weld metal is to be deposited shall bbe smooth, uniform, and free from fins, tears, cracks, and other discontinuities which would adversely affect the quality or strength of the weld. Surfaces to be welded, and surfaces adjacent to a weld, shall also be free from loose or thick scale, slay, rust, moisture, grease, and other foreign material that would prevent proper welding ‘or produce objectionable fumes. Mill scale that can with- stand vigorous wire brushing, a thin rust-inhibitive coat- ing, or antispatter compound may remain with the following exception: for girders in cyclically loaded structures, all mill scale shall be removed from the sur- faces on which flange-to-web welds are to be made, 5.18.1 Mill-Induced Discontinuities. The limits of ac- cceptability and the repair of visually observed cut surface discontinuities shall be in conformance with Table 5.4, in which the length of discontinuity is the visible long di- ‘mension on the cut surface of material and the depth is the distance that the discontinuity extends into the mate- rial from the cut surface. All welded repairs shall be in conformance with this code, Removal of the discontinu- ity may be done from either surface of the base metal ‘The aggregate length of welding shall not exceed 20% of the length of the plate surface being repaired except with approval ofthe Engineer. 5.15.11 Acceptance Criteria, For discontinuities ‘greater than 1 in. [25 mm] in length and depth discovered fon cut surfaces, the following procedures shall be observed. (1) Where discontinuities such as W, X, or Y in Fig- ure 5.1 are observed prior to completing the joint, the size and shape of the discontinuity shall be determined by UT. The area of the discontinuity shall be determined as the area of total loss of back reflection, when tested in conformance with the procedure of ASTM A 435, Speci- fication for Straight Beam Ultrasonic Examination of ‘Steel Plates." 2) For acceptance of W, X, or Y discontinuities, the area of the discontinuity (or the aggregate area of mul- tiple discontinuities) shall not exceed 4% of the cut ‘material area (length times width) with the following exception: if the length of the discontinuity, or the aggre- gate width of discontinuities on any transverse section, as ‘measured perpendicular to the cut material length, ex- ceeds 20% of the cut material width, the 4% cut material area shall be reduced by the percentage amount of the ‘width exceeding 20%, (For example, ifa discontinuity is 1 ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials), 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 1948.2959, ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 30% of the cut material width, the area of discontinuity cannot exceed 3.6% of the cut material area.) The dis- continuity onthe cut surface ofthe cut material shall be removed toa depth of 1 in. [25 mm] beyond is intersec- tion with the surface by chipping, gouging, or grinding, and blocked off by welding with a low-hydrogen process in layers not exceeding 1/8 in. [3 mm] in thickness for at least the first four layers. (G) Repair shall not be required if a discontimity Z, not exceeding the allowable area in 5.15.1.1Q), is di covered after the joint has been completed and is det. mined to be 1 in, (25 mm] of more away from the face of the weld, as measured on the cut base-metal surface. If the discontinuity Z is less than 1 in, [25 mm) away from the face of the weld, it shall be removed to « distance of 1 in [25 mm] from the fusion zone of the weld by chip- ping, gouging, or grinding. I shall then be blocked off by ‘welding with a low- hydrogen process in layers not ex- ceeding 1/8 in, [3 mm] in thickness for atleast the first four layers. (4) Ifthe area of the discontinuity W, X, Y, of Z ex- ceeds the allowable in 5.15.1.1(), the cut material or subcomponent shall be rejected and replaced, or repaired at the discretion of the Engineer. 5.15.1.2 Repair, In the repair and determination of limits of mill induced discontinuities visually observed ‘on cut surfaces, the amount of metal removed shall be the ‘minimum necessary to remove the discontinuity or to de- termine that the limits of Table 5.4 are not exceeded. However, if weld repair is required, sufficient base metal shall be removed to provide access for welding. Cut sur- faces may exist at any angle with respect to the rolling direction. All welded repairs of discontinuities shall be made by: (1) Suitably preparing the repsir area (2) Welding with an approved low-hydrogen process ‘and observing the applicable provisions of this code (3) Grinding the completed weld smooth and flush, (see 5,244.1) with the adjacent surface to produce a ‘workmanlike finish, Note: The requirements of 5151.2 may not be adequate in cases of tensile load applied through the thickness of the material 5.15.2 Joint Preparation, Machining, thermal cutting, ‘gouging, chipping, or grinding may be used for joint preparation, or the removal of unacceptable work or metal, except that oxygen gouging shall not be used ‘on steels that are ordered as quenched and tempered or normalized, 5.15.3 Material Trimming. For cyclically loaded struc- tures, material thicker than specified in the following list shall be trimmed if and as required to produce a ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 satisfactory welding edge wherever a weld isto carry cal- culated stress: (1) Sheared material thicker than 1/2 in, [12 mm] (2) Rolled edges of plates (other than universal mill plates) thicker than 3/8 in. [10 mm] (3) Toes of angles or rolled shapes (other than wide ‘lange sections) thicker than 5/8 in. [16 mm] (4) Universal mill plates or edges of flanges of wide ‘lange sections thicker than 1 in. [25 mm] (5) The preparation for butt joints shall conform tothe requirements ofthe detail drawings 5.15.4 Thermal Cutting Processes. Electric are cutting and gouging processes and oxyfuel gas cutting processes are recognized under this code for use in preparing, cutting, or trimming materials, The use of these pro- cesses shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 5, SISA Other Processes. Other thermal cutting processes may be used under this code, provided the Contractor demonstrates to the Engineer an ability to successfully use the process, 5.18.4.2 Profile Accuracy, Steel and weld metal may. be thermally cut, provided 2 smooth and regular surface free from cracks and notches is secured, and provided that an accurate profile is secured by the use of a me- chanical guide. For cyclically loaded structures, freehand thermal cutting shall be done only where approved by the Engineer. 5.18.4.3 Roughness Requirements, In thermal cut- ting, the equipment shall be so adjusted and manipulated 4 to avoid cutting beyond (inside) the prescribed lines. The roughness of all thermal cut surfaces shall be no greater than that defined by the American National Stan- dards Institute surface roughness value of 1000 i, @5 um) for material up to 4 in. [100 mm} thick and 2000 jin, [50 ym] for material 4 in, to 8 in, {200 mm] thick, with the following exception: the ends of members not subject to calculated stress at the ends shall not ex- ceed a surface roughness value of 2000 tin. ASME B4G.1, Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness, and Lay) isthe reference standard. AWS Surface Rowgh- ness Guide for Oxygen Cutting (AWS C4.1-77) may be used asa guide for evaluating surface roughness ofthese edges. For materials up to and including 4 in, (100 mm] thick, Sample No. 3 shall be used, and for materials over 4 in, up to 8 in. {200 mm] thick, Sample No. 2 shall be used 5.15.44 Gouge or Notch tions. Roughness exceeding these values and notches or gouges not more than 3/16 in, [5 mm] deep on other wise satisfactory sur- faces shall be removed by machining ot grinding. Notches or gouges exceeding 3/16 in, [5 mm] deep may ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION be repaired by grinding if the nominal cross-sectional area is not reduced by more than 2% Ground or machined surfaces shall be fared to the original surface with a slope not exceeding one in tn, Cut surfaces and adjacent edges shall be left fee of slog. In thermal-cut surfices, oscasional notches or gouges may, with ap- proval ofthe Engineer, be repaired by welding 5.16 Reentrant Corners Reentrant comers of cut material shall be formed to provide a gradual transition with radius of not less than 1 in, [25 mm}. Adjacent surfaces shall meet without off- set of cutting past the point of tangency. The reentrant ‘comers may be formed by thermal cutting, followed by ‘grinding, if necessary, in conformance with the surface requirements of 5.15.43. 5.17 Beam Copes and Weld Access Holes Radi of beam copes and weld access holes shall pro- ‘vide a smooth transition free of notches or cutting past the points of tangency between adjacent surfaces and shall meet the surface requirements of 5.15.43. 5.17.1 Weld Access Hole Dimensions. All weld access holes required to facilitate welding operations shall have a length (0) from the toe of the weld preparation not less than 1-1/2 times the thickness of the material in which the hole is made. The height (h) of the access hole shall be adequate for deposition of sound weld metal in the ad- Jjacent plates and provide clearance for weld tabs for the weld in the material in which the hole is made, but not Tess than the thickness of the material. In hot rolled shapes and built-up shapes, all beam copes and weld access holes shall be shaped free of notches or sharp re- entrant comers except that when fillet web-to-flange welds are used in built-up shapes, access holes may ter- rminate perpendicular to the flange. Fillet welds shall not be retuned through weld access holes (see Figure 5.2), 5.17.2 Group 4 and 5 Shapes. For ASTM A 6 Group 4 ‘and $ shapes and built-up shapes with web material thickness greater than 1-1/2 in. [40 mm}, the thermally ccut surfaces of beam copes and weld access holes shall be ground to bright metal and inspected by either MT or PT. Ifthe curved transition portion of weld access holes ‘and beam copes are formed by predrilled or sawed holes, that portion of the access hole or cope need not be ‘ground. Weld access holes and beam copes in other shapes need not be ground nor inspected by MT or PT. ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION 5.18 Temporary and Tack Welds 5.18.1 Temporary Welds. Temporary welds shall be subject tothe same WPS requirements as the final welds. ‘These shall be removed, when required by the Engineer. ‘When they are removed, the surface shall be made flush ‘with the original surface. For cyclically loaded nontubular connections, there shall be no temporary welds in tension zones of members made of quenched and tempered steel except at locations more than 1/6 of the depth of the web from tension flanges of beams or gitders; temporary welds at other locations shall be shown on shop drawings. 5.18.2 General Requirements for Tack Welds. Tack ‘welds shall be subject to the same quality requirements as the final welds, with the following exceptions: (1) Preheat is not required for single-pass tack welds, which are remelted and incorporated into continuous SAW welds, (2) Removal of discontinuities, such as undercut, un filled craters, and porosity before the final SAW is not requited, 5.18.21 Incorporated Tack Welds. Tack welds ‘which are incorporated into the final weld shall be made ‘with electrodes meeting the requirements of the final welds and shall be cleaned thoroughly, Multiple-pass tack welds shall have cascaded ends, 5.18.2.2 Additional Requirements for Tack Welds Incorporated in SAW Welds. Tack welds in the form of fillet welds 3/8 in. [10 mm] or smaller, ot in the roots of joints requiring specific root penetration shall not produce ‘objectionable changes in the appearance of the weld sur- face or result in decreased penetration. Tack welds not con- forming to the preceding requirements shall be removed ot reduced in size by any suitable means before welding. ‘Tack welds in the root of a joint with steel backing less than 5/16 in. {8 mm] thick shall be removed or made con- tinuous for the full length of the joint using SMAW with low-hydrogen electrodes, GMAW, ot FCAW-G. 5.18.23 Nonincorporated Tack Welds. Tack welds not incorporated into final welds shall be removed, ex- cept that, for statically loaded structures, they need not be removed unless required by the Engineer. 5.19 Camber in Built-Up Members 5.19.1 Camber. Edges of built-up beam and girder webs shall be cut tothe prescribed camber with suitable allow- ance for shrinkage due to cutting and welding. However, ‘moderate variation from the specified camber tolerance may be corrected by a careful application of heat. 186 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 5.19.2 Correction. Corrections of errors in camber of ‘quenched and tempered steel shall be given prior ap- proval by the Engineer. 5.20 Splices in Cyclically Loaded Structures Splices between sections of rolled beams or built-up tsirders shall preferably be made in a single transverse plane. Shop splices of webs and flanges in built-up gird- ers, made before the webs and flanges are joined to each ‘other, may be located in single transverse plane or mul- tiple transverse planes, but the fatigue stress provisions of the general specifications shall apply. 5.21 Control of Distortion and Shrinkage 521.1 Procedure and Sequence. In assembling and joining parts ofa structure or of built-up members and in ‘welding reinforcing parts to members, the procedure and sequence shall be such as will minimize distortion and shrinkage, 5.21.2 Sequencing. Insofar as practicable, all welds shall be made in a sequence that will balance the applied heat of welding while the welding progresses. 5.21.3 Contractor Responsibility. On members or structures where excessive shrinkage or distortion could be expected, the Contractor shall prepare a written weld- ing sequence for that member or structure which meets the quality requirements specified. The welding se- ‘quence and distortion control pro} to the Engineer, for information and comment, before the start of welding on the member or structure in which shrinkage or distortion is likely to affect the adequacy of the member or structure, 521.4 Weld Progression. The direction of the general progression in welding on a member shal be from points ‘where the parts are relatively fixed in position with re- spect to each other toward points having a greater rela- tive freedom of movement. 5.21.5 Minimized Restraint. In assemblies, joints ex- pected to have significant shrinkage should usually be ‘welded before joints expected to have lesser shrinkage. They should also be welded with as little restraint as possible 5.21.6 Subassembly Splices. All welded shop splices in ‘each component part of a cover-plated beam or built-up member shall be made before the component part is ‘welded to other component parts of the member. Long ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 airders or girder sections may be made by welding sub- assemblies, each made in conformance with 5.21.6. ‘When making these subassembly splices, whether in the shop or field, the welding sequence should be reasonably balanced between the web and flange welds as well as about the major and minor axes of the member. 521.7 Temperature Limitations. In making welds under conditions of severe external shrinkage restraint, fonce the welding has started, the joint shall not be al- lowed to cool below the minimum specified preheat until the joint has been completed or sufficient weld has been deposited to ensure freedom from cracking. 5.22 Tolerance of Joint Dimensions 5.22.1 Fillet Weld Assembly. The parts to be joined by fillet welds shall be brought into as close contact as practicable. The root opening shall not exceed 3/16 in, {5 mm] except in cases involving either shapes or plates 3 in, (75 mm] or greater in thickness if, after straighten- ing and in assembly, the root opening cannot be closed sufficiently to meet this tolerance. In such cases, a maxi ‘mum root opening of 5/16 in. (8 mm] may be used, pro- vided suitable backing is used. Backing may be of flux, lass tape, iron powder, or similar materials, or welds using a low-hydrogen process compatible with the filler ‘metal deposited. Ifthe separation is greater than 1/16 in, {2:mm], the leg of the fillet weld shall be increased by the amount of the root opening, or the Contractor shall demonstrate that the required effective throat has been obtained $22.11 Faying Surface. The separation between faying surfaces of plug and slot welds, and of butt joints landing on a backing, shall not exceed 1/16 in, [2 mm}. ‘Where irregularities in rolled shapes occur after straight ening do not allow contact within the above limits, the procedure necessary to bring the material within these limits shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. ‘The use of filler plates shall be prohibited except as spec- ified on the drawings or as specially approved by the En- ‘ineer and made in conformance with 2.13, 5.22.2 PJP Groove Weld Assembly. The parts to be joined by PIP groove welds parallel to the length of the ‘member shall be brought into as close contact as practica- ble. The root opening between parts shall not exceed 3/16 in. [5 mm] except in cases involving rolled shapes or plates 3 in. [75 mm] or greater in thickness if, after straightening and in assembly, the root opening cannot be closed sufficiently to meet this tolerance. In such cases, 2 maximum root opening of 5/16 in. [8 mm] may be used, provided suitable backing is used and the final weld meets the requirements for weld size, Tolerances for bearing 187 ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION joints shall be in conformance with the applicable contract specifications, 5.22.3 Butt Joint Alignment. Parts to be joined at butt joints shall be carefully aligned. Where the parts ate ef fectively restrained against bending due to eccentricity in alignment, the offset from the theoretical alignment shall not exceed 10% of the thickness of the thinner part joined, or 1/8 in. [3 mm], whichever is smaller, In cor- recting misalignment in such cases, the parts shall not be ‘drawn in toa greater slope than 1/2 in, [12 mm] in 12 in. [300 mm]. Measurement of offet shall be based upon the centerline of parts unless otherwise shown on the drain $.22.3.1 Girth Weld Alignment (Tubular). Abut- ting parts to be joined by girth welds shall be carefully aligned. No wo girth welds shall be located closer than ‘one pipe diameter or 3 ft [1 m], whichever is less. There shall be no more than two girth welds in any 10 ft [3 m] interval of pipe, except as may be agreed upon by the ‘Owner and Contractor. Radial offset of abutting edges of ‘girth seams shall not exceed 0.2t (where ts the thickness of the thinner member) and the maximum allowable shall be 1/4 in, [6 mm], provided that any offset exceeding 1/8 in, [3 mm] is welded from both sides. However, with the approval of the Engineer, one localized area per girth seam may be offset up (0 0.3t with a maximum of 3/8 in, [10 mm], provided the localized area is under St in length. Filler metal shall be added to this region to pro- vide a 4 0 1 transition and may be added in conjunction with making the weld, Offsets in excess of this shall be corrected as provided in 5.22.3. Longitudinal weld seams of adjoining sections shall be staggered a minimum of 90°, unless closer spacing is agreed upon by the Owner ‘and fabricator. 5.22.4 Groove Dimensions 5.22.4.1 Nontubular Cross-Sectional Variations. With the exclusion of ESW and ESG, and with the excep- tion of 5.22.43 for root openings in excess of those allowed in Figure 5.3, the dimensions of the cross section ‘ofthe groove welded joints which vary from those shown ‘on the detail drawings by more than these tolerances shall be referred to the Engineer for approval or correction, 5.22.4.2 Tubular Cross-Sectional Variations. Vari- ation in cross section dimension of groove welded joints, from those shown on the detailed drawings, shall be in conformance with 5.24.1 except (1) Tolerances for T-, ¥> and K-connes ‘cluded in the ranges given in 3.13.4, (2) The tolerances shown in Table 5.5 apply to CIP tubular groove welds in butt joints, made fram one side only, without backing. ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION 5.2.4.3 Correction, Root openings greater than. those allowed in 5.22.4.1, but not greater than twice the thickness of the thinner part or 3/4 in. (20 mm}, which- ever is less, may be corrected by welding to acceptable «dimensions prior t joining the parts by welding. 5.22.44 Engineer's Approval. Root openings. greater than allowed by 5.22.4.3 may be corrected by ‘welding only with the approval of the Engineer, 5.22.5 Gouged Grooves. Grooves produced by gouging shall be in substantial conformance with groove profile dimensions as specified in Figure 3.3 and 3.4 and provi- sions of 3.12.3 and 3.13.1, Suitable access to the root shall be maintained, 522.6 Alignment Methods. Members 10 be welded shall be brought into correct alignment and held in posi- tion by bolts, clamps, wedges, guy lines, struts, and other suitable devices, or by tack welds until welding has been completed, The use of jigs and fixtutes is recommended ‘where practicable. Suitable allowances shall be made for ‘warpage and shrinkage, 5.23 Dimensional Tolerance of Welded Structural Members ‘The dimensions of welded structural members shall conform to the tolerances of (1) the general specifica- tions governing the work, and (2) the special dimensional tolerances in 5.23.1 to $.23.11.3. (Note that a tubular col- ‘umn is interpreted as @ compression tubular member.) 5.23.1 Straightness of Columns and Trusses. For ‘welded columns and primary truss members, regardless of eross section, the maximum variation in straightness shall be Lengths of less than 30 ft (9 m): No. of ft of total length V8 in. x = 1 mm No. of meters of total length Lengths of 30 ft (10 m] to 45 ft [15 m] = 3/8 in, (10 mm} Lengths over 45 ft [15 m} 4/8 in, + V8 in, x NO-OF fof total length — 45, 10 No. of meters of total length — 15 3 10. mm +3 mmx 5.23.2 Beam and Girder Straightness (No Camber Specified). For welded beams or girders, regardless of 188 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 cross section, where there is no specified camber, the ‘maximum variation in straightness shall be No. of fof total length /8 in. ud 10 1 mm x No, of meters of total length 5.23.3 Beam and Girder Camber (Typical Girder). For welded beams or girdets, other than those whose top flange is embedded in concrete without a designed con- crete haunch, regardless of eross seetion, the maximum variation from required camber at shop assembly (for drilling holes for field splices or preparing field welded splices) shall be ‘at midspan, 0, +1-1/2 in, [40 mm] for spans 2 100 ft [30m] ~0, + 3/4 in, [20 mm] for spans < 100 ft (30m) at supports, 0 for end supports, 1/8 [3 mm] for interior supports 4 Aeayba aS) at intermediate points, -0, where 1a = distance in feet (meters) from inspection point to nearest support 'S = span length in feet (meters) b= 1-1/2 in, [40 mm] for spans 2 100 ft [30 m] bb = 3/4 in, [20 mm] for spans < 100 f [30 m] See Table 5.6 for tabulated values. 5.23.4 Beam and Girder Camber (without Designed Conerete Haunch). For members whose top flange is embedded in concrete without a designed concrete haunch, the maximum variation from required camber at shop assembly (for drilling holes for field splices or pre~ paring field welded splices) shall be ‘at midspan, = 3/4 in, [20 mm] for spans > 100 ft (30m) 3/8 in. [10 mm] for spans < 100 ft [30 mj at supports, 0 for end supports « 1/8 in, [3 mm] for interior supports at intermediate points, + 4@bU— aS) s where a and S are as defined above b = 3/4 in, [20 mm] for spans = 100 ft (30 m] bb = 3/8 in. [10 mm] for spans < 100 ft [30 m] See Table 5.7 for tabulated values. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 Regardless of how the camber is shown on the detail drawings, the sign convention forthe allowable variation is plus (+) above, and minus (-) below, the detailed eam- ber shape. These provisions also apply to an individual member when no field splices or shop assembly is re- quired. Camber measurements shall be made in the no- load condition. 5.23.5 Beam and Girder Sweep. The maximum varia- tion from straightness or specified sweep at the midpoint shall be No. of feet of total length 10 £1/8in. x 4 1 mmx No, of meters of total length provided the member has sufficient lateral flexibility to allow the attachment of diaphragms, eross-frames, lateral bracing, ete., without damaging the structural member or its attachments 5.23.6 Variation in Web Flatness 5.23.6.1 Measurements. Variations from flatness of girder webs shall be determined by measuring the offset from the actual web centerline to a straight edge whose length is greater than the least panel dimension and placed on a plane parallel to the nominal web plane. Measurements shall be taken prior to erection (see Commentary). 5.3.6.2 Statically Loaded Nontubular Structures, Variations from flatness of webs having a depth, D, and a thickness, t, in panels bounded by stiffeners or flanges, or both, whose least panel dimension is d shall not exceed the following Intermediate stiffeners on both sides of web where Dit < 150, maximum variation = 4/100 where Dit 2 150, maximum variation = d/80 Intermediate stiffeners on one side only of web ‘where Dit < 100, maximum variation = 4/100 where Dit 2 100, maximum variation = W/67 [No intermediate stiffeners where D/t 2 100, maximum variation = D/150 (See Annex VI for tabulation.) 5.23.63 Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Structures. ‘Variation from flamess of webs having a depth, D, and a thickness, t, in panels bounded by stiffeners or flanges, or both, whose least panel dimension is d shall not exceed the following Intermediate stiffeners on both sides of web Interior girders— where Dit < 150—maximum variation = /115 189 ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION where Dit 2 150—maximum variation = 4/92 Fascia girders— where Dit < 150 where D/t 2 150—maximum variatio ‘maximum variation = d/130 ai10s Intermediate stiffeners on one side only of web Interior girders— ‘where Dit < 100—maximum variation = 4/100 where Dit 2 100—maximum variation = 4/67 Fascia girders. where D/t < 100—maximum variation = 4/120 where Dit 2 100—maximum variation = 4/80 ‘No intermediate stiffeners—maximum variation = (See Annex VIT for tabulation.) 5.23.64 Excessive Distortion, Web distortions of twice the allowable tolerances of 5.23.6.2 or 5.23.6.3 shall be satisfactory when occurring at the end ofa girder ‘which has been drilled, or subpunched and reamed; ei- ther during assembly or to a template for a field bolted splice; provided, when the splice plates are bolted, the ‘web asstumes the proper dimensional tolerances. Di1s0 5.23.65 Architectural Consideration, If architec- tural considerations require tolerances more restrictive than described in 5.23.6.2 or 5.23.6.3, specific reference shall be included in the bid documents. 5.23.7 Variation Between Web and Flange Center- lines. For built-up H or I members, the maximum vari tion between the centerline of the web and the centerline ‘of the flange at contact surface shall not exceed 1/4 in. [6 mm), 5.23.8 Flange Warpage and Tilt. For welded beams or girders, the combined warpage and tilt of flange shall be determined by measuring the offset at the toe of the fTange from a line normal tothe plane ofthe web through the intersection of the centerline ofthe web withthe out- side surface ofthe flange plate. This offset shall not ex- ceed 1% of the total flange width or 144 in, [6 mm}, Whichever is greater, except that welded butt joints of abutting parts shall fulfil the requirements of 5.22.3. 5.23.9 Depth Variation. For welded beams and girders, the maximum allowable variation from specified depth ‘measured at the web centerline shall be For depths up to 36 in. [1 m] incl For depths over 36 in. [1 mi] to 72 in. [2 m) incl For depths over 72 in, (2 mi] £1/8in. 3 mm] £3/16 in. [5 mm] + 5/16 in. [8 mm] = 3/16 in. [5 mm] 5.23.10 Bearing at Points of Loading. The bearing ‘ends of bearing stiffeners shall be square with the web ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION and shall have at least 75% of the stiffener bearing cross-sectional area in contact with the inner surface of the flanges. The outer surface of the flanges when bear- ing against a steel base or seat shall fit within 0.010 in. [0.25 mm] for 75% of the projected area of web and stift= feners and not more than 1/32 in. [1 mm] for the remain- ng 25% of the projected area. Girders without stiffeners shall bear on the projected area of the web on the outer flange surface within 0.010 in, [0.25 mm] and the in- cluded angle between web and flange shall not exceed 90° in the bearing length (see Commentary). 5.23.11 Tolerance on Stiffeners 5.23.11.1 Fit of Intermediate Stiffeners. Where tight fit of intermediate stiffeners is specified, it shall be defined as allowing a gap of up to 1/16 in, [2 mm] be- ‘tween stiffener and flange. 5.23.11.2 Straightness of Intermediate Stiffeners. ‘The out-of straightness variation of intermediate stiffen- ers shall not exceed 1/2 in, [12 mm] for girders up to 6 Rt [1.8 m] deep, and 3/4 in, [20 mm] for girders over 6 A [1.8 m] deep, with due regard for members which frame into them. 5.23.11. Straightness and Location of Bearing Stiffeners. The out-of straightness variation of beating stiffeners shall not exceed 1/4 in. (6 mm] up to 6 [1.8 m] deep or 1/2 in, (12 mam] over 6 ft deep. The ac- tual centerline ofthe stiffener shall lie within the thick- ness of the stiffener as measured from the theoretical centerline location 5.23.114 Other Dimensional Tolerances. Twist of box members and other dimensional tolerances of mem- bers not covered by 5.23 shall be individually determined and mutually agreed upon by the Contractor and the ‘Owner with proper regard for erection requirements. 24 Weld Profiles All welds, except as otherwise allowed below, shall be free from cracks, overlaps, and the unacceptable profile discontinuities exhibited in Figure 5.4, 524.1 Fillet Welds. The faces of fillet welds may be slightly convex, flat, or slightly concave as shown in Fig- ure 5.4. Figure 5.4{C) shows typically unacceptable fillet ‘weld profiles. 5.24.2 Exception for Intermittent Fillet Welds. Except for undercut, as allowed by the code, the profile require ments of Figure 5.4 shall not apply to the ends of intermittent fillet welds outside their effective length, 190 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 5.24.3 Convexity. Except at outside welds in comer joints, the convexity C of a weld or individual surface bead shall not exceed the values given in Figure $4 5.24.4 Groove or Butt Welds. Groove welds shall be made with minimum face reinforcement unless other- wise specified. In the case of butt and comer joints, face reinforcement shall not exceed 1/8 in, [3 mm] in height All welds shall have @ gradual transition to the plane of the base-metal surfaces with transition areas free from undercut except as allowed by this code. Figure 5.4(D) shows typically acceptable groove weld profiles in butt joints. Figure 5.4(E) shows typically unacceptable weld profiles for groove weld butt joints, 5.2441 Flush Surfaces. Butt welds required to be fush shall be finished so as to not reduce the thicknesses of the thinner base metal or weld metal by more than 1/32 in. [1 mm], or $% of the material thickness, which- ever is less. Remaining reinforcement shall not exceed 1/32 in, [1 mm] in height. However, all reinforcement shall be removed where the weld forms part of a faying for contact surface. All reinforcement shall blend smoothly into the plate surfaces with transition areas free from undercut. 5.24.42 Finish Methods and Values. Chipping and ‘gouging may be used provided these are followed by grinding. Where surface finishing is required, rough- rness values (see ASME B46,1) shall not exceed 250 microinches [6.3 micrometers]. Surfaces finished to values of over 125 microinches [3.2 micrometers] through 250 microinches shall be finished parallel to the direction of primary stress, Surfaces finished to values of 125 microinches of less may be finished in any direction. 5.25 Technique for Plug and Slot ‘Welds 5.25.1 Plug Welds. The technique used to make plug ‘welds when using SMAW, GMAW, (except GMAW-S), and FCAW processes shall be as follows: 5.25.1.1 Flat Position, For welds to be made in the flat position, each pass shall be deposited around the root ‘of the joint and then deposited along a spiral path to the center of the hole, fusing and depositing a layer of weld ‘metal in the root and bottom of the joint. The are is then carried to the petiphery of the hole and the procedure peated, fusing and depositing successive layers to fill the hole to the requited depth. The slag covering the weld ‘metal should be kept molten until the weld is finished. If the arc is broken or the slag is allowed to cool, the slag rust be completely removed before restarting the weld. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 5.28.1.2 Vertical Position, For welds to be made in the vertical position, the arc is started at the root of the joint at the lower side of the hole and is carried upward, fusing into the face of the inner plate and to the side of the hole. The arc is stopped at the top of the hole, the slag is cleaned off, and the process is repeated on the opposite side of the hole, After cleaning slag from the weld, other layers should be similarly deposited to fil the hole to the required depth. 5.28.1.3 Overhead Position. For welds to be made in the overhead position, the procedure is the same as for the flat position, except that the slag should be allowed to cool and should be completely removed after depositing each successive bead until the hole is filled to the re- quired depth, 5.25.2 Slot Welds. Slot welds shall be made using tech- niques similar to those specified in 5.25.1 for plug welds, except that if the length of the slot exceeds three times the width, or ifthe slot extends to the edge of the part, the technique requirements of 5.25.1.3 shall apply. 5.26 Repairs ‘The removal of weld metal or portions of the base ‘metal may be done by machining, grinding, chipping, or ‘gouging, It shall be done in such a manner that the adja- cent weld metal or base metal is not nicked or gouged. ‘Oxygen gouging shall not be used in quenched and tem- pered steel, Unacceptable portions of the weld shall be removed without substantial removal of the base metal ‘The surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly before welding. ‘Weld metal shall be deposited to compensate for any de- ficiency in size 5.26.1 Contractor Options. The Contractor has the op- tion of either repairing an unacceptable weld or remov- ing and replacing the entire weld, except as modified by 5.26.3. The repaired or replaced weld shall be retested by the method originally used, and the same technique and quality acceptance criteria shall be applied. If the Con- tractor elects to repair the weld, it shall be corrected as follows: 5.26.1. Overlap, Excessive Convexity, or Excessive forcement, Excessive weld metal shall be removed. Ri 5.6.1.2 Excessive Coneavity of Weld or Crater, Undersize Welds, Undercutting. The surfaces shall be prepared (see 5.30) and additional weld metal deposited. 5.26.1.3 Incomplete Fusion, Excessive Weld Poros- ity, or Slag Inclusions. Unacceptable portions shall be removed (see 5.26) and rewelded. 191 ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION 5.26.1.4 Cracks in Weld or Base Metal. The extent of the crack shall be ascertained by use of acid etching, MT, PT, or other equally positive means; the crack and sound metal 2 in, [50 mm} beyond each end of the erack shall be removed, and rewelded, 5.26.2 Localized Heat Repair Temperature Limita- jons. Members distorted by welding shall be straight- ‘ened by mechanical means or by application of a limited ‘amount of localized heat. The temperature of heated ‘areas as measured by approved methods shall not exceed 1100°F [600°C] for quenched and tempered steel nor 1200°F [650°C] for other steels. The part to be heated for straightening shall be substantially free of stress and from external forces, except those stresses resulting from the mechanical straightening method used in conjunction ‘with the application of heat, 5.26.3 Engineer's Approval. Prior approval of the En- ‘zineer shall be obtained for repairs to base metal (other than those required by 5.15), repair of major or delayed cracks, repairs to ESW and EGW with internal defects, or for a revised design to compensate for deficiencies. ‘The Engineer shall be notified before welded members ‘are cut apart 5.264 Inaccessibility of Unacceptable Welds. If, after ‘an unacceptable weld has been made, work is performed ‘which has rendered that weld inaccessible or has created ‘new conditions that make correction of the unacceptable ‘weld dangerous or ineffectual, then the original con- ditions shall be restored by removing welds or members, ‘or both, before the corrections are made. If this is not done, the deficiency shall be compensated for by addi- tional work performed conforming to an approved revised design. 5.26.5 Welded Restoration of Base Metal with Mi located Holes. Except where restoration by welding is necessary for structural or other reasons, punched or drilled mistocated holes may be left open or filled with bolts. When base metal with mislocated holes is restored by welding, the following requirements apply (1) Base metal not subjected to cyclic tensile stress may be restored by welding, provided the Contractor pre- pares and follows a repair WPS, The repair weld sound- ness shall be verified by appropriate NDT, when such tests are specified in the contract documents for groove ‘welds subject to compression or tension sires. {@) Base metal subject to eyeic tensile stress may be restored by welding provided: (@) The Engineer approves repsir by welding and the repair WPS. (©) The repair WPS is followed in the work and the soundness of the restored base metal is verified by the NDT method(s) specified in the contract documents for ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION examination of tension groove welds or as approved by the Engineer. 3) In addition to the requirements of (1) and (2), ‘when holes in quenched and tempered base metals are re- stored by welding: (@) Appropriate filler metal, heat input, and PWHT (when PWHT is required) shall be used. (b) Sample welds shall be made using the repair wes, (©) RT of the sample welds shall verify that weld soundness conforms to the requirements of 6.12.21 (@) One reduced section tension test (weld metal); two side bend tests (weld metal); and three CVN tests of the HAZ (coarse grained area) removed from sample ‘welds shall be used to demonstrate that the mechanical properties of the repaired area conform to the specified requirements of the base metal (see Annex TIT for CVN testing requirements). (4) Weld surfaces shall be finished as specified in 5244.1 5.27 Peening Peening may be used on intermediate weld layers for control of shrinkage stresses in thick welds to prevent cracking or distortion, or both. No pening shall be done ‘on the root or surface layer of the Weld or the base metal at the edges ofthe weld except as provided in 2.36.6.6(3). Care should be taken to prevent overlapping or ofthe weld or base metal 527.1 Tools, The use of manual slag hammers, chisels, and lightweight vibrating tools for the removal of slag and spatter is allowed and shall nat be considered peening. 5.28 Caulking Caulking shall be defined as plastic deformation of ‘weld and base metal surfaces by mechanical means to seal or obscute discontinuities. Caulking shall be prohib- ited for base metals with minimum specified yield strength greater than 50 ksi [345 MPa}, For base metals with minimum specified yield strength of 50 ksi [345 MPa] or less, caulking may be used, provided: (1) all inspections have been completed and accepted 2) cautking is necessary to prevent coating failures (3) the technique and limitations on caulking are approved by the Engineer 192 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 5.29 Are Strikes Are strikes outside the area of permanent welds should be avoided on any base metal. Cracks or blem= ishes caused by arc strikes shall be ground to a smooth ‘contour and checked to ensure soundness. 5.30 Weld Cleaning 5.30.1 In-Process Cleaning, Before welding over previ- ‘ously deposited metal, all slag shall be removed and the ‘weld and adjacent base metal shall be brushed clean. This requirement shall apply not only to successive lay- cers but also 0 successive beads and to the crater area hen welding is resumed after any interruption. It shall not, however, restrict the welding of plug and slot welds in conformance with 5.2 5.30.2 Cleaning of Completed Welds. Slag shall be re- moved from all completed welds, and the weld and adja- ‘cent base metal shall be cleaned by brushing or other suitable means. Tightly adherent spatter remaining after the cleaning operation is acceptable, unless its removal is required for the purpose of NDT. Welded joints shall not be painted until after welding has been completed and the weld accepted. 5.31 Weld Tabs (See 5.2.2) 5.31.1 Use of Weld Tabs. Welds shall be terminated at the end of a joint in a manner that will ensure sound welds. Whenever necessary, this shall be done by use of ‘weld tabs aligned in such @ manner to provide an exten- sion of the joint preparation, 531.2 Removal of Weld Tabs for Statically Loaded Nontubular Structures. For statically loaded nontubular structures, weld tabs need not be removed unless required by the Engineer. 531.3 Removal of Weld Tabs for Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Structures. For cyclically loaded nontubular structures, weld tabs shall be removed upon completion ‘and cooling of the weld, and the ends of the weld shall be made smooth and flush with the edges of abutting parts 531.4 Ends of Welded Butt Joints. Ends of welded butt joints required to be flush shall be finished so as not to reduce the width beyond the detailed width or the ac- tual width furnished, whichever is greater, by more than 1/8 in, [3 mm] or so as not to leave reinforcement at each fend that exceeds 1/8 in. [3 mm]. Ends of welded butt joints shall be fared ata slope not to exceed 1 in 10. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 5, FABRICATION Table 5.1 Table 5.2 Allowable Atmospheric Exposure of imum Holding Time (see 5.8.1) Low-Hydrogen Electrodes Se (see 5.3.2.2 and 5.3.2.3) i peal pe lecrode Column A (hours) _ Column B (bows) in. [80mm] Over 2, [50mm] Asa Sin foreach. 2b plus 15 min foreach ETOXX max 15min /tin.{6mm]of ~ edition i, [25 mm] ETOXXR mmx Overs to 10 max Pac orfacton” or ration thereof ETOXXHZR 9max thereof ‘ver in, (80 m] ETOI8M 9 ax SS Oe". ASS ETOXX-X max Over to 10 max ESOXXX 2max Over 2t0 10 max EDOXXX Tmax Over 19 Smax Tabs . 2 max 12104 max ners ee aaa Alternate Stress-Relief Heat Treatment —_r_— ors” (see 5.8.2) General Notes a Cokin A Eleodes exposed 6 atmoepete fr longer priads Decrease in Temperature below Minimum Holding than shown shal be rede fore use. + Column’: Hlectodes exposed to atmosphere for long periods Minimum Specified Temperature, Time at Deeteased than those ctablished by testing shal be rede before se $$ Femperatare, Hours + letrodes shall ho sesed and held in quivers, oe other smal open per ch (25 mm] containers. Heated containers are not mandator. AF ac of Thickness + The optional supplemental designator, R, designates low-hydrogen lecrode which bas bosn tested fr eovering moisture content ser aT exposure t a moist environment fr 9 urs and has met the mak a ‘mum evel allowed in AWS AS.L Specification fr Carbon Steel lecraes for Shielded Metal Arc Waldng 0 200 120 20 Table 5.4 Limits on Acceptability and Repair of Mill Induced Laminar Discontinuities in Cut Surfaces (see 5.15.1) Description of Discontinuity Repair Requited Any discontinuity 1 in, [25 mm) in length or less "None, need not be explored ‘Any discontinuity over | in. [25 mm] in length and 1/8 in. [3 mm] maximum depth None, but the depth should be explored! Any discontinuity over 1 in. not greater than 14 in, [6 mm mm) in length with depth over 1/8 in. [3 mm] but ee ‘Any discontinuity over 1 in. [25 mm] in length with depth over 1/4 in, [6 mm] but not greater than I in. [25 mm Gobet ‘Any discontinuity over [in 25 mm] in length with depts greater than in.[25 mm] See $.15.1.1 Wor |L-A spot check of 10% ofthe discontintes on the cut surface in question shouldbe explored by grinding to determine depth. the depth of any one ofthe discoutnuits explored excuods 1 i. [3 mn], ha al ofthe discounts over 1a. [28 mun] i gt remaining on dat cut surface shall, be explored by grading wo determine dept If wane of the discontinuities explored in the 10% spa check havea depth exceeding U8 i, (3 m0), then the remainder ofthe dscmtnates on tha cut sre nocd nt be explore. 193 ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 55 Table 5.7 Tubular Root Opening Tolerances Camber Tolerance for Girders without a (see 5.22.4.2) Designed Concrete Haunch (see 5.23.4) RoorOpestugot Groove Camber Tolerance Gn inches) Tints without Angle of Root Face of Joint Stel Backing Joint as Span a1 02 03st in mm in imme = Sona SMW avi6 26S Ligne GMAW 4122 Gl ale as Feaw ile 42 aie as ‘Camber Tolerance (in miler) Gens Note: Root porngs wie than allowed bythe above wer 1s sour bu ot poser nth mctns ot Dine pum) © Span Sitapby welkngtoscapubietinemoesprarwichasogerac 52 or 0203 ts 05 parts by welding, 230m 7 13 17 19 20 Som 4 Table 58 Minimum Fillet Weld Sizes (see 5.14) Minimum Sie Base Metal Thickness (1)! filet Weld? Table 5.6 2 Camber Tolerance for Typical Girder a om i. am (see 5.23.3) Teva T<6 Le Camber Tolerance (in noes) : a (Note 3) ote3) 3s iactei eat ei2 wes Sn oer cz] ets eure cs Taetesa Bet s20 m6 Swat Tne caer ont cee Ty I'For nonlowhydogn pcm wow poe ced i Camber Tolerance Gn millineters) ‘ovtumunce wih 382° T eqs ick of the ike pa mt ingly welds sl wed for aorlendgen pce wing postures ebb to Span oi 02 03 od os preven racking n conformance wih 52 anor ow ydogen Prout, Tes stot oft ioe pa jedan at Som z fronton sl not apy aa My 253840 ERT tn he weld oe need not essed the thickness ofthe 0m 7B» 2 thse pane 4. Minium sie for ech loaded tutes shal be 3/16 ( ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 5, FABRICATION bSsenuwen 1 in, [25 mm MIN MATERIAL LENGTH Figure 5.1—Edge Discontinuities in Cut Material (see 5.15.1.1) ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 BACKING IF USED® BACKING IF USED® f— (Noto 4) R (Noto 4) Note 1 Mit i woe & dt (ote) ease RADIUS PRECUTBY te 151sORILLOR HOLE Sa (a 18y note) ] 1215 ty ANGLE OF SLOPE NOT CRITICAL 1 1 t215ty (Noto *) NEED NOT BE TANGENT NOTCHES PROHIBITED L eece} (GEE FIGURE C32) / ‘OPTIONAL METHOD FOR MAKING CORNER RADIUS. ROLLED SHAPE OR FILLET WELDED SHAPE? GROOVE WELDED SHAPE? a (Note 1) h (Note 4) h Note 4) General Notes: + For ASTM A 6 Group 4 and § shapes and welded builtup shapes with web thickness more than 1-1/2 in, [40 mm, preheat to 50°F [65°C] prior to thermal cating, grind ana inspect thermaly cut edges of access hole using MT or PT methods prior to making web and ange Splice groove welds + These are ypcal deta fo joints welded rom one side against see! backing, Altematve joint designs should be considered. Notes: 1. Radius shall provide smooth notch ree transition; R > 18, [10 mm (Typleal 12 in. (12 mm). 2. Access hole made ater welding web to flange. 3. Access nole made before welding web to flange. Weld shall not be returned though hole. 4. Pan = 34 in. 20 mm) ort (web thickness), whichever is rear. Figure 5.2—Weld Access Hole Geometry (see 5.17.1) 196 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SECTION 5, FABRICATION 12 1/6in, [2mm | emmy (A) GROOVE WELD WITHOUT BACKING— ‘ROOT NOT BACKGOUGED rama oN / ; +14 in. (6 mm B46 in [2 mm (B) GROOVE WELD WITH BACKING— ROOT NOT BACKGOUGED gt ee ~ le t +1716 in [2 mn “18 in. (3 ma} (C) GROOVE WELD WITHOUT BACKING— ROOT BACKGOUGED oot Not Root Backgouged __Backgouged (Roaliacecfjont 116-2 ~—_—‘Netlinited @)Rootopeningotjoins x16 2 HMB without backing “ve Root opening ofjoints 11/4 a with backing ee 8) Groove angle ofjoint “10° oy General Note: See 62242 for Wlerances for GIP Wbular ‘groove welds made from one side without backing igure 5.3—Workmanship Tolerances in Assembly of Groove Welded Joints (see 5.22.4.1) 197 ‘SECTION 5. FABRICATION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 : » FLAS ze «| Seen F-aze | Sie (B) ACCEPTABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES. (A) DESIRABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES Note 1. Conwexly, C, of a weld or indvidual surface bead with dimension W shall not exceed the value ofthe following table: ‘WIDTH OF WELD FACE OR INDIVIDUAL SURFACE BEAD, W MAX CONVEXITY, C W826 in. (8 mm} 116 in. (2 mm W> 5/16 in. [8 mm}TOW <1 In. [25 mm] 18 in. [3 mm} W2 1 in. 25 mm) 316 in. 5 mm 7 ee = TT > _ froze] bsce-| bse] bez] bee] bsae-| Ream cueaw open peng bits (C) UNACCEPTABLE FILLET WELD PROFILES (tote 2) i (Note 2) oS oP 7 FF La evote 2) BUTT JOINT— BUTT JOINT (TRANSITION) — EQUAL THICKNESS PLATE UNEQUAL THICKNESS PLATE not exceed 1/8 in. [3 mm] (880 5.244) Note 2, Reinforcement A she (©) ACCEPTABLE GROOVE WELD PROFILE IN BUTT JOINT. FQ} 3 ORB ERG EXCESSIVE WELD UNDERFILL EXCESSIVE OVERLAP REINFORCEMENT UNDERCUT (©) UNACCEPTABLE GROOVE WELD PROFILES IN BUTT JOINTS Figure 5.4—Acceptable and Unacceptable Weld Profiles (see 5.24) 198 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 6. Inspection Part A General Requirements 6.1 Scope Section 6 contains all of the requirements for the In- spector's qualifications and responsibilities, acceptance criteria for discontinuities, and procedures for NDT. 6.1.1 Information Furnished to Bidders. When NDT other than visual is to be required, it shall be so stated in the information furnished to the bidders. This informa- tion shall designate the categories of welds to be exam- ined, the extent of examination of each category, and the ‘method or methods of testing, 6.1.2 Inspection and Contract Stipulations. For the purpose of this code, fabrication/erection inspection and testing, and verification inspection and testing shall be separate functions. 6.1.2.1 Contractor's Inspection. This type of in- spection and test shall be performed as necessary prior to assembly, during assembly, during welding, and after welding to ensure that materials and workmanship meet the requirements of the contract documents. Fabrica tion/erection inspection and testing shall be the responsi bilities ofthe Contractor unless otherwise provided in the contract documents. 6.1.2.2 Verification Inspection. This type of inspec- tion and testing shall be performed and their results re- ported fo the Owner and Contractor in a timely manner to avoid delays in the work. Verification inspection and test- ing are the prerogatives of the Owner who may perform this function or, when provided in the contract, Waive in- dependent verification, or stipulate that both inspection and verification shall be performed by the Contractor. 61.3 Defin of Inspector Categories 6.1.3.1 Contractor's Inspector. This inspector is the duly designated person who acts for, and in behalf of, the 199 Contractor on all inspection and quality matters within the scope of the contract documents. 6.1.3.2 Verification Inspector. This inspector is the duly designated person who acts for, and in behalf of, the ‘Owner or Engineer on all inspection and quality matters within the scope of the contract documents, 6.1.3.3 Inspector(s). When the term inspector is used without further qualification as to the specific inspector category described above, it applies equally to inspection and verification within the limits of responsibility de- scribed in 6.1.2, 6.1.4 Inspector Qualification Requirements 6.141 Bases for Qualification, Inspectors se- sponsible for acceptance or rejection of material and ‘workmanship shall be qualified. The basis of Inspector ‘qualification shall be documented. Ifthe Engineer elects to specify the basis of inspector qualification, it shall be so specified in contract documents ‘The acceptable qualification bases shal be the following: (1) Current or previous certification as an AWS Certi- fied Welding Inspector (CW) in conformance with the provisions of AWS QCI, Standard and Guide for Ouali- fication and Certification of Welding Inspectors, ot (2) Current or previous qualification by the Canadian Welding Bureau (CWB) in conformance with the re- ‘quirements of the Canadian Standard Association (CSA) Standard WI78.2, Certification of Welding Inspectors, or {G) An Engineer or technician who, by taining or ex- petience, or both, in metals fabrication, inspection and testing, is competent to perform inspection of the work. 6.1.4.2 Term of Effectiveness. The qualification of ‘an Inspector shall remain in effect indefinitely, provided the Inspector remains active in inspection of welded steel fabrication, unless there is specific reason to question the Inspector's ability 614.3 Assistant Inspector, The Inspector may be supported by Assistant Inspectors who may perform spe- cific inspection functions under the supervision of the ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION Inspector. Assistant Inspectors shall be qualified by train ing and experience to perform the specific functions to which they are assigned. The work of Assistant Inspec- tors shall be regularly monitored by the Inspector, gener- ally on a daily basis, 6.1.44 Eye Examination, Inspectors and Assistant Inspectors shall have passed an eye examination with or ‘without corrective lenses to prove: (1) near vision acuity of Snellen English, or equivalent, at no less than 12 in. [300 mm); and (2) far vision acuity of 20/40, or better Eye examination of all inspection personnel shall be re- quired every three years or less if necessary to demon strate adequacy. 6.145 Verification Authority, The Engineer shall have authority to verify the qualification of Inspectors. 6.1.8 Inspector Responsibility. The Inspector shall as- certain that all fabrication snd erection by welding is per- formed in conformance with the requirements of the contract documents, 6.1.6 Items to be Furnished to the Inspector. The In- spector shall be furnished complete detailed drawings showing the size, length, type, and location of all welds to be made, The Inspector shall also be furnished the por- tion of the contract documents that describes material and quality requirements for the products to be fabricated or erected, or bath. 6.1.7 Inspector Notification. The Inspector shall be notified in advance of the start of operations subject to inspection and verification 6.2 Inspection of Materials ‘The Contractor's Inspector shall make certain that only materials conforming to the requirements of this ccode shall be used. 6.3 Inspection of WPSs and Equipment 63.1 WPS. The Inspectors shall review all WPSs to be used for the work and shall make certain that the proce- dures conform to the requirements of this code. 63.2 Welding Equipment. The Inspector shall inspect the welding equipment to be used for the work to make certain that it conforms to the requirements of $.11 PARTA ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 6.4 Inspection of Welder, Welding Operator, and Tack Welder 64.1 Determination of Qualification. The Inspector shall allow welding to be performed only by welders, ‘welding operators, and tack welders who are qualified in ‘conformance with the requirements of Section 4, or shall make certain that each welder, welding operator, or tack welder has previously demonstrated such qualification under other acceptable supervision and approved by the Engineer in conformance with 4.1.2.1 64.2 Retesting Based on Quality of Work. When the quality of a qualified welder’s, welding operator's, or tack welder’s work appears to be below the requirements ‘of this code, the Inspector may require that the welder, ‘welding operator, or tack welder demonstrate an ability to produce sound welds by means of a simple test, such a the fillet weld break test, or by requiring complete requalification in conformance with Section 4, 64.3 Retesting Based on Qualification Expiration. ‘The Inspector shall require requalification of any quali- fied welder or welding operator who has not used the process (for which they are qualified) for a period ex- ‘ceeding six months (see 4.1.3.1). 6.5 Inspection of Work and Records 6.5.1 Size, Length, and Location of Welds. The In- spector shall make certain that the size, length, and loca- tion of all welds conform to the requitements of this code ‘and to the detail drawings and that no unspecified welds have been added without approval 65.2 WPS, The Inspector shall make certain that only WPSs are employed which meet the provisions of Sec- tion 3 or Section 4. 65.3 Electrode Classification and Usage. The Inspec- tor shall make certain that electrodes are used only in the positions and with the type of welding current and polar- ity for which they are classified. 6.54 Scope of Examinations. The Inspector shall, at suitable intervals, observe joint preparation, assembly practice, the welding techniques, and performance of each ‘welder, welding operator, and tack welder to make certain thatthe applicable requirements of this code are met. 655 Extent of Examination, The Inspector shall ex- ‘amine the work to make certain that it meets the require- ments of this code, Other acceptance criteria, different from those described in the code, may be used when ap- proved by the Engineer. Size and contour of welds shall ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 bbe measured with suitable gages. Visual inspection for cracks in welds and base metal and other discontinuities should be aided by a strong light, magnifiers, or such other devices as may be found helpful. 65.6 Inspector Identification of Inspections Per- formed. Inspectors shall identify with a distinguishing mark or other recording methods all parts or joints that they have inspected and accepted. Any recording method which is mutually agreeable may be used. Die stamping of cyclically loaded members without the approval of the Engineer shall be prohibited. 65.7 Maintenance of Records. The Inspector shall keep a record of qualifications of all welders, welding ‘operators, and tack welders; all WPS qualifications or other tests that are made; and such other information as may be required, Part B Contractor Responsil ities 6.6 Obligations of the Contractor 6.6.1 Contractor Responsibilities. The Contractor shall be responsible for visual inspection and necessary correction of all deficiencies in materials and workman- ship in conformance with the requirements of this code. 6.6.2 Inspector Requests. The Contractor shall comply ‘with all requests of the Inspector(s) to correct deficien- cies in materials and workmanship as provided in the contract documents. 66.3 Engineering Judgment. In the event that faulty ‘welding, or its removal for rewelding, damages the base ‘metal so that in the judgment of the Engineer its retention isnot in conformance with the intent of the contract doc- uments, the Contractor shall remove and replace the damaged base metal or shall compensate for the defi- ciency in a manner approved by the Enginecr. 6.64 Specified NDT Other than Visual. When NDT other than visual inspection is specified in the informa- tion furnished to bidders, it shall be the Contractor's re- sponsibility to ensure that all specified welds shall meet the quality requirements of Section 6, Part C, whichever is applicable, 646.5 Nonspecified NDT Other than Visual. If NDT other than visual inspection is not specified in the original contract agreement but is subsequently requested by the ‘Owner, the Contractor shall perform any requested testing or shall allow any testing to be performed in conformance PARTS A, B, &C 201 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION with 6.14. The Owner shall be responsible forall associ- ated costs including handling, surface preparation, NDT, and repair of discontinuities other than those described 69, whichever is applicable, at rates mutually agreeable between Owner and Contractor, However, if such testing should disclose an attempt to defraud oF gross nonconfor- ‘mance to this code, repair work shall be done at the Con- tractor's expense, Part C Acceptance Criteria 6.7 Scope Acceptance criteria for visual and NDT inspection of tubular connections and statically and cyclically loaded ‘nontubular connections are described in Part C. The ex- tent of examination and the acceptance criteria shall be specified in the contract documents on information fur- nished to the bidder. 6.8 Engineer’s Approval for Alternate Acceptance Criteria ‘The fundamental premise of the code is to provide ‘general stipulations applicable to most situations. Accep- tance criteria for production welds different fram those described in the code may be used for particular appli- cation, provided they are suitably documented by the proposer and approved by the Engineer. These alternate acceptance criteria may be based upon evaluation of sui ability for service using past experience, experimental ‘evidence or engineering analysis considering material type, service load effects, and environmental factors. 6.9 Visual Inspection All welds shall be visually inspected and shall be acceptable ifthe criteria of Table 6.1 are satisfied. 6.10 PT and MT ‘Welds that ate subject to MT and PT, in addition to visual inspection, shall be evaluated on the basis of the applicable requirements for visual inspection, The testing shall be performed in conformance with 6.14.4 or 6.14.5, whichever is applicable, ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION 6.11 NDT Except as provided for in 6.18, all NDT methods in- cluding equipment requirements and qualifications, per- sonnel qualifications, and operating methods shall be in conformance with Section 6, Inspection. Acceptance eri- teria shall be as described in this section. Welds subject to NDT shall have been found acceptable by visual spection in conformance with 6.9. For welds subject to NDT in conformance with 6.10, 6.11, 6.12.3, and 6.13.3, the testing may begin immedi ately after the completed welds have cooled to ambient temperature. Acceptance criteria for ASTM A S14, A 517, and A 709 Grade 100 and 100W steels shall be based on NDT performed not less than 48 hours after ‘completion of the welds. 6.11.1 Tubular Connection Requirements. For CIP ‘groove butt welds welded from one side without backing, the entire length of all completed tubular production welds shall be examined by either RT or UT, The acceptance criteria shall conform to 6.12.3 oF 6.13.3 as applicable. 6.12 RT ‘Welds shown by RT that do not meet the requirements of Part C, or alternate acceptance criteria per 6.8, shall be repaired in conformance with 5.26, Discontinuities other than cracks shal be evaluated on the basis of being either elongated or rounded, Regardless ofthe type of disconti- nuity, an elongated discontinuity shall be defined as one jn which its length exceeds three times its width. A rounded discontinuity shall be defined as one in which its length is three times its width or less and may be round or irregular and may have tail, 6.12.1 Acceptance Criteria for Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. 6.12.1.1 Discontinuities. Welds that are subject to RT in addition to visual inspection shall have no cracks and shall be unacceptable if the RT shows any discontinuities exceeding the following limitations (E= weld size). (1) Elongated discontinuities exceeding the maximum, size of Figure 6.1. 2) Discontinuities closer than the minimum clear~ ance allowance of Figure 6.1 (3) Rounded discontinuities greater than a maximum, of size of E/3, not to exceed 1/4 in, [6 mm]. However, ‘when the thickness is greater than 2 in, [SO mm. the max- imum rounded indication may be 3/8 in, [10 mm]. The ‘minimum clearance of this type of discontinuity greater than or equal to 3/32 in, (2.5 mm] to an acceptable elon- ‘gated or rounded discontinuity or to an edge or end of an PARTO 202 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 intersecting weld shall be three times the greatest dimen- sion of the larger of the discontinuities being considered (4) Isolated discontinuities such as a cluster of, rounded indications, having a sum of their greatest di- mensions exceeding the maximum size single disconti- ‘nuity allowed in Figure 6.1. The minimum clearance to another cluster or an elongated or rounded discontinuity ‘or o an edge or end of an intersecting weld shall be three times the greatest dimension of the larger of the disconti- nhuities being considered. (5) The sum of individual discontinuities each having ‘8 greater dimension of less than 3/32 in, (2.5 mm] shall not exceed 2/3 or 3/8 in. [10 mm], whichever is less, in any linear | in. [25 mm] of weld. This requirement is in- dependent of (1), (2), and (3) above. (6) Inline discontinuities, where the sum of the great- ‘est dimensions exceeds E in any length of 6E. When the length of the weld being examined is less than 6E, the allowable sum of the greatest dimensions shall be pro- portionally less, 6.12.1.2 Mlustration of Requirements. Figure 6.2 ‘and Figure 6.3 illustrate the application of the require- ‘ments given in 6.12.1.1 612.2 Acceptance Criteria for Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Connections. Welds that are subject to RT in addition to visual inspection shall have no eracks and shall be unacceptable if the RT shaws any of the types of discontinuities described in 6.1.2.1, 6.12.2.2, 6.12.23, 0r 6.12.24. 6.12.21 Tensile Stress Welds. For welds subject to tensile stress under any condition of loading, the greatest dimension of any porosity ot fusion-type discontinuity that is 1/16 in, [2 mm] or larger in greatest dimension shall not exceed the size, B, indicated in Figure 6.4, for the weld size involved, The distance from any porosity or fusion-type discon- tinuity described above to another such discontinuity, to ‘an edge, or to the toe or root of any intersecting flange- to-web weld shall be not less than the minimum clear- ance allowed, C, indicated in Figure 6.4, for the size of discontinuity under examination, 6.12.2.2 Compressive Stress Welds. For welds sub- ject to compressive stress only and specifically indicated as such on the design drawings, the greatest dimension of| Porosity or 2 fusiontype discontinuity that is 1/8 in {3 mm] or larger in greatest dimension shall not exceed the size, B, nor shall the space between adjacent disconti- nuities be less than the minimum clearance allowed, indicated by Figue 6.5 for the size of discontinuity ‘under examination. 6.12.23 Discontinuities Less than 1/16 Independent of the requirements of 6.12. (2 mm). 1 and ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 6.12.22, discontinuities having a greatest dimension of less than 1/16 in, [2 mm] shall be unacceptable if the sum Of their greatest dimensions exceeds 3/8 in. [10 mm] in any linear inch of weld. 6.12.24 Limitations. The limitations given by Fig- ures 6.4 and 6.5 for 1-1/2 in, (38 mm] weld size shall apply to all weld sizes greater than 1-1/2 in, [38 mm] thickness, 6.12.25 Annex V Mustration, Annex V illustrates the application of the requirements given in 6.12.2.1 6.12.3 Acceptance Criteria for Tubular Connections 6.12.3.1 Discontinuities. Welds that are subject to RT in addition to visual inspection shall have no cracks and shall be unacceptable if the RT shows any discontinuities exceeding the following limitations (E = weld size) (1) Elongated discontinuities exceeding the maximum, size of Figure 6.6. Q) Discontinuities closer than the minimum clear~ ance allowance of Figure 6.6, (3) At the intersection of a weld with another weld or a free edge (ie., an edge beyond which no material extension exists), acceptable discontinuities shall: (@) Conform to the limitations of Figure 6.6 for each individual weld (b) Conform to the intersecting weld limitations of Figure 6.6, Case [or TI, as applicable (4) Isolated discontinuities such as a cluster of rounded indications, having a sum of their greatest di- ‘mensions exceeding the maximum size single disconti- nuity allowed in Figure 6.6, The minimum clearance to another cluster or an elongated or rounded discontinuity ‘or to an edge or end of an intersecting weld shall be three times the greatest dimension of the larger of the disconti- nhuities being considered. (5) The sum of individual discontinuities each having, greater dimension of less than 3/32 in, (2.5 mm] shall not exceed 2E/3 oF 3/8 in, [10 mm], whichever is less, in any linear 1 in. (25 mm] of weld. This requirement is in- dependent of (1), (2), and (3) above, (6) In-line discontinuities, where the sum of the great- cst dimensions exceeds E in any length of 6E. When the length of the weld being examined is less than 6E, the allowable sum of the greatest dimensions shall be pro- portionally less 6.123.2 Mustration, Figures 6.2 and 633 illustrate the application of the requirements given in 6.12.31 6.13 UT 6.13.1 Acceptance Criteria for Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections. The acceptance criteria for PARTO 203 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION welds subject to UT in addition to visual inspection shall meet the requirements of Table 6.2. For CIP websto- flange welds, acceptance of discontinuities detected by scanning movements other than scanning pattern “E” (see 632.22) may be based on weld thickness equal to the actual web thickness plus 1 in, [25 mm]. Discontinities detected by scanning pattern “shall be evaluated to the criteria of Table 6.2 for the actual web thickness. When CIP web-to-flange welds are subject t calculated tensile siress normal to the weld, they should be so designated ‘on the design drawing and shall conform to the requi ments of Table 62. Ultasonically tested welds are evalu- ated on the basis ofa discontinuity reflecting ultrasound in proportion to its effect on the integrity of the weld. In- dications of discontinuities that remain on the display as the search unit is moved towards and away from the continuity (Scanning movement “b") may be indicative ‘of planar discontinuities with significant through-throat dimension, Since the major reflecting surface of the most critical discontinuities is oriented a minimum of 20° (for a 70° search unit) to 45° (for a 45° search unit) from perpen- dicular to the sound beam, amplitude evaluation (dB rating) does not allow reliable disposition. When indica- tions exhibiting these planar characteristics are present at scanning sensitivity, a more detailed evaluation of the discontinuity by other means shall be required (c.g. alternate UT techniques, RT, grinding or gouging for vi- sual inspection, etc.) 6.13.2 Acceptance Criteria for Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Connections. The acceptance criteria for Welds subject to UT in addition to visual inspection shall ‘meet the following requirements: (1) Welds subject to tensile stress under any condition ‘of loading shall conform to the requirements of Table 63. (2) Welds subject to compressive stress shall conform, to the requirements of Table 6.2, 6.13.21 Indications. Ultrasonically tested welds are evaluated on the basis of a discontinuity reflecting ult sound in proportion to its effect on the integrity of the weld. Indications of discontinuities that remain on the display as the search unit is moved towards and away from the discontinuity (scanning movement “b") may be indicative of planar discontinuities with significant through throat dimension. As the orientation of such di continuities, relative to the sound beam, deviates from the perpendicular, 4B ratings which do not allow direct, reliable evaluation of the welded joint integrity may sult, When indications that exhibit these planar char- acteristics are present at scanning sensitivity, a more detailed evaluation of the discontinuity by other means ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION may be required (eg grinding, or gouging for vi alternate UT techniques, RT, isual inspection, ee.) 6.132.2 Scanning. CIP web-to-flange welds shall conform to the requirements of Table 6.2, and acceptance for discontinuities detected by scanning movements other than scanning pattem *E’ (see 6.32.2.2) may be based on a weld thickness equal to the actual web thick- ness plus 1 in, (25 mm]. Discontinuities detected by scanning pattern ‘E® shall be evaluated to the criteria of 6.13.2 for the actual web thickness, When such web-to- flange welds are subject to calculated tensile stress nor- ‘mal to the weld, they shall be so designated on design drawings and shall conform to the requirements of Table 63. 6.13.3 Acceptance Criteria for Tubular Connections. Acceptance criteria for UT shall be as provided in con- tract documents, Class R ot Class X, or both, may be in- corporated by reference. Amplitude based acceptance criteria as given by 6.13.1 may also be used for groove ‘welds in butt joints in tubing 24 in, [600 mm] in diameter and over, provided all relevant provisions of Section 6, Part F, are followed. However, these amplitude criteria shall not be applied to tubular T-, Y-, and K-connections. 6.13.3.1 Class R (Applicable When UT is Used as an Alternate to RT). All indications having one-half (6 4B) or less amplitude than the standard sensitivity level (with due regard for 6.27.6) shall be disregarded. Indications exceeding the disregard level shall be evalu- ated as follows: (1) Isolated random spherical reflectors, with 1 in [25 mm] minimum separation upto the standard senstiv- ity level shall be accepted, Larger reflectors shall he eval- uated as linear reflectors, () Aligned spherical reflectors shall be evalusted as, linear reflectors, 3) Clustered spherical reflectors having a density of ‘more than one per square inch [645 square millimeters] with indications above the disregard levels (projected area normal to the direction of applied stress, averaged over a6 in, [150 mm] length of weld) shall be rejected (4) Linear or planar reflectors whose lengths (extent) exceed the limits of Figure 6.7 shall be rejected. Addition- ally, root reflectors shall not exceed the limits of Class X. 6133.2 Class X_ (Experience-Based, Fitness: for-Purpose Criteria Applicable to T-, Y-, and K- Connections in Redundant Structures with Notch- ‘Tough Weldments). All indications having half (6 dB) cr less amplitude than the standard sensitivity level (vith due regard for 6.27.6) shall be disregarded. Indica- tions exceeding the disregard level shall be evaluated as follows: PARTS. C&D. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 (1) Spherical reflectors shall be as described in Class R, except that any indications within the following limits for linear or planar shall be acceptable. (2) Linear or planar reflectors shall be evaluated by means of beam boundary techniques, and those whose dimensions exceeded the limits of Figure 6.8 shall be re- jected. The root area shall be defined as that lying within 1/4 in, (6 mm] ort, /4, whichever is greater, ofthe root of the theoretical weld, as shown in Figure 3.8. Part D NDT Procedures 6.14 Procedures ‘The NDT procedures as described in this code have been in use for many years and provide reasonable assur- ance of weld integrity; however, it appears that some users of the code incorrectly consider each method capa ble of detecting all unacceptable discontinuities. Users of the code should become familiar with all the limitations of NDT methods to be used, particularly the inability to detect and characterize planar discontinuities with spe- cifie orientations. (The limitations and complementary use of each method are explained in the latest edition of AWS BI.10, Guide for Nondestructive Inspection of Welds.) 6.14.1 RE. When RT is used, the procedure and tech- nique shall be in conformance with Part E of this section, 6.14.2 Radiation Imaging Systems. When examination is performed using radiation imaging systems, the proce- ‘dures and techniques shall be in conformance with Part Goof this section 6.143 UT. When UT is used, the procedure and tech- ‘nique shall be in conformance with Part F of this section. 6.14.4 MT. When MT is used, the procedure and tech- ‘nique shall be in conformance with ASTM E 709, and the standard of acceptance shall be in conformance with Section 6, Part C, of this code, whichever is applicable. 6.14. PT. For detecting discontinuities that are open to the surface, PT may be used, The standard methods set forth in ASTM E 165 shall be used for PT inspection, and the standards of acceptance shall be in conformance with Section 6, Part C, of this code, whichever is applicable. 6.14.6 Personnel Qualification 6146.1 ASNT Requirements. Personnel perform- ing NDT other than visual shall be qualified in conform- ‘ance withthe current edition of the American Society for Nondestructive Testing Recommended Practice No. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 SNT-TC-1A.! Individuals who perform NDT shall be qualified for 1) NDT Level Il, or 2) NDT Level I working under the NDT Level If 6.14.62 Certification. Certification of Level 1 and. Level IT individuals shall be performed by a Level IIT in- dividual who has been certified by (1) The American Society for Nondestructive Testing, or (2) has the educa- tion, training, experience, and has successfully passed the written examination described in SNT-TC-1A. 6.14.63 Exemption of QC1 Requirements, Person- nel performing NDT under the provisions of 6.14.6 need not be qualified and certified under the provisions of AWS QC1 6.15 Extent of Testing Information furnished to the bidders shall clearly identify the extent of NDT (types, categories, ot loca- tion) of welds to be tested. 6.15.1 Full Testing, Weld joints requiring testing by contract specification shall be tested for their full length, unless partial or spot testing is specified, 6.15.2 Partial Testing, When partial testing is specified, the location and lengths of welds or categories of weld to be tested shall be clearly designated in the contract documents 6.1523 Spot Testing, When spot testing is specified, the number of spots in each designated category of welded joint o be tested in a stated length of weld or a desig- hated segment of weld shall be included in the infor- mation furnished to the bidders. Each spot test shall cover at least 4 in, [100 mm] of the weld length. When spot testing reveals indications of rejectable discontinui- ties that require repair, the extent of those discontinuities shall be explored. Two additional spots in the same seg- ‘ment of weld joint shall be taken at locations away from the original spot. The location of the additional spots shall be agreed upon between the Contractor and the ver- ification Inspector. ‘When either of the two additional spots show defects, that require repair, the entire segment of weld repre- sented by the original spot shall be completely tested. If the weld involves more than one segment, two additional spots in each segment shall be tested at locations agreed upon by the Contractor and the verification Inspector, subject tothe foregoing interpretation, 1. Available from the American Society for Nondestructive ‘esting, 4153 Arfingate Plaza, Columbus, OH 43228. PARTS D&E 205 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION 6.184 Relevant Information. NDT personnel shall, prior to testing, be furnished or have access to relevant information regarding weld joint geometries, material thicknesses, and welding processes used in making the ‘weldment. NDT personnel shall be apprised of any sub- sequent repairs to the weld. Part E Radiographic Testing (RT) 6.16 RT of Groove Welds in Butt Joints 6.16.1 Procedures and Standards. The procedures and standards set forth in Part E shall govern RT of welds ‘when such inspection is required by the contract docu- ments as provided in 6.14. The requirements described herein are specifically for testing groove welds in butt joints in plate, shapes, and bars by X-ay or gamma-ray sources. The methodology shall conform to ASTM E 94, Standard Recommended Practice for Radiographic Test ing, ASTM E142, Standard Method for Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing, ASTM E 747, Controlling Quality of Radiographic Testing Using Wire Penetrame- ters, and ASTM E 1032, Radiographic Examination of Weldmens, 6.162 Variations. Variations in testing procedures, ‘equipment, and acceptance standards may be used upon ‘agreement between the Contractor and the Owner. Such ‘variations include, but are not limited to, the following: RT of fillet, T, and comer welds; changes in source-to- film distance; unusual application of film; unusual hole- type or wire-type image quality indicators (IQ) applica tions (including film side 1QD; and RT of thicknesses, sgeater than 6 in, [150 mm] film types, densities, and vari~ ations in exposure, development, and viewing techniques. 6.17 RT Procedures 617.1 Procedure. Radiographs shall be made using a single source of either X- or gamma radiation. The radio- ‘graphic sensitivity shall be judged based on hole-type image or wire IQIs, Radiographic technique and equip- ‘ment shall provide sufficient sensitivity to clearly delin- ‘ete the required hole-type IQIs and the essential holes or ‘wires as deseribed in 6.17.7, Tables 6.4 and 6.5, and Fig- ures 6.9 and 6,10. Identifying letters and numbers shall show clearly inthe radiograph, 6.17.2 Safety Requirements. RT shall be performed in ‘conformance with all applicable safety requirements ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION 6.17.3 Removal of Reinforcement. When the contract documents require the removal of weld reinforcement, the welds shall be prepared for RT by grinding as deseribed in 5.244.1. Other weld surfaces need not be ground or “otherwise smoothed for purposes of RT unless surface ir- regularities or the junction between weld and base metal may cause objectionable weld discontinuities to be ob- scured in the radiograph. 6.17.3.1 Tabs. Weld tabs shall be removed prior to RT unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 6.1732 Steel Backing. When required by 5.10 ot other provisions of the contract dacuments, steel backing shall be removed, and the surface shall be finished flush by grinding prior to RT. Grinding shall be as described in 5.24.41 6.1733 Reinforcement. When weld reinforcement ‘or backing, or both, is not removed, or wire 1QT alternate placement is not used, steel shims which extend at least V8 in, [3 mm] beyond three sides of the required hole- type IOI or wire 1QT shall be placed under the hole-type 101 or wire IQF, so that the total thickness of steel be- tween the hole-type IQI and the film is approximately equal to the average thickness of the weld measured through its reinforcement and backing. 6.174 Radiographic Film, Radiographic film shall be as described in ASTM E94, Lead fil screens shall be used as described in ASTM E94, Fluorescent screens shall be prohibited, 6.175 Technique. Radiographs shall be made with a single source of radiation centered as near as practicable ‘with respect to the length and width of that portion of the weld being examined. 6.17.8.1 Geometric Unsharpness. Gamma ray sources, regardless of size, shall be capable of meeting the geometric unsharpness limitation of ASME Boiler ‘and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, Article 6175.2 Source-to-Subject Distance. The sousce-to- subject distance shall not be less than the total length of film being exposed in a single plane, This provision shall not apply to panoramic exposures made under the provi sions of 6.16.2. 6.1753 Source-to-Subject Distance Limitations. ‘The source-to-subject distance shall not be less than seven times the thickness of weld plus reinforcement and backing, if any, nor such that the inspecting radiation shall penetrate any portion of the weld represented in the radiograph at an angle greater than 26-1/2° from a line normal to the weld surface. 6.17.6 Sources. X-ray units, 600 kVp maximum, and iridium 192 may be used as a source for all RT provided PARTE 206 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 they have adequate penetrating ability. Cobalt 60 shall only be used as a radiographic source when the steel being radiographed exceeds 2-1/2 in. [65 mm] in thie ness. Other radiographic sources shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 6.17.7 IQI Selection and Placement. 1QIs shall be se- Tected and placed on the weldment in the area of interest being radiographed as shown in Table 6.6. 6.178 Technique. Welded joints shall be radiographed ‘and the film indexed by methods that will provide com- plete and continuous inspection of the joint within the limits specified to be examined. Joint limits shall show clearly in the radiographs. Short film, short screens, ex- cessive undercut by scattered radiation, or any other process that obscures portions of the total weld length shall render the radiograph unacceptable, 6178.1 Film Length, Film shall have sufficient length and shall be placed to provide at least 1/2 in, [12 mm] of film beyond the projected edge of the weld, 6.17.2 Overlapping Film. Welds longer than 14 in, [350 mm] may be radiographed by overlapping film cas- settes and making a single exposure, ot by using single film cassettes and making separate exposures. The provi- sions of 6.17.5 shall apply. 6.1783 Backscatter. To check for backscatter radi tion, a lead symbol “B,” 1/2 in, [12 mm] high, 1/16 in, [2 mm] thick shall be attached to the back of each film cassette Ifthe “B” image appears on the radiograph, the radiograph shall be considered unacceptable. 6.17.9 Film Width. Film widths shall be sufficient to de- pict all portions of the weld joint, including the HAZs, and shall provide sufficient additional space for the required hole-type IQs or wite IQI and film identification without fringing upon the area of interest in the radiograph, 6.17.10 Quality of Radiographs. All radiographs shall be free from mechanical, chemical, or other blemishes to the extent that they cannot mask ot be confused with the image of any discontinuity in the area of interest in the radiograph. Such blemishes include, but are not limited to the following: (1) fogging (2) processing defects such as streaks, water marks, ‘or chemical stains (3) scratches, finger marks, erimps, dirtiness, static marks, smudges, or tears (4) loss of detail due to poor sereen-to-film contact (5) false indications due to defective sereens or inter- ral faults 6.17.11 Density Limitations. The transmitted film den- sity through the radiographic image of the body ofthe re- ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 quired hole-type IQI(3) and the area of interest shall be 18 minimum for single film viewing for radiographs ‘made with an X-ray souree and 2.0 minimum for radio- ‘graphs made with a gamma-ray source, For composite viewing of double film exposures, the minimum density shall be 2.6. Each radiograph of a composite set shall have a minimum density of 1.3. The maximum density shall be 4.0 for either single or composite viewing, 6.17.11.1 H & D Density. The density measured shall be H & D density (radiographic density), which is @ ‘measure of film blackening, expressed as: D=log 1/1 where: D = H&D (radiographic) density L T light intensity on the film, and Tight transmitted through the film, 6.17.11.2 Transitions. When weld transitions in thickness are radiographed and the ratio of the thickness Of the thicker section to the thickness of the thinner sec- tion is 3 or greater, radiographs should be exposed to produce single film densities of 3.0 to 4.0 in the thinner section, When this is done, the minimum density require- ments of 6.17.11 shall be waived unless otherwise pro- vvided in the contract documents 6.17.12 Identification Marks. A radiograph identi fication mark and two location identification marks shall be placed on the steel at each radiograph location. A corresponding radiograph identification mark and two location identification marks, all of which shall show in the radiograph, shall be produced by placing lead num- bers or letters, or both, over each of the identical identfi- cation and location marks made on the steel to provide a means for matching the developed radiograph to the ‘weld, Additional identification information may be pre- printed no less than 3/4 in, [20 mm] from the edge of the ‘weld or shall be produced on the radiograph by placing lead figures on the stel. Information required to show on the radiograph shall include the Owner's contract identi fication, initials of the RT company, initials of the fabri- cator, the fabricator shop order number, the radiographic identification mark, the date, and the weld repair number, if applicable. 6.17.13 Edge Blocks. Edge blocks shall be used when radiographing butt welds greater than 1/2 in. (12 mm] thickness. The edge blocks shall have a length sufficient to extend beyond each side of the weld centerline for a ‘minimum distance equal to the weld thickness, but no less than 2 in. (50 mm], and shall have a thickness equal to or greater than the thickness of the weld. The mini- mum width of the edge blocks shall be equal to half the ‘weld thickness, but not less than I in. [25 mm]. The edge PARTE 207 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION blocks shall be centered on the weld against the plate being radiographed, allowing no more than 1/16 in, [2 mm] gap for the minimum specified length of the ‘edge blocks. Edge blocks shall be made of radiograp! ically clean steel and the surface shall have a finish of ANSI 125 pin. [3 jim) or smoother (see Figure 6.15). 6.18 Supplementary RT Requirements for Tubular Connections 6.18.1 Circumferential Groove Welds in Butt Joints. The technique used to radiograph circumferential butt joints shall be capable of covering the entire circum- ference. The technique shall preferably be single-wall exposure’single-wall view. Where accessibility or pipe size prohibits this, the technique may be double-wall ‘exposure/single-wall view or double-wall exposure/double- wall view. 6.18.11 Single-Wall Exposure/Single-Wall_ View. ‘The source of radiation shall be placed inside the pipe ‘and the film on the outside of the pipe (see Figure 6.16). Panoramic exposure may be made if the source-to-object, requirements are satisfied; if not, a minimum of three ex- posures shall be made. The IQI may be selected and placed on the source side of the pipe. Ifnot practicable, it ‘may be placed on the film side of the pipe. 6.18.1.2 Double-Wall Exposure/Single-Wall View. Where access or geometrical conditions prohibit single~ ‘wall exposure, the source may be placed on the outside ‘of the pipe and film on the opposite wall outside the pipe (see Figure 6.17). A minimum of three exposures shall be required to cover the complete circumference. The IQI may be selected and placed on the film side of the Pipe. 6.18.1.3 Double-Wall Exposure/Double-Wall View. When the outside diameter of the pipe is 3-1/2 in, [90 mm] or less, both the source side and film side weld ‘may be projected onto the film and both walls viewed for acceptance, The source of radiation shall be offset from the pipe by a distance that is at least seven times the out- side diameter. The radiation beam shall be offset from the plane of the weld centerline at an angle sufficient t0 separate the images of the source side and film side ‘welds. There shall be no overlap of the two zone inter- preted. A minimum of two exposures 90° to each other shall be required (see Figure 6.18). The weld may also be radiographed by superimposing the two welds, in which case there shall be a minimum of three exposures 60° to each other (see Figure 6.19). In each of these two ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION techniques, the IQI shall be placed on the source side of the pipe 6.19 Examination, Report, and Disposition of Radiographs 6.19.1 Equipment Provided by Contractor. The Con- ‘tractor shall provide a suitable variable intensity illumi- nator (viewer) with spot review or masked spot review capability. The viewer shall incorporate a means for ad- justing the size of the spot under examination, The ‘viewer shall have sufficient capacity to properly illumi- nate radiographs with an H & D density of 4.0, Film re- ‘view shall be done in an area of subdued light. 6.19.2 Reports, Before a weld subject to RT by the Con- tractor for the Owner is accepted, all of its radiographs, including any that show unacceptable quality prior to re- pair, and 2 report interpreting them shall be submitted to the verification Inspector. 6.19.3 Record Retention, full set of radiographs for ‘welds subject to RT by the Contractor for the Qwner, in- cluding any that show unacceptable quality prior to re- pair, shall be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the work. The Contractor's obligation to retain radio- _graphs shall cease: (1) upon delivery of this full set to the Owner, or (2) one full year after the completion of the Contractor's work, provided the Owner is given prior vwritten notice. Part F Ultrasonic Testing (UT) of Groove Welds 6.20 General 6.20.1 Procedures and Standards. The procedures and standards set frth in Part F shall gover the UT of groove welds and HAZs between the thicknesses of 5/16 in, and 8 in, {8 mm and 200 mm} inclusive, when such testing is required by 6.14 of this code. For thicknesses less than 5/16 in, (8 mm] or greater than 8 in. (200 mm}, testing shall be performed in conformance with Annex K. These procedures and standards shall be prohibited for testing tube-to-tube T-, Y> or K-connections. 6.20.2 Variations, Annex K is an example of an altena- tive technique for performing UT examination of groove welds. Variations in testing procedure, equipment, and acceptance standards not included in Part F of Section 6 may be used upon agreement with the Engineer. Such PARTS E 6 F 208 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ‘variations include other thicknesses, weld geometries, transducer sizes, frequencies, couplant, painted surface testing techniques, ete. Such approved variations shall be recorded in the contract records 6.203 Piping Porosity. To detect possible piping poros- ity, RT is recommended to supplement UT of ESW or EGW welds. 6.204 Base Metal. These procedures are not intended to be employed for the procurement testing of base met- als, However, welding related discontinuities (cracking, lamellar tearing, delaminations, etc.) in the adjacent base metal which would not be acceptable under the provi- sions of this code shall be reported to the Engineer for disposition 6.21 Qualification Requirements In satisfying the requirements of 6.14.6, the qualifica- tion of the UT operator shall include a specific and prac- tical examination which shall be based on the requirements of this code, This examination shall require the UT operator to demonstrate the ability to apply the rules ofthis code in the accurate detection and disposition of discontinuities. 6.22 UT Equipment 6.22.1 Equipment Requirements. The UT instrument shall be the pulse echo type suitable for use with trans~ ducers oscillating at frequencies between 1 and 6 mega- hertz. The display shall be an “A” scan rectified video trace. 6.22.2 Horizontal Linearity. The horizontal linearity of the test instrument shall be qualified over the full sound- path distance to be used in testing in conformance with 630.1 6.22.3 Requirements for ‘Test Instruments. Test in- struments shall include internal stabilization so that after ‘warm-up, no variation in response greater than +1 dB ‘occurs with a supply voltage change of 15% nominal or, in the case of a battery, throughout the charge operating life, There shall be an alarm or meter to signal a drop in battery voltage prior to instrument shutoff due to battery exhaustion, 6224 Calibration of Test Instruments. The test in- strument shall have a calibrated gain control (attenuator) adjustable in discrete 1 or 2 dB steps aver a range of at Teast 60 dB. The accuracy of the attenuator settings shall be within plus or minus 1 dB. The procedure for qualifi- cation shall be as described in 6.24.2 and 6.30.2, ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 6.225 Display Range. The dynamic range of the instru- ‘ments display shall be such that a difference of 1 dB of amplitude can be easily detected on the display. 622.6 Straight-Beam (Longitudinal Wave) Search Units. Straight-beam (longitudinal wave) search unit transducers shall have an active area of not less than 1/2 square inches (323 square millimeters} nor more than 1 square inch (645 square millimeters}. The transducer shall be round or squate. Transducers shall be capable of resolving the three reflections as described in 6.29.1.3 6.22.7 Angle-Beam Search Units. Angle-beam search its shall consist of a transducer and an angle wedge. ‘The unit may be comprised of the two separate elements ‘or may be an integral unit. 6.22.7.1 Frequency. The transducer frequency shall be between 2 and 2.5 MHz, inclusive, 6.22.12 Transducer Dimensions. The transducer crystal shall be square or rectangular in shape and may vary from $/8 in, to Tin, [15 to 25 mm] in width and from 5/8 to 13/6 in, [15 to 20 mm] in height (see Figure 6.20). ‘The maximum width to height ratio shall be 1.2 to 1.0, and the minimum width-to-height ratio shall be 1.0 to 1.0. 622.73 Angles. The search unit shall produce a sound beam in the material being tested within plus or ‘minus 2° of one of the following proper angles: 70°, 60°, (or 45°, as described in 6.29.22. 6.22.74 Marking. Each search unit shall be marked to clearly indicate the frequency of the transducer, nomi- nal angle of refraction, and index point. The index point location procedure is described in 6.29.2.1 6.2.75 Internal Reflections. Maximum allowable intemal reflections from the search unit shall be as de- scribed in 6,243, 6.22.7.6 Edge Distance. The dimensions of the search unit shall be such that the distance from the lead ing edge ofthe search unit to the index point shall not ex- ceed 1 in, [25 mm], 6.2.7.7 IW Block. The qualification procedure using the ITW reference block shall be in conformance ‘with 6.29,2.6 and as shown in Figure 6.21 6.23 Reference Standards 623.1 IW Standard. The Intemational Institute of Welding (IIW) UT reference block, shown in Figure 6.22, shall be the standard used for both distance and sensitivity calibration, Other portable blocks may be used, provided the reference level sensitivity for instrument! PARTE ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION search unit combination shall be adjusted to be the equiv- alent of that achieved with the ITW Block (see Annex X, for examples). 6.23.2 Prohibited Reflectors, The use of a “comer” re- flector for calibration purposes shall be prohibited, 6.233 Resolution Requirements. The combination of search unit and instrument shall resolve three holes in the RC resolution reference test block shown in Figure 6.23. The search unit position is described in 6,29.2.5. The 1es- ‘olution shall be evaluated with the instrument controls set at normal test settings and with indications fiom the holes brought to midscreen height. Resolution shall be sufficient to distinguish at least the peaks of indications from the three holes, Use of the RC resolution reference block for calibration shall be prohibited. Each combina- tion of instrument search unit (shoe and transducer) shall be checked prior to its initial use. This equipment verifi- cation shall be done initially with each search unit and UT unit combination. The verification need not be done ‘again provided documentation is maintained that records the following items: (1) UT machine’s make, model and serial number (2) Search unit’s manufacturer, type, size, angle, and serial number (3) Date of verification and technician’s name ication 6.24 Equipment Qua 624.1 Horizontal Linearity. The horizontal linearity ‘ofthe test instrument shall be requalified after each 40 hours of instrument use in each of the distance ranges thatthe instrument will be used. The qualification proce- dure shall be in conformance with 6.30.1 (see Annex X, for alternative method). 624.2 Gain Control. The instrument's gain control (attenuator) shall meet the requitements of 6.22.4 and shall be checked for correct calibration at two month in- tervals in conformance with 6.30.2. Altemative methods may be used for calibrated gain control (attenuator) qual- ification if proven at least equivalent with 6.30.2. 6243 Internal Reflections. Maximum internal reflec- tions from each search unit shall be verified at a maxi- ‘mum time interval of 40 hours of instrument use in conformance with 6.30.3, 6244 Calibration of Angle-Beam Search Units. With the use of an approved calibration block, each angle- beam search unit shall be checked after each eight hours of use to determine that the contact face is flat, that the sound entry point is correct, and that the beam angle is within the allowed plus or minus 2° tolerance in ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION conformance with 6.29.2.1 and 6.29.2.2. Search units which do not meet these requirements shall be corrected or replaced. 6.25 Calibration for Testing 6.8.1 Position of Reject Control. All calibrations and tests shall be made with the reject (clipping or suppres- sion) control tuned off. Use of the reject (clipping or suppression) control may alter the amplitude linearity of the instrument and invalidate test results, 625.2 Technique. Calibration for sensitivity and horizon- tal sweep (distance) shall be made by the UT operator just prior to and at the location of testing of each weld 625.3 Recalibration, Recalibration shall be made after a change of operators, each 30 minute maximum time interval, or when the electrical circuitry is disturbed in any way which includes the following: (1) Transducer change (2) Battery change (3) Electrical outlet change (4) Coaxial cable change (5) Power outage (failure) 6.28.4 Straight-Beam Testing of Base Metal. Calibra- tion for straight-beam testing of base metal shall be made ‘ith the search unit applied fo Face A of the base metal and performed as follows: 6.28.4.1 Sweep. The horizontal sweep shall be ad- jjusted for distance calibration to present the equivalent of at least two plate thicknesses on the display. 6.28.4.2 Sensitivity. The sensitivity shall be adjusted at a Tocation free of indications so that the first back reflection from the far side of the plate will be 50% to 75% of full screen height. 6285 Calibration for Angle-Beam Testing. Calibra- tion for angle-beam testing shall be performed as follows (see Annex X, X24 for altemative method). 6285.1 Horizontal Sweep. The horizontal sweep shall be adjusted to represent the actual sound:path dis- tance by using the IIW block or altemative blocks as de- scribed in 6.23.1. The distance calibration shall be made using either the 5 in. [125 mm scale or 10 in, (250 mm] scale on the display, whichever is appropriate. If, how- ver, the joint configuration or thickness prevents fall ex- amination of the weld at either of these settings, the distance calibration shall be made using 15 in. oF 20 in [400 mm or 500 mm] scale as required. The search unit position is described in 6.29.23. PARTE 210 ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Note: The horizontal location of all sereen indications is ‘based on the location at which the left side of the trace deflection breaks the horizontal base line. 6255.2 Zero Reference Level. The zero reference Tevel sensitivity used for discontinuity evaluation (*b” on the ultrasonic test report, Annex D, Form D-11) shall be attained by adjusting the calibrated gain contro (attenus- tor) ofthe discontinuity detector, meeting the requirements ‘of 6.22, so that a maximized horizontal trace deflection {adjusted to horizontal reference line height with cali- brated gain control [attenuator] results on the display, in conformance with 6.29,2.4 6.26 Testing Procedures 6.26.1 “X” Line, An “X" line for discontinuity location shall be marked on the test face of the weldment in a direction parallel to the weld axis. The location distance perpendicular to the weld axis shall be based on the di ‘mensional figures on the detail drawing and usually falls ‘on the centerline of the butt joint welds, and always falls ‘on the near face ofthe connecting member of T and comer joint welds (the face opposite Face C). 6.26.2 “Y” Line, A “Y" accompanied with a weld iden- tification number shall be cleatly marked on the base ‘metal adjacent to the weld that is subject to UT. This ‘marking is used for the following purposes: (1) Weld identification (2) Identification of Face A (3) Distance measurements and direction (+ of ~) from the “X" line (4) Location measurement from weld ends or edges 6.263 Cleanliness. All surfaces to which a search unit is applied shall be free of weld spatter, dirt, grease, oil (other than that used as a couplant, paint, and loose seale ‘and shall have a contour allowing intimate coupling. 6.264 Couplants. A couplant material shall be used be- ‘oween the search unit and the test material, The couplant shall be either glycerin or cellulose gum and water mix- ture of a suitable consistency. A wetting agent may be added if needed. Light machine oil may be used for cou- plant on calibration blocks. 6.265 Extent of Testing. The entire base metal through which ultrasound must travel to test the weld shall be tested for laminar reflectors using a straight-beam search ‘unit conforming to the requirements of 6.22.6 and cali- brated in conformance with 6.25.4, If any area of base ‘metal exhibits total loss of back reflection or an indica- tion equal to or greater than the original back reflection height is located in a position that will interfere with the ‘normal weld scanning procedure, its size, location, and ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 depth from the A face shall be determined and reported (on the UT report, and an alternate weld scanning proce- dure shall be used 6.26.5.1 Reflector Size. The reflector size evaluation procedure shall be in conformance with 6.31.1 6.26.5. Inaccessibility. If part of a weld is inacces- sible to testing in conformance with the requirements of Table 6.7, due to laminar content recorded in conform- ance with 6.26.5, the testing shall be conducted using fone or more of the following alternative procedures as necessary to atin full weld coverage: (2) Weld surface(s) shall be ground flush in conform ance with 5.24.41 (2) Testing from Faces A and B shall be performed, 3) Other search unit angles shall be used. 6.26.6 Testing of Welds. Welds shall be tested using an angle beam search unit conforming to the requirements (of 6.22.7 with the instrument calibrated in conformance ‘with 6.25.5 using the angle as shown in Table 6.7. Fol- owing calibration and during testing, the only instru- ment adjustment allowed is the sensitivity level adjustment with the calibrated gain control (attenuator). The reject (clipping or suppression) control shall be tumed off. Sensitivity shall be increased from the refer- tence level for weld scanning in conformance with Table 6.2 oF 6.3, as applicable, 6.26.6.1 Seanning. The testing angle and scanning procedure shall be in conformance with those shown in Table 6.7. 6.26.62 Butt Joints, All butt joint welds shall be tested from each side of the weld axis. Comer and ‘T-joint welds shall be primarily tested from one side of the weld axis only, All welds shall be tested using the ap- plicable scanning pattern or patterns shown in Figure 6.24 as necessary to detect both longitudinal and trans- verse discontinuities. It is intended that, as 4 minimum, all welds be tested by passing sound through the entire volume of the weld and the HAZ in two crossing direc- tions, wherever practical 6.26.63 Maximum Indication, When a discontinu- ity indication appears on the screen, the maximum attain- able indication from the discontinuity shall be adjusted to produce a horizontal reference level trace deflection on the display. This adjustment shall be made with the cai brated gain control (attenuator), and the instrument read- ing in decibels shall be used as the “Indication Level, a, for calculating the “Indication Rating, 4,” as shown on the test report (Annex D, Form D-11) 6.26.64 Attenuation Factor. The “Attenuation Fac- tor, ¢." on the tet report shall be attained by subtracting 1 in, [25 mm] from the sound-path distance and mult PARTE ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION plying the remainder by 2. This factor shall be rounded ‘out (0 the nearest dB value. Fractional values less than 1/2 dB shall be reduced to the lower dB level and those of 1/2 4B or greater increased to the higher level. 6.26.65 Indication Rating. The “Indication Rating, 4d," in the UT Report, Annex D, Form D-11, represents the algebraic difference in decibels between the indie: tion level and the reference level with correction for at- tenuation as indicated in the following expressions: Instruments with gain in dB: a-b-end Instruments with attenuation in dB boa 6.26.7 Length of Discontinuities. The length of discon- tinuities shall be determined in conformance with the procedure described in 6.31.2. 6.268 Basis for Acceptance or Rejection. Each weld discontinuity shall be accepted or rejected on the basis of its indication rating and its length, in conformance with ‘Table 6.2 for statically loaded structures or Table 6.3 for cyclically loaded structures, whichever is applicable. ‘Only those discontinuities which are rejectable need be recorded on the test report, except that for welds desig- nated in the contract documents as being “Fracture Criti- cal,” acceptable ratings that are within 6 4B, inclusive, of the minimum rejectable rating shall be recorded on the test report 6.269) Identification of Rejected Area. Each rejectable discontinuity shall be indicated on the weld by a mark directly over the discontinuity for its entire length. The depth from the surface and indication rating shall be noted on nearby base metal 6.26.10 Repair, Welds found unacceptable by UT shall be repaired by methods allowed by 5.26 of this code. Re- paired areas shall be retested ultrasonically with results tabulated on the original form (if available) or additional report forms. 6.26.11 Retest Reports. Evaluation of retested repaired ‘weld areas shall be tabulated on a new line on the report form. If the original report form is used, an R1, R’ Ra shall prefix the indication number. If additional report forms are used, the R number shall prefix the report ‘number. 6.26.12 Steel Backing, UT of CIP groove welds with steel backing shall be performed with a UT procedure that recognizes potential reflectors created by the base metal-backing interface (See Commentary 6.26.12 for additional guidance scanning groove welds containing steel backing) ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION 6.27 UT of Tubular K-Connectior ‘The UT requirements of this section represent the state ofthe art available for examination of tubular struc- tures, especially , ¥-, and K- connections. Height de- termination of elongated reflectors with a dimension (H) Jess than the beam height (see Figure 6.8) is considerably Jess accurate than length determination where the reflec- tors extend beyond the beam boundaries, and requires ‘more attention in regards to procedure qualification and approval, and in the training and certification of UT operators, 6.27. Procedure. All UT shall be in conformance with a written procedure which has been prepared or approved by an individual qualified as SNT-TC-1A, Level III, and experienced in UT of tubular structures. The procedure shall be based upon the requirements of this section and Section 6, Part F, as applicable. Prior to use on proxluc- tion welds, the procedure and acceptance criteria shall be approved by the Engineer, and personnel shall have been successfully qualified in conformance with 6.27.2. The procedure shall contain, as a minimum, the following in- formation regarding the UT method and techniques: (1) The type of weld joint configuration to be exam- ined (ie., the applicable range of diameter, thickness, and local dihedral angle). Conventional techniques are generally limited to diameters of 12-3/4 in, [325 mm] and larger, thicknesses of 1/2 in. [12 mm] and above, and local dinedral angles of 30° or greater. Special tech- niques for smaller sides may be used, provided they are qualified as described herein, using the smaller size of application. (2) Acceptance criteria for each type and size weld 3) Type(s) of UT instrumentation (make and model) (4) Transducer (search unit) frequency, size and shape of active area, beam angle, and type of wedge on angle ‘beam probes. Procedures using transducers with frequen- cies up to 6 MHz, sized down to 1/4 in. [6 mm], and of | different shape than specified elsewhere, may be used, provided they are qualified as described herein. (5) Surface preparation and couplant (where used) (©) Type of calibration test block and reference reflector (7) Method of calibration and required accuracy for distance (sweep), vertical linearity, beam spread, angle, sensitivity, and resolution (8) Recalibration interval for each item in (7) above (9) Method for determining acoustical continuity of base metal (see 6.27.4), and for establishing geometry as a function of local dihedral angle and thickness (10) Scanning pattern and sensitivity (see 6.27.5). (11) Transfer correction for surface curvature and rough ‘ness (where amplitude methods are used (See 6.27.3). PARTE ‘AWS D1.4/01.11-2002 (12) Methods for determining effective beam angle (in curved material), indexing root area, and discontinuity locations, (13) Method of determination (14) Method of discontinuity verification during exca- vation and repair discontinuity length and height 6.27.2 Personnel. In addition to personnel requirements (oF 6.14.6, when examination of T-, ¥-, and K-connections is to be performed, the operator shall be required to den onstrate an ability 10 apply the special techniques re- ‘quired for such an examination. Practical tests for this Purpose shall be performed upon mock-up welds that represent the type of welds to be inspected, including a representative range of dihedral angle and thickness to be ncountered in production, using the applicable qualified and approved procedures. Fach mock-up shall contain natural or artificial discontinuities that yield UT indica- tions above and below the reject criteria specified in the approved procedure. Performance shall be judged on the basis ofthe ability of the operator to determine the size and classification of ‘each discontinuity with an accuracy required to accept or reject each weldment and accurately locate the rejectable discontinuities along the weld and within the cross sec- tion of the weld. At least 70% of the rejectable discon nities shall be correctly identified as rejectable, and performance shall otherwise be to the satisfaction of the Engineer (with particular regard to the level of false alarms). For work on nonredundant structures, all of the serious discontinuities (i.e., those exceeding rejectable dimensions by a factor of two, amplitudes by 6 dB) shall be located and reported. 6.273 Calibration. UT equipment qualification and cal- ‘bration methods shall meet the requirements of the ap- proved procedure and Section 6, Part F, except as follows: 6.27.31 Range. Range (distance) calibration shall include, as a minimum, the entire sound path distance to be used during the specific examination. This may be ad- justed to represent either the sound-path travel, surface distance, or equivalent depth below contact surface, dis: played along the instrument horizontal scale, as de- scribed in the approved procedure. 6.2732 Sensitivity Calibration, Standard sensitiv ity for examination of production welds using amplitude techniques shall be: basic sensitivity + distant amplitude correction + transfer correction. This calibration shall be performed at least once for each joint to be tested; except that, for repetitive testing of the Same size and configura tion, the calibration frequency of 6.25.3 may be used, (1) Basie Sensitivity. Reference level screen height obiained using maximum reflection from the 0.060 in. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 [1.5 mm] diameter hole in the IW block (or other block ‘which results in the same basie calibration sensitivity) as described in 6.25 (or 6.29), (Q) Distance Amplitude Correction. The sensitivity level shall be adjusted to provide for attenuation loss throughout the range of sound path to be used by either distance amplitude correction curves, electronic means, (or as described in 6.26.6.4. Where high frequency trans- ducers are used, the greater attenuation shall be taken {nto account. Transfer correction may be used to accom- modate UT through tight layers of paint not exceeding 10 mils [0.25 mm] in thickness, 6.274 Base-Metal Examination. The entire area sub- ject to UT scanning shall be examined by the longitudi- nal wave technique to detect laminar reflectors that could interfere with the intended, directed sound wave propa- gation. All areas containing laminar reflectors shall be marked for identification prior to weld examination and the consequences considered in selection of search unit angles and scanning techniques for examination of the ‘welds in that area, Base material discontinuities that ex- ceed the limits of $.15.1.1 shall be brought to the atten- tion of the Engineer or the Inspector. 627.5 Weld Scanning, Weld scanning of T-, Y-, and K- connections shall be performed from the branch member surface (see Figure 6.25). All examinations shall be ‘made in leg I and TT where possible. For initial scanning, the sensitivity shall be increased by 12 dB above that es- tablished in 6,27.3 for the maximum sound path, Indica~ tion evaluation shall be performed with reference to the standard sensitivity 6.27.6 Optimum Angle. Indications found in the root areas of groove welds in butt joints and along the fusion face of all welds shall be further evaluated with either 70°, 60°, or 45° search angle, whichever is nearest to being perpendicular to the expected fusion face, 6277 Evaluation, Discontinuities shall be evaluated by use of a combination of beam boundary and amplitude techniques. Sizes shall be given as length and height (depth dimension) or amplitude, as applic ble. Amplitude shall be related to “standard calibration In addition, discontinuities shall be classified as linear or planar versus spherical, by noting changes in amplitude a the transducer is swung in an ate centered on the re- flector. The location (position) of discontinuities within the weld cross section, as well us from an established ref- erence point along the weld axis, shall be determined. 6278 Reports 6.27.81 Forms. A report form that clearly identifies the work and the area of inspection shall be completed by the UT technician at the time of inspection. A detailed PARTE ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION report and sketch showing the location along the weld axis, location within the weld cross section, siz (or indi- cation rating), extent, orientation, and classification for each discontinuity shall be completed for each weld in ‘which significant indications are found. 6.278.2 Reported Diseontinuities. When specified, discontinuities approaching rejectable size, particularly those about which there is some doubt in their evalus- tion, shall also be reported 6.278. Incomplete Inspection. Areas for which ‘complete inspection was not practicable shall also be noted, along with the reason why the inspection was incomplete 6278.4 Reference Marks. Unless otherwise spect fied, the reference position and the location and extent of rejectable discontinuities shall also be marked physically ‘on the workpiece. 6.28 Preparation and Disposition of Reports 6.28.1 Content of Reports. A report form which clearly identifies the work and the area of inspection shall be ‘completed by the UT operator at the time of inspection. ‘The report form for welds that are acceptable need only contain sufficient information to identify the weld, the ‘operator (signature), and the acceptability of the weld. ‘An example of such a form is shown in Annex D, Form, D-l 6.28.2 Prior Inspection Reports. Before a weld subject to UT by the Contractor for the Owner is accepted, all re- port forms pertaining to the weld, including any that show unacceptable quality prior to repair, shall be sub- mitted to the Inspector. 6.283 Completed Reports. A full set of completed re- port forms of welds subject to UT by the Contractor for the Owner, including any that show unacceptable quality prior to repair, shall be delivered to the Owner upon cam= pletion of the work. The Contractor's obligation to retain ‘UT reports shall cease (1) upon delivery of this full set to the Owner, or (2) one full year after completion of the Contractor's work, provided that the Owner is given prior written notice, 6.29 Calibration of the UT Unit with ITW or Other Approved Reference Blocks See 6.23 and Figures 6.22, 6.23, and 6.26 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION 6.29.1 Longitudinal Mode 6.9.1.1 Distance Calibration, See Annex X, X! for alternative method. (1) The transducer shall be set in position G on the IW block. (2) The instrument shall be adjusted to produce indi- cations at 1 in, (25 mm on a metric block], 2 in, (50 mm ‘on a metric block}, 3 in. [75 mm on a metric block], 4 in. [100 mm on a metric block], et., on the display. 6.29.1.2 Amplitude. See Annex X, X1.2 for altema- tive method. (1) The transducer shall be set in position G fon the HIW block. (2) The gain shall be adjusted until the ‘maximized indication from first back reflection attains 30 to 75% screen height 6.29.13 Resolution (1) The transducer shall be set in position F on the TIW block, (2) Transducer and instrument shall resolve all three distances 629.14 Horizontal Linearity Qu: fication procedure shall be pet 6.24.1. 6.29.15 Gain Control (Attenuation) Qualification. ‘The qualification procedure shall be in conformance with 6.24.2 or an alternative method, in conformance with 6.24.2, shall be used cation. Quali- 6.29.2 Shear Wave Mode (Transverse) 6.29.21 Index Point, The transducer sound entry point index point) shall be located or checked by the fol- lowing procedure: (1) The transducer shall be set in position D on the TIW block, (2) The transducer shall be moved until the signal from the radius is maximized. The point on the trans- ducer which aligns with the radius line on the calibration block is the point of sound entry (see Annex X, X2.1 for alternative method), 6.29.2.2. Angle, The transducer sound-path angle shall be checked or determined by one ofthe following procedures: (1) The transducer shall be set in position B on IW. block for angles 40° through 60°, or in position C on IW block for angles 60° through 70° (see Figure 6.26). 2) For the selected angle, the transducer shall. be moved back and forth over the line indicative of the transducer angle until the signal from the radius is max- ‘mized, The sound entry point on the transducer shall be compared with the angle mark on the calibration block (tolerance 42°) (see Annex X, X2.2 for alternative methods). 6.29.23 Distance Calibration Procedure. The trans- 5/16 [8] <18D] Inall cases, the undesize portion ofthe weld shall not exceed 10% of the weld length (On websto-lange welds on girders, underrun shall be prohibited a the ends for length equal to twice the width ofthe flange © Underewt (A) For material ess than 1 in. (25 mm thick, undercut shall not exceed 182 in. [1 mm) withthe following exception: undercut shall not exceed 1/16 in. [2 ram] for any accumulated length up © >in, [50 mn] in any 12 in, [500m]. For material equal to or sreater than |. thick dercut shall nat exceed 1/16 [2m] foe any Tenath of weld (B) In primary members, undereut shall be no more than 0.01 in, [0-25 min] deep when the welds transverse to tensile stress under any design loading condition, Undereut shall bbe no more than 1/32 in, [1mm] deep for all other eases @ Porosity (A)CIP groove welds in butt joints transverse tothe dtection of computed tensile stress shall have no visible piping porosity. For all ther groove welds and for fillet welds, the sum of te visible piping porosity 1/32 in. [1 mm] or greater in diameter shall not exceed 378 in. [10 mm] in any linear inch of weld and shall not exceed 3/4 in. [20 mm] in any [300 mim} length of wel. (B) The frequency of piping porosity in fillet welds shall not exceed one in each 4 in {100 mn] of weld length and the maximum diameter shall net exceed 3/32 in, [2.5 mm. Exception: for filet welds connecting stiffeners to web, te sum ofthe diameters of piping porosity shall not exceed 3/8 in, [10 mm} in any tinea neh of wetd and shall not exceed 3/4 in, [20 mm in any 12 in. [300 mon length of weld (© CIP groove welds in bus joints transverse tothe direction of computed tensile sress shall have no piping porosity: For al other groove welds, the frequency of piping poresity shall not exeeed one in 4 in [100 mm] of length and the maximum diameter shall not exceed 3/32 in, [2.5 mm “Geveral Noe: An "° ndiests appleby for the connestion Spe a shaded are ndeates non appa 218, ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION Table 6.2 UT Acceptance-Rejection Criteria (Statically Loaded Nontubular Connections) (see 6.13.1) Weld Thickness in in. [mm] and Search Unit Angle 516 > 3/4 throvgh through 34 Discontinuity] [$20] [20-38] | > 1-12 through Severity 38-65] ] >2-1/2 through 4 [65-100] | > 4 through 8 [100-200] Class we | m0 ease | 7060s |e ase eR we ne | 2e we Ge] se 28 08 | Te 4a 18 iss lower lower | lower lower lower | lower lower lower | lower lower lower ~o 8 fo #2 #8 f 4a a afl «es 3 0 ce eee fete og 7 4 | aw 4 6 | 20 4 3 | 40 to 2 Ce ea ese ere re |e cna 6s os | 3 6 wf 8 8 s | 3 BoM Sup &up | &up &yp kup | kup kup kup | kup Sup Sup + Clas B and C discontinuities shal be separatad by a least 2, L being the length ofthe longer discontinuity, except that when two oe more such Aiscootnuts are not separate by at east 2, bu he combined length of discontinuities heir separation distance seq to of Tes tha the ‘maximum allowable length under the provisions of Clas B o¢ C, the discontinuity shall be considered a single accepable discontinuity + Class B and € discontinuities sall ot begin distance less than 2L from wld ends caring primary temic tres, L beng he discontinuity length + Discontinue detect at Scaming level” in the rot face ate of CUP double groove weld joint stall be evalustod using an indicating eat ‘mote sensitive than described in 6266.5 when such welds are designated as "tension weld” n the drawing Gultrct 4B rom the indicaton rating a"), This shall not apply if the weld joints backzougd wo sound metal to remove the oot face and MT usd to verify ht the root fice has bees emavel + ESW or KGW: dsconinaes dotted at “Scanning level” which xoeed 2 in. (50 mm) in length sal be suspected as being ping porosity and shall be frie evaluated with radiograph. + Forindicasons tt remain on the display asthe search units moved, refer to 613.1 ote: 1. Weld thickness shall be defined asthe nominal Anes of the hiner of the evo pars beng joined. Class A (arg discontinuities) Scanning Levels ‘Any indication in tis category sal be rejected (egal of length) Above Zero las 8 (medium dscontimitis) ‘Any indication in this category having length greater than 3 i, Sound path? inn. (mm) Reference, dB {20 mn sal be rejects, cum coun ) ‘through 2-1/2 [65 mm} 4 aso (smal discontinuis > 2-1/2 through 5 [65-125 mm] 19 ‘Any indication inthis category having a length greater than oan aan eee ee > 5 through 10[125-250 mm] 2» > 10 through 15 [250-380 mm) 39 Class D (minor discontinuities) Any indication inthis category salle aceopd regardless oflengh oe Now location i he weld 2: This column refers to sound path distance; NOT material thickness. 219 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 6.3 UT Acceptance-Rejection Criteria (Cyclically Loaded Nontubular Connections) (see 6.13.2) Weld Thickness in in. [mm] and Search Unit Angle 516 > 3/4 throvgh through 34 > 21/2 through 4+ 4 through 8 Discontinuity} [$20] [20-38] [65-100] [100-200], Severity Class we | m0 ease | 7060s |e ase woe we | 4a we we | He Me we | 28 He Be Cisss& | tower tower | lower lower lower | lower lower lower | lower lower lower —~—rté“‘< msSssh—™h< mWTmhmh™”rmr™”hmlhlhrlrF owe [PON] Sn ot | So ef SS ap |S ms 2m «fw o m| a 6 Sup &up | &up kup kup | &up kup kup | kup up Sup ingle aceepable discontinuity + Class B and € discontinuities sall ot begin distance less than 2L from wld ends caring primary temic tres, L beng he discontinuity length + Discontinue detect at Scaming level” in the rot face ate of CUP double groove weld joint stall be evalustod using an indicating eat ‘mote sensitive than described in 6266.5 when such welds are designated as "tension weld” n the drawing Gultrct 4B rom the indicaton rating a"), This shall not apply if the weld joints backzougd wo sound metal to remove the oot face and MT usd to verify ht the root fice has bees semovel + Forindicatons that ein on the display ath earch unit is moved, refer fo 6132.1. Now 1 Wed thicknees shall be defined as the nominal thickness of the hiner ofthe ovo parts bing joined. lass A (arg discontimites) Scanning Levels Any indication inthis eatepry sal be ejected (egarles of length). © tae B (medium dscontimitis) Above Zero in this category having a length greater than 3/4in, Sound path*in in mm] Reference, dB Te rejected, (uss € (smal discontinuities) through 2-1/2 [65 mm] 20 ‘Any indication inthis category baving «length greater than 2 in > 2-1/2 dough $ [65-125 mm] 25 {50 mm) i the middle half or 34 in. (20 mm) length in the op oF > § through 10 [125-250 mm] 35 tam arte of weld thickens hall be rejected > Yo dough 13 250-380 mn} a Class D (minor discontinuities) ‘Any indication inthis ategory shal be aceeped regardless of length ce Note: location in he weld. 2. This column refis to sound path distance; NOT mataril thickness. 20 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION Table 6.4 Hole-Type IQI Requirements (see 6.17-1) Nominal ‘Nominal Source Side Film Side? Material Thickness! Material Thickness! Range it Range, ram Designation Essential Hole Designation _Essential Hole Tpiw 025 ine Tpto6 incl 10 aT 7 aT Over025100375 Over 6 through 10 2 aT 10 ar Over0375t00.50 Over 1Othrough 12 15 ar 2 ar Over 050100625 Over 12 through 16 is aT B aT Over 0625%00.75 Over 16 through 20 ” ar 5 aT Over075%00875 Over 20:hrough 20 ar v7 ar Over 0875 %0 1.00 Over22 through 25 20 ar v aT Over 0010125 Over 28 through 32 25 ar 20 ar Over 12510150 Over 32 through 38 30 2 23 2 Over 15010200 Over 38 through 50 35 ar 30 ar Over2.00102.50 Over SOthrough 6S 40 or 33 ar Over? 5010300 Over 6S through 75 48 or 40 ar Over3.0010400 Over 78 through 100 50 or 45 or Over4.00%600 Over 100 through 150 oo 2 30 a Over 6.00108.00___Over 150 through 200, 80 or oo ar Nove: 1 Sitgl-wal radiographic hiknes (Fr tuba). 2 Applicable wo ubular stuctrs cay Table 6.5 Wire IQI Requirements (see 6.17.1) Nominal ‘Nominal souren cate Ei Siae pea pene Maxionum Wire Diameter Maximum Wire Diameter Range it Range, mm in mm in mam pio 025 incl Tp 6 il Tor 025 T.008 020 Over 0.25%00375 Over 6t0 10 0013 033 010 02 Over 0375 00.625 Over 1010 16 0016 oat 0013 033 Over 0625 100.75 Over 161020 0.020 0st 0.016 oat Over075%0150 Over 201038 0028 063 0.020 ost Over 15010200 Over 3810 50 0.032 ost 0.025 0.63 Over2.00102.50 Over 501065 0.040 102 0.032 ost Over? 5010400 Over 6St0 100 0.080 127 0.040 102 Over 4.00%06.00 Over 10010 150 0.063 1.60 0.080 127 Over600%08.00 ___Over 150 10200 0.100 2.84 0.063 160 Note 1. Single-valraiogrphi hikes (Tor tbulr). 2, Applicable to tbl sacra. 221 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 6.6 IQI Selection and Placement (see 6.17.7) Equal T> 10% Equal <10in, | Unequal 2 10%n. | Unequal T=10 in 1250 mm] L 1230 ma) L 1250 mm] 1250 mn) LoL Types Hole Wire | Hole Wire | Hole Wie | Hole Wire ‘Nomber of 1QIs ‘Nootubular 2 2 1 1 3 2 1 Pipe Girth 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ASTM StandardSelecion— | Eis E747 | Eims E747 | Els E747 | Eis E787 Table os 6s | 6s 65 | 64 65 | oa 65 Figures eu 612 613 64 ‘T= Nominal base metal thickness (TT and T2 of Figures) 1L= Weld Length nares of interest of each radiograph oneal Notes ‘Stel backing shall pot be considered part of the weld or weld reinforcement in 10 selection ‘Tay be increased to provide forthe thickness of allowable weld enforcement provide shims are wsod under hole IQs per 6.17.33, ‘+ Whoa a complet ctcumterential pipe weld is adiographed with siagle exposure and the radiation sources placed at he cone ofthe curvature, at Teast tee equly spaced hole type [ls sal be used 22 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION Table 6.7 Testing Angle (see 6.26.5.2) Procedure Chart Material Thickness, in [mn] S116 [8] > 1-12 [BS] > 1-3/4 [45] >2-1/2 [60] >3-172 [90] >412 [110] >S[130] >6-12 [160] >7 [180] to te te te wo © te © Weld Type 1-12 [38] 1-34 [45] 2-1/2 {60] 3-12 [90] 4-1/2[110] 5130] 6-1/2 [160] 7{180] 8200] a a a Pe re a a a a iP r [Ot ee wf et ee woe oe 7 “ae "oe 8s PGF GF OFS FSF DF i me PET OP Oem a Ae Depo De Due Keceros lag 4 3. P37 15 15 15 1s x . meee reansuieh ce races © race 8 x BUTT JOINT CORNER JOINT X TJOINT PITCH-AND-CATCH FACE A GROUND FLUSH TOP QUARTER-70——4 MIDDLE HALF-70" + "Where posible al examinations sal be made from Face A snd in Leg I unless others spect in thi table. * Rootareas of single groove weld joints which have backing nat moval by contact shal be tstodin Log I, where possible, with Face A ‘boing dat oppsite the backing. (Grinding ofthe weld fae or testing from aldional weld feos may be noes) to permit complete Scaning of the weld root) + Examination in Lg oI sal be made only to satisfy provisions ofthis able o when noses to fest weld areas made inaccessible by an unground wold surface, ov intreronce with othr portions ofthe woldment, oft meet the roquiroments Of 62552. ‘A maximum of Leg I shal he used only whee thickness or geometry prevents senning of complete weld seas and HAZs in Leg Ir Leg. + On tension welds in cyclialy loaded sructres, the tp quar of thickness stall be tested with the final leg of sound progressing fom Face B toward Face A, the bottom quarter of thickness shall be tested with the final Teg of sound progressing from Face A toward Face Bi. the top ‘quarter of thicknos sal be tested either rom Face A in Log Il of fam Face Bin Leg Lat the coutacto's option unless otherwise specitid ia the ‘Sontect documents, + The weld fice indicated shall be ground flush before using procedure 1G, 6, 8,9, 12, 14015. Face A for beth connected members shal ben the sme plane (See Legend on next page) ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 6.7 (Continued) Legend X Cheek from Face °C." G Grind weld face Mush, © —Notrequird. ‘A Face —the face of the material from whieh the inital scanning is done (on T- and comer joints, follow above sketches). 'B Face —opposite the “A” face (same plate). (C Face —the face opposite the weld onthe connecting member or aT- or comer joint. * — Required only where display reference height indication of discontinuity is noted atthe weld metal-base ‘neta interface while searching at scanning level with primary procedures selected fom first column, Use 15 in, [400 mm) oF 20 in, [500 mm] sereen distance calibration P —Pitch and catch shall be conducted for further discontinuity evaluation in only the middle half ofthe ‘material thickness with only 45° or 70° transducers of equal specification, both facing the weld. (Trans- ducers must be held in a Fixture to contol positioning —see sketch,) Amplitude ealibration for pitch and catch is normally made by calibrating a single seareh unit. When switching to dual seareh units for pitch and catch inspection, there should be assurance that this calibration does not change asa result of Snstrument variables F Weld metalsbase metal interface indications shall be further evaluated with either 70°, 60°, or 48° ‘ransducer—whichever sound path is nearest to being perpendicular tothe suspected fusion surface, Procedure Legend ‘Area of Weld Thickness Top Middle Bottom No. Quarer Half Quarter 1 70° 70° 70° 2 oP 0 or 3 a a a5 4 oP 70° 70° 3 a 70° 70° 6 70°GA 70° or a or 8 70° or 8 70°GA 0 or 9 TGA or a 10 oor B or o 1 a8 708 a 2 WGA 45° 70° B B a8 as a 4 10GA a5 as 5 70'GA 70°AB 70°6B 24 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION Legend for Figures 6.1, 6.4, 6.5, and 6.6 Dimensions of Discontinuities B= Maximum allowed dimension ofa radiographe discontinuity. L. = Largest dimension ofa radiographed discontinuity. LL’ = Largest dimension of adjacent discontinuities. C = Minimum clearance measured along the longitudinal axis of the weld between edges of porosity or fusion-type diseontine- ites (larger of adjacent discontinuities governs), or to an edge ‘orn end of an intersecting weld. “Minimum allowed distance between the nearest discontinuity to the free edge of a plate or tubular, or the intersection of a Tongitudinal weld with a girth weld, measured parallel to the longitudinal weld axis W = Smallest dimension of either of adjacent discontinuities. ‘Material Dimensions E = Weld size. T_= Plate or pipe thiekness for CIP groove welds. Definitions of Discontinuities + An elongated discontinuity shall have the largest dimen sion (L) exezed 3 times the smallest dimension. + A rounded discontinuity shall have the largest dimension (L) less than or equal o 3 times the smallest dimension, +A cluster shall be defined as @ group of nonaligned, acceptably-sized, individual adjacent discontinuities with spacing less than the minimum allowed (C) for the largest individual adjacent discontinuity (L'), but with ‘the sum of the greatest dimensions (L) of all discontinui- ties in the cluster equal to or less than the maximum allowable individual discontinuity size (B). Such clusters shall be considered as individual discontinuities of size L for the purpose of assessing minimum spacing + Aligned discontinuities shall have the major axes of each liscontinuity approximately aligned, 2s ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 1-178 OR GREATER, 3/4 MAX 718 aa we E-WELD SIZE, in ae Wa 1 ° M4 We a4 1 a eae 2 BHA CININCHES 90 OR GREATER 20MAX 16 2 E-WELD SIZE, mm 10 ° 6 12 20 25 Ey 40 “4 50 37 CIN MILLIMETERS General Notes: + To determine the maximum size of dlscontinulty alowed in any joint or wed size, project E horizontally to B. + To getermine the minimum clearance allowed between edges of discontinuities of any size greater than oF equal to 382 in. [2.5 mm, project B vertically to C. + See Legend on page 225 for deitons Figure 6.I—Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as, Determined by RT for Statically Loaded Nontubular Structures (see 6.12.1.1) 26 SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 (TET PUL TTZL'9 2S) PETG 49d saseury Ly aquidasdy wNnuyXxep)—Z'9 2nByy umoys 16u yBnow wor (¢) 10 (1) 4M UonBUlquOD U 94 ose KEW (¢) puE (1) 0 wapuadepur | 210N, | seurow | es | cannes Nowoas sou TSM TWOIAL no In e . . e won Two Tova law ala os {uw an} sue | {uw a1} sue | | woe - A wwuelaecs = | tamales | | WLOL WLOL ‘Hows (wus ¢] ‘ur szu {ww 9] "ul ose" wie [aati | fl WLOL WLOL ‘Hows [wu 2] u! £80" (ww ¥] ut 294 i | tie | I WLOL WiOL ‘Hows [wus 1] ul evo" {wu 2] ‘ul 680" {ww 2] "uy 680" {wu 2] "ul 690" ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION (CETL pue ZTZI'9 995) sopMUNUODsIG a[qe;do99y WopuTY Jo ead, ‘aayeaa pur [uuu og] “Uy 8/I-1 SIO AuINGN Jo LY 4oq—F"9 aANBHy iam e 0 pu 2 se sovereayp ewes oxy Buvnbos se payeon aq yous Jersn9 a4) UW Sox0d 40} [Wa 2 Ue J WneU © BuMeL JeIEND B YONS YaIENP e U SaNMULEDS!P adK-pepUNeY—K uw g sucosp adh-papunoy—px-EX ‘Aunuquossip oibus e se pojpuey oq feu 9°9 axnbs £4 POM (ga ont ony yuo [au Ce] UB 0h ‘uo%06 yeys sen nunuoasp wadelpe jo ie7 (Q'9 esrb Jed) J46re|J0 [NU $2] ZErE SennUNuOONP Jo SaBpe UBBNNeN paNoje AoURseap WMD ‘10M [210005 uw es} un oat [ww zs} [ww oad fuw zs} | | Whe ie uw nal red r ‘wwe q “Ul wba * | * | x | x | x ANIOr 40 GNB 28 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION a ve MAX OR GREATER 76, 14 ET ey Aaafos S16, L =o 316, on WELD SIZE, in 16 ° 2 1 sre 2 eae 3 ae 4 CIN INCHES 38 OR GREATER 32 8 8 E-WELD SIZE, mm, ° 12 25 40 50 65 78 90 100115 CIN MILUMETERS General Notes: + To determine the maximum size of dlscontinuly alowed in any joint or wed size, project E horizontally to B. + To determine the minimum clearance allowed between edges of discontinuities f any size, project B vertically to C. + See Legend on page 225 for deitons Figure 6.4—Weld Quality Requirements for Discontinuities Occurring in Cyelically Loaded Nontubular Tension Welds (Limitations of Porosity and Fusion Discontinuities) (see 6.12. ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 14 MAX aR OR GREATER nn 14 5. ey Faqs sH6, 2 38 on E-WELD SIZE. In. Ive [=-(Note 1) ° 2 1 442 2 22 3 42 4 CININCHES. 38 OR GREATER 32 2 E-WELD SIZE, mm ° 12 25 40 50 65 78 90 100115 CIN MILUMETERS General Notes: + To determine the maximum size of dlscontinuly alowed in any joint or wed size, project E horizontally to B. + To determine the minimum clearance allowed between edges of discontinuities f any size, project B vertically to C. + See Legend on page 225 for deitons Note: 1. The maximum sizeof a ciscontinuty located within this cstance rom an edge of pate shall be 1/8 in. [3 mn, but a 1/8 in [8 men is continuity shall be 1/4 in. (6 mm] or more away trom the edge. The sum of dscontinaites less than 1/8 in (3 mm in size and located within tis distance from the edge shal not exceed 2/1 i. [5 mm). Discontinutes 116 in. 2 mm] to less than 18 in. [3 mm] shal not be restricted in cher locations unless they are separated by less than 2L (L being the length of he larger ciscentinuy in which eas, the lscontiuities shall be measured as one length equal fo the total length ofthe dlscontinuites and space and evaluated as shown in Figure 65. Figure 6.5—Weld Quality Requirements for Disconti Occurring in Cyelically Loaded Nontubular Compression Welds (Limitations of Porosity or Fusion-Type Discontinuities) (see 6.12.2.2) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION 1-118 OR GREATER SI MAK a a va ° ua 12 a 1 Wa Rta 2 BAM CC ININCHES 90 OR GREATER 20 MAX 16 2 E-WELD SIZE, mm 10 o 6 12 20 28 2 “0 “4 50 7 CINMILLMETERS General Notes: + To determine the maximum size of dlscontinulty lowed in any joint or weld size, project E horizontally to B. + To determine the minimum clearance alowed between edges of cscontiulies of any size greater tan or equal to 3/82 In. [2 mm, project B vertically to C. + See Legend on page 225 for deitons Figure 6.6—Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by RT of Tubular Joints (see 6.12.3.1) ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 WIDTH cP viscontinury —®, ‘DISCONTINUITY mee : Lg sign fz z KEY FOR FIGURE 6.6, CASES I, Tl, Tl, AND IV WELD A WELD 8 DISCONTINUITY A = ROUNDED OR ELONGATED DISCONTINUITY LOCATED IN WELD A DISCONTINUITY & = ROUNDED OR ELONGATED DISCONTINUITY LOCATED IN WELD B LAND W = LARGEST AND SMALLEST DIMENSIONS, RESPECTIVELY, OF DISCONTINUITY A LAND W'= LARGEST AND SMALLEST DIMENSIONS, RESPECTIVELY, OF DISCONTINUITY B E = WELD SIZE ; = SHORTEST DISTANCE PARALLEL TO THE WELD A AXIS, BETWEEN THE NEAREST DISCONTINUITY EDGES (CASE I DISCONTINUITY LIMITATIONS? DISCONTINUITY DIMENSION LIMITATIONS: ‘CONDITIONS E <2 in (60 mm << 9/8 In. [10 mm] E> 2 in. (60 mm] (A) ONE DISCONTINUITY ROUNDED, THE OTHER ROUNDED OR G zal ELONGATED! (8) L 2 9/82 in. (2.5 mm] Note: 1. The elongated discontinuity may be located in ether the longitudinal or gith weld. For the purposes ofthis ilustration, discontinuity B was lated in the gith Wels Case I—Discontinuity at Weld Intersection Figure 6.6 (Continued) —Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by RT of Tubular Joints (see 6.12.3.1) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION LENGTH L (CASE II DISCONTINUITY LIMITATIONS Seaman eevee Ese Ronn A 2a m0 emi E> en mal Case Il—Discontinuity at Free Edge of CJP Groove Weld = ar ne I enray orsconrmurya—H ; rors oom ir = ne (CASE IIT DISCONTINUITY LIMITATIONS. DISCONTINUITY DIMENSION LIMITATIONS: aon b $281 en 2 LOR 2E, c WHICHEVER L 2992 i, 2.5 mm} 1S GREATER, Case I11—Discontinuity at Weld Intersection Figure 6.6 (Continued)—Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities as Determined by RT of Tubular Joints (see 6.12.3.1) ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 NK FREE EDGE wioth w LENGTH L CASE IV DISCONTINUITY LIMITATIONS DISCONTINUITY Diesen LIMITATIONS: ‘CONDITIONS. L $268 uw >3 2 OL OR 2E, o WHICHEVER 1S L > 9/2 in (2.5 mm] GREATER, Case IV—Discontinuity at Free Edge of CJP Groove Weld Figure 6.6 (Continued) —Weld Quality Requirements for Elongated Discontinuities ‘as Determined by RT of Tubular Joints (see 6.12.3.1) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 “4 £8 INDIVIDUAL REFLECTOR, in & = LENGTH OF LARGEST ACCEPTABLE Notes: tw WELD THICKNESS, mm over ° 2 5 38 50 50 6 ‘See Note 1 2 20 25 \ L ‘See Note 2 \ 40 See et ed 5g ° 1 1 me 8) OR 2 WELD THICKNESS, in, tw ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION LENGTH OF LARGEST ACCEPTABLE INDIVIDUAL REFLECTOR, mm 4. Internal near or planar reflectors above standard senstvily (except root of single welded T-,Y-, and K-connections [see Figure 6.8) 2) Minor reflsctors (above disregard evel upto and including standard senaitviy) (except root of single weloed T, [see Figue 6.8). Adjacent efloctors separated by less than their average length shal be treated as continuous igure 6.7—Class R Indications (see 6.13.3.1) ‘ana K-connections ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 bw WELD THICKNESS, mm UNDER 75 75 150 225 900 OVER 900+— FOR THIS WELD SIZE UNDER 1212 25 38 50 _ OVER 50 =— EVALUATE OVER THIS 1 7 LENGTH (NOT TO EXCEED D2 INTERNAL LINEAR OR PLANAR WHERE 0 IS DIAMETER) we REFLECTORS ABOVE STANDARD 12 ‘SENSITIVITY (EXCEPT ROOT OF SINGLE WELDED T.,¥., AND K-CONNECTIONS) 21 \ 6s \ a 1 1 7s a salomnemtye| \ |_ DISREGARD LEVEL INCLUDING. 312 | Root REFLECTORS OF SINGLE | ® WELDED T, ¥-, AND K-CONNECTIONS (Note 1) \ ACCUMULATED LENGTH OF REFLECTORS OVER LENGTH OF WELD EVALUATED, in, 2 ACCUMULATED LENGTH OF REFLECTORS OVER LENGTH OF WELD EVALUATED, mm Yu. — 4 100 UNDERI2 172 1 ra 2 ‘OVER 2 =— FOR THIS WELD SIZE UNDERS 3 6 ° 12 OVER 12 +— EVALUATE OVER THIS LENGTH (NOT TO EXCEED D2 ae WHERE D IS DIAMETER) Nate: 4. Root area ciscontinutes fling ouside theoretical weld (dimensions “t,” oF “L"in Figures 2.8, 3.9, and 3.10) are tobe disregarded. Figure 6.7 (Continued)—Class R Indications (see 6.13.3.1) aws D1 E E & a {1.12002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION MAIN MEMBER BRANCH MEMBER General Notes: + Aligned ciscontinuties separated by less than (LA + L2y2 ana paralel ciscontiuities separated by less than (H1-+ H2J2 shal be evaluated ws continuous + Accumulative discontinuities shal be evaluated over 6 in. [150 mm] or D2 length of weld (whichever 's less), where tube diameter DIRECTION OF APPLIED STRESS LAND H BASED ON A RECTANGLE WHICH TOTALLY ENCLOSES INDIGATED DISCONTINUITY LENGTH, mm 122 50 100 1500RD2 1/4 [6] OR tw/4 T+, ¥-, AND K-ROOT DISCONTINUITIES. Acoumve cine es Seonrauries SEN ange wl an Kr wh S Scnontctamese aoc ceo is | + Bisconinuites in the backup weld in the root Bosse Canso oP 8,38 ans ce | be disregarded. 189 Fonaoun —/” Beccxromes ACCT a We 12+ eon Leno. LENGTH, wen 6 a5 so 100 tsv0nDe fevect swoon i INTERNAL REFLECTORS AN mit otnentwesse scours scenes wale Scones SN at ay itn HoH of fa 7 ‘outside surface shall be sized as if extending to the 1 surface of the weld. te el. 1 atacand atte 6.1852) 18 eyoua 1 Sua can pecoNTNES ‘ACCEPT | ‘oo ye e128 bono Lexotisn igure 6.8—Class X Indications (see 6.13.3.2) ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 47 DIA (MINIMUM SIZE 0.040 in. [1.02 mm) PLACE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS HERE: T DIA (MINIMUM SIZE 0.010 in. [0.25 mm) a 27 DIA (MINIMUM SIZE 0,020 In. [0.51 mm) KX fy | | : | E | faek hk DESIGN FOR IQs UP TO BUT E F Tolerances 1.500 0750 0836 0.250 0.500 0.250 oa £0015 £00015 £0015 20015 £0015 A ed 1.500 0750 0836 0.250 0.500 0.250 ue £0015 £00015 £0015 20015 £0015 A ed 2250 1375 0750 0.376 1.000 0376 red +$0.030 +£0.030 ++0.030 ++0.030 A ed Table of Dinensions of (nm) al Thickness ‘and Hole Diameter Number! A 8 © > Ee F Tolerances 38:10 79.05 1143 635 72.70 638 oo 2038 £0.38 20338 2038 2038 20.80 acon 38:10 19.08 1143 635 72.70 638 oe 2038 20:38 20:38 2038 2038 2080 a 8748 3402, 19.05 982 25.40 9528 eel 2000 2080 £080 20380 £080 20.80 a ‘General Not: Holes shall be wwe and normal tothe 1A. Do not chamfer. Note: 41. Ils No.5 trough 9 are not 1, 27, and 47. Figure 6.9—Hole-Type IQI (see 6.17.1) (Reprinted by permission of the American Society for Testing ané Materials, copyright) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ENCAPSULATED BETWEEN CLEAR “VINYL PLASTIC 0.060 in, [1.52 mm] MAXIMUM- ‘THE MINIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN THE AXIS OF WIRES SHALL NOT BE LESS THAN 3 TIMES ‘THE DIAMETER AND NOT MORE THAN (0.200 in [5.08 mm) 114 in. (6.35 ron] MINIMUM LEAD LETTERS AND NUMBERS. MATERIAL GRADE- ‘SET IDENTIFICATION eee NM ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION 4/4 in [6.35 men] MINIMUM. LEAD LETTERS LENGTH 1 In. (25.4 mm] MINIMUM FOR SETS A AND B. ‘6 WIRES EQUALLY SPACED LARGEST WIRE NUMBER NUMBER, LETTER Image Qualty indicator (Wire Penetrameter) Sizes Wire Diameter. in. Seta Sete Sate SetD ‘o.0082 (008) | 0010025) | ooszjoey | 0.10/25) 0.004 (0.1) 0.013(0331 | ooso (1.07) | 0125/82) 0.005 (0.131 | 0.016 04) o.osor.27 | 0.160 4.06) 0.0063 (0.16 | o.020;059 | 0.063116) 0.20 5:1) 0.008 (0.2) 0.028064 | 08003 | 025)6.4) oorj2s) | oos2081) | 0.10/25) 0.228) Figure 6.10—Wire IQI (see 6.17.1) (Reprinted by permission of the American Society for Testing and Materials, copyright) ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, ALTERNATE WIRE [AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION Ol PLACEMENT {LOCATION OPTIONAL) (SEE 6.17.12) 918 in. (10 mm) MIN (TYP) = HOLE-TYPE Ia OR WIRE IQ] ON SOURCE SIDE- HOLE-TYPE IO] OR WIRE IQ] ON SOURCE SIDE LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL BE S PLACED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED xs ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING woe FILM TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING (SEE 6.17.12). ‘CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, ‘AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION T (LOCATION OPTIONAL) (SEE 6.17.12) Note: 1. Alternate source side 1! placement allowed fo tubular applications and other applications when approved by the Engineer. ure 6.11—RT Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Approximately Equal Thickness Joints 10 in. [250 mm] and Greater in Length (see 6.17.7) 240 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION HOLE-TYPE 1Q1 OR WIRE 101 ON SOURCE SIDE MAY BE PLACED CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, ANYWHERE ALONG AND ON AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION EITHER SIDE OF THE JOINT. (LOCATION OPTIONAL) (SEE 6.17.12) rR 3/4 in, [20 mmm} ALTERNATE WIRE MIN (TYP) |Q1 PLACEMENT (Note 1) Tete LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL BE PLACED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING FILM TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING (SEE 6.17.12). ‘CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, ‘AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION (LOCATION OPTIONAL) (SEE 6.17.12). Note: 41 Alternate soutce side 1! placement allowed for tubular applications and other applications when approved by the Engineer Figure 6.12—RT Identification and Hole-Type or Wire 1QI Locations on Approximately Equal Thickness Joints Less than 10 in. [250 mm] in Length (see 6.17.7) 241 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 HOLE-TYPE 1a (OR WIRE 1G] ON SOURCE SIDE: ALTERNATE WIRE 1a) PLACEMENT (ote 1) MEASURE T2 AT POINT OF MAXIMUM THICKNESS UNDER HOLE-TYPE lal ‘OR WIRE IGI PLACED (ON SLOPE 3/4 in. (20 rm) MIN (TYP) LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL BE PLACED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED ‘ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING FILM TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING (SEE 6.17.12). CONTRACT NUMBER, WELD, AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION (LOCATION OPTIONAL) (SEE 6.17.12) Note: 1. Allernate source side 101 placement allowed for tubular applications end other applications when approved by the Engineer Figure 6.13—RT Identification and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints 10 in, [250 mm] and Greater in Length (see 6.17.7) 242 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION HOLE-TYPE Ia OR WIRE 101 ON ‘SOURCE SIDE MAY BE PLACED ANYWHERE ALONG THE JOINT: ALTERNATE WIRE IOI PLACEMENT (ote 1) ~ 818 in. [10 mn] MIN (TYP) MEASURE T2 AT 9/4 in 20 ram) POINT OF MAXIMUM aeeeaeee THICKNESS UNDER HOLE-TYPE 11 (OR WIRE IQ PLACED (ON SLOPE LEAD FILM IDENTIFICATION NUMBER SHALL BE PLACED DIRECTLY OVER THE NUMBERS MARKED ‘ON THE STEEL FOR THE PURPOSE OF MATCHING FILM TO WELD AFTER PROCESSING (SEE 6.17.12). CONTRACT NUMBER, WEL ‘AND FABRICATOR IDENTIFICATION (LOCATION OPTIONAL) (SEE 6.17.12) Note: 1 Alternate source side I! placement allowed for tubular applications and other applications when approved by the Engineer Figure 6.14—RT Identi n and Hole-Type or Wire IQI Locations on Transition Joints Less than 10 in, [250 mm] in Length (see 6.17.7) MIN GAP On. MAX GAP 1/16 in, i aT EDGE BLOCK (in. 25 nm] MN) Figure 6.15—RT Edge Blocks (see 6.17.13) 243 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 FILM PANORAMIC EXPOSURE ‘ONE EXPOSURE MINIMUM THREE EXPOSURES Figure 6.16—Single-Wall Exposure— ngle-Walll View (see 6.18.1.1) MINIMUM THREE EXPOSURES O~ source A, __ nm Figure 6.17—Double-Wall Exposure— Single-Wall View (see 6.18.1.2) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION Q K> ral Figure 6.18—Double-Wall Exposure—Double-Wall (E! Minimum Two Exposures (see 6.18.1.3) tical) View, A source CENTERLINE fo samc AMS OF WELD 7D MIN | Ls 0 ) FILM Figure 6.19—Double-Wall Exposure—Double-Wall View, Minimum Three Exposures (see 6.18.1.3) ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 wiotH++—+| HEIGHT Figure 6.20—Transducer Crystal (see 6.2.7.2) in, TOE OR (25.4 mm) LEADING EDGE: MAX ALL ANGLES: 11.58 mm] cont (152 mm) ian (36 mm) Figure 6.21—Qualification Procedure of Search Unit Using IW Reference Block (see 6.22.7.7) 246 ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION POF om oe oT 18 9 0.600 0.080 HOLE 18 1.5 HOLE r [eaten , En La = = 4.000 364\ 100 ie i TT 0 L- aa ogee eee ee i. 2 0.085 \ faced paeeal i bite abe F t 25 0.080 U.S, CUSTOMARY DIMENSIONS. 2 ‘SI DIMENSIONS (mm) (A)TYPE 1 (TYPICAL) seo ~ i [posse motel LJ Boy 42,000 300 U.S, CUSTOMARY DIMENSIONS. ‘SI DIMENSIONS (mm) (©) TYPE 2 (TYPICAL) General Notes: +The dimensional tolerance between all surfaces involved in referencing or calibrating shal be within +.006 i. (0.13 mm of detailed di ‘Te surface finish of all surfaces to which sound is applied o reflected trom shall have a maximum of 125 pin. (8 ym] cms ‘Al material shall be ASTM A 26 of acoustcaly equivalent ‘All holoe shall nave a emooth internal finish and shal be eiled 90° to the material surface. Degree lines and identfcation markings shal be indented ino the material surface so that permanent oclentaion can be maintained. ‘Other approved reference black with sighly diferent mensions or distance calibration slots are permisibie (see Annex X), Tose notes shall apply to all sketches in Figures 6.22 and 6.23, Figure 6.22—International Institute of Welding (IIW) UT Reference Blocks (see 6.23.1) 247 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 sa17 5.131 js 1as General Note: All holes aret/16 in. in diameter. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES RC - RESOLUTION REFERENCE BLOCK frat ateef 4a bk ‘TYPE — DISTANCE AND SENSITIVITY REFERENCE BLOCK Figure 6.23—Qualification Blocks (see 6.23.3) 248, ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ot asa0 |e Goneral Note: Al holes ar@1.59 mm in diameter. DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS RO RESOLUTION REFERENCE BLOCK e | .-- beech paren ik ‘TYPE — DISTANCE AND SENSITIVITY REFERENCE BLOCK Figure 6.23 (Continued)—Qualification Blocks (see 6.23.3) (Metric) 249 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 [-b-@b} Eye -—f =< PATTERN D ° ° MOVEMENT A MOVEMENT C MOVEMENT B ‘General Notes: + Testing pattems are all symmetical around the weld axis with te exception of pattem D, which shall be conducted directly over the weld as + Testing rom both ses ofthe weld axis shall be made wherever mechanically possibie. Figure 6.24—Plan View of UT Scanning Patterns (see 6.32) ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION (A) BEAM DIRECTION. MAINTAIN SOUND PERPENDICULAR TO WELD. NOR THROUGH MEMBER. (@)-PATHS. USE SINGLE AND MULTIPLE LEGS AND VARIOUS ANGLES AS REQUIRED ‘TO COVER THE COMPLETE WELD INCLUDING THE ROOT AREA. Figure 6.25—Seanning Techniques (see 6.27.5) 251 ‘SECTION 6. INSPECTION ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 lw BLock RESOLUTION BLOCK Ds BLOCK Figure 6.26—Transducer Positions (Typical) (see 6.29) ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 7. Stud Welding 7.1 Scope Section 7 contains general requirements for welding of steel studs to steel, and stipulates specific requirements: (1) For workmanship, preproduction testing, operator qualification, and application qualification testing when required, all to be performed by the Contractor (2) For fabrication/erection and verification inspec- tion of stud welding during production (3) For mechanical properties of steel studs, and re- quirements for qualification of stud bases, all tests and documentation to be furnished by the stud manufacturer Note: Approved steels; for studs, see 7.2.6; for base metals, see Table 3.1 (Groups and I). For guidance, see C7.6.1 7.2. General Requirements 72.1 Stud Design. Studs shall be of suitable design for are welding to steel members with the use of automati- cally timed stud welding equipment. The type and size of the stud shall be as specified by the drawings, specifica tions, or special provisions. For headed-type studs, see Figure 7.1, Alternative head configurations may be used ‘with proof of mechanical and embedment tests confirm- ing full-strength development of the design, and with the approval ofthe Engineer. 72.2 Are Shields. An are shield (ferrule) of heat- resistant ceramic or other suitable material shall be fur- nished with each stud. 723 Flux. A suitable deoxidizing and are stabilizing flux for welding shall be furnished with each stud of 5/16 in, [8 mm] diameter or Tanger. Studs less. than 5/16 in, [8 mm] in diameter may be furnished with or ‘without flux 7.2.4 Stud Bases. A stud base, to be qualified, shall hhave passed the test described in Annex IX. Only studs ‘with qualified stud bases shal be used. Qualification of stud bases in conformance with Annex IX shall be at the ‘manufacturer's expense, The are shield used in produc- tion shall be the same as used in qualification tests or as recommended by the manufacturer. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the following information: (1) A description of the stud and are shield (2) Certification from the manufacturer that the stud base is qualified in conformance with Annex IX. 3) Qualification tests data 7.25 Stud Finish. Finish shall be produced by heading, rolling, or machining, Finished studs shall be of uniform quality and condition, free of injurious laps, fins, seams, cracks, twists, bends, or other injurious discontinuities. Radial cracks or bursts in the head of a stud shall not be the cause for rejection, provided thatthe cracks or bursts do not extend more than half the distance from the head periphery to the shank, as determined by visual inspec tion, Heads of shear connectors or anchor studs are sub- ject to ctacks or bursts, which are names for the same thing. Cracks or bursts designate an abrupt interruption of the periphery of the stud head by radial separation of the metal, Radial eracks or bursts in the head of a stud shall not be cause for rejection, provided that the cracks ‘or bursts, as determined by visual inspection, do not ex- ‘coed the value: 0.25 (H-C) (see Figure 7.1). 7.2.6 Stud Material, Studs shall be made from cold drawn bar stock conforming t the requirements. of ASTM A 108, Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality Grades 1010 through 1020, inclusive either semi-killed or killed aluminum or silicon deoxidation 7.2.7 Base Metal Thickness. When welding directly to base metal, the base metal shall be no thinner than 1/3, the stud diameter. When welding through deck, the stud diameter shall be no greater than 2.5 times the base mate- rial thickness, In no case shall studs be welded through more than two plies of metal decking ‘SECTION 7. STUD WELDING 7.3 Mecha 73.1 Standard Mechanical Requirements. At the ‘manufacturer's option, mechanical properties of studs shall be determined by testing either the steel after cold finishing or the full diameter finished studs. In either cease, the studs shall conform to the standard properties shown in Table 7.1 -al Requirements 73.2 Testing, Mechanical properties shall be determined in conformance with the applicable sections of ASTM A370, Mechanical Testing of Steet Products. A typical test fixture is used, similar to that shown in Figure 7.2. 73.3 Engineer's Request. Upon request by the Engi- nee, the Contractor shall furnish (1) The stud manufucturer’s certification that the studs, as delivered, conform to the applicable require- ‘ments of 7.2 and 7.3. (Q) Cemtfied copies of the stud manufacturer’s test re- ports covering the last completed set of in-plant quality control mechanical tests, required by 7.3 for each diameter delivered, The quality control test shall have been made ‘within the six month period before delivery of the studs, (3) Certified material test reports (CMTR) from the steel supplier indicating diameter, chemical properties, ‘and grade on each heat number delivered. 73A Absence of Quality Control Tests. When quality control tests are not available, the Contractor shall furnish ‘mechanical test reports conforming to the requirements of| 7.3, The mechanical tests shall be on finished studs pro- vided by the manufacturer of the studs. The number of tests to be performed shall be specified by the Engineer. 738 Engineer's Option to Select Studs. The Engineer ‘may select studs of each type and size used under the con- tract as necessary for checking the requitements of 7.2 and 7.3. Fumishing these studs shall be at the Contrac~ tor’s expense. Testing shall be at the owner's expense. 7.4 Workmanship 7A Cleanliness. At the time of welding, the studs shall be free from rust, rust pits, scale, oil, moisture, or other deleterious matter that would adversely affect the ‘welding operation, 7A2 Coating Restrictions. The stud base shall not be painted, galvanized, or cadmium-plated prior to welding. 74.3 Base-Metal Preparation. The areas to which the studs are to be welded shall be free of scale, rust, mois- ture, paint, or other injurious material to the extent necessary to obtain satisfactory welds and prevent objec- tionable fumes, These areas may be cleaned by wire brushing, scaling, prick punching, or grinding, ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 AA Moisture. The ate shields or ferrules shall be kept dry. Any are shields which show signs of surface mois- ture from dew or rain shall be oven dried at 250°F [120°C] for two hours before use. 74.8 Spacing Requirements, Longitudinal and lateral spacings of stud shear connectors (type B) with respect to each other and to edges of beam or girder flanges may vary a maximum of 1 in, [25 mm] from the location shown in the drawings, The minimum distance from the ‘edge of a stud base fo the edge of a flange shall be the diameter of the stud plus 1/8 in. [3 mm], but preferably not less than 1-1/2 in, [40 mm} 74.6 Are Shield Removal. After welding, are shields shall be broken free from studs to be embedded in con- crete, and, where practical, from all other studs, 7.4.7 Acceptance Criteria. The studs, after welding, shall be fiee of any discontinuities or substances that ‘would interfere with their intended function and have a full 360° flash. However, nonfusion on the legs of the flash and small shrink fissures shall be acceptable. The fillet weld profiles shown in Figure 5.4 shall not apply to the flash of automatically timed stud welds, 7.5 Technique 74.1 Automatic Machine Welding. Studs shall be ‘welded with automatically timed stud welding equip- ‘ment connected 10 a suitable source of direct current electrode negative power. Welding voltage, current, time, ‘and gun settings for lift and plunge should be set at ‘optimum settings, based on past practice, recommenda- tions of stud and equipment manufacturer, or both. AWS C5.4, Recommended Practices for Stud Welding, should also be used for technique guidance, 75.2 Multiple Welding Guns. If two or more stud Welding guns shall be operated from the same power source, they shall be interlocked so that only one gun can ‘operate ata time, and so that the power source has fully recovered from making one weld before another weld is started. 75.3 Movement of Welding Gun. While in operation, the welding gun shall be held in position without move- ‘ment until the weld metal has solidified, 754 Ambient and Base-Metal Temperature Require- ‘ments, Welding shall not be done when the base metal temperature is below 0°F [-18°C] or when the surface is ‘wet or exposed to falling rain or snow When the temper- ature of the base metal is below 32°F [0°C], one addi- tional stud in each 100 studs welded shall be tested by methods described in 7.7.1.3 and 7.7.1.4, except that the ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 angle of testing shall be approximately 15°. This isin ad- dition to the first two studs tested for each start of a new production period or change in set-up. Set-up includes stud gun, power source, stud diameter, gun lift and plunge, total welding lead length, and changes greater than 5% in current (amperage) and time. 7.8 FCAW, GMAW, SMAW Fillet Weld Option. At the option of the Contractor, studs may be welded using prequalified FCAW, GMAW, or SMAW processes, pro- vvided the following requirements are met: 7S. Surfaces. Surfaces to be welded and surfaces adjacent to a weld shall be free from loose or thick scale, slag, rust, moisture, grease, and other foreign material that would prevent proper welding or produce objection- able fumes. 7S. Stud End. For fillet welds, the end of the stud shall also be clean, 7S523 Stud Fit (Fillet Welds). For fillet welds, the stud base shall be prepared so that the base of the stud fits against the base metal 7SSA Fillet Weld Minimum Size. When fillet ‘welds shall be used, the minimum size shall be the larger of those required in Table 5.8 or Table 7.2 7885 Preheat Requirements. The base metal to which studs are welded shall be preheated in conform- ‘ance with the requirements of Table 3.2. 78.6 SMAW Electrodes. SMAW welding shall be performed using low-hydrogen electrodes 5/32 in. ot 3/16 in, [4.0 mm or 4.8 mm] in diameter, except that a smaller diameter electrode may be used on studs 7/16 in, [11.1 mm] or less in diameter for out-oF-position welds. 7.85.7 Visual Inspection, FCAW, GMAW, and SMAW. ‘welded studs shall be visually inspected in conformance with 6.6.1 7.6 Stud Application Qualification Requirements When studs are t9 be welded through decking, the stud base qualification test shall include decking repre- sentative ofthat used in construction, 7.6.1 Purpose, Studs which are shop or field applied in the flat (down-hand) position to a planar and horizontal surface shall be considered prequalified by virtue of the ‘manufacturer's stud base qualification tests (Annex IX), ‘and no further application testing shall be required. The limit of flat position is defined as 0° 15° slope on the sur- face to which the stud is applied. Some nonprequalified SECTION 7, STUD WELDING stud applications that require tests of this section are the following: (1) Studs which are applied on nonplanar surfaces or to. planar surface in the vertical or overhead positions (2) Studs which are welded through decking. The tests shall be with material representative of the condi- tion to be used in construction, (3) Studs welded to other than Groups I or II steels listed in Table 3.1 7.6.2 Responsibilities for Tests. The Contractor or stud applicator shall be responsible for the performance of these tests. Tests may be performed by the Contractor or stud applicator, the stud manufacturer, or by another test- ing agency satisfactory to all parties involved. 7.6.3 Preparation of Specimens 7.6.3.1 Test Specimens. To qualify applications involy- ing materials listed in Table 3.1, Groups T and T: specimens may be prepared using ASTM A 36 steel base materials or base materials listed in Table 3.1, Groups T and Tl 7.63.2 Recorded Information. To qualify applica- tions involving materials other than those listed in Table 3.1, Groups I and Il the test specimen base material shall be of the chemical, physical and grade specifications to be used in production, 7.64 Number of Specimens. Ten specimens shall be welded consecutively using recommended procedures and settings for each diameter, position, and surface geometry 7.65 Test Required. The ten specimens shall be tested using one or more of the following methods: bending, torquing, or tensioning, 7.6.6 Test Methods 7.6.6.1 Bend Test. Studs shall be tested by alter- nately bending 30° in opposite directions in a typical test fixture as shown in Annex IX, Figure IX-1 until failure ‘occurs, Type C studs, when bent 90 degrees, shall be bent ‘over a pin with a diameter of 4 times the diameter of the stud, Altematively, studs may be bent 90° from their ‘original axis, In either case, a stud application shall be ‘considered qualified ifthe studs are bent 90° and fracture ‘occurs in the plate or shape material or in the shank of the stud and notin the weld, 7.6.6.2 Torque Test. Studs shall be torque tested using a torque test arrangement that is substantially in ‘conformance with Figure 7.3. A stud application shail be ‘considered qualified if all test specimens are torqued to destruetion without failure in the weld. 7.6.6.3 Tension Test. Studs shall be tension tested to destruetion using any machine capable of supplying the ‘SECTION 7. STUD WELDING requited force. A stud application shall be considered qualified ifthe test specimens do not fail in the wel. 7.6.1 Application Qualification Test Data. Application Qualification Test Data shall include the following: (1) Drawings that show shapes and dimensions of studs and are shields (@) A complete description of stud and base materials, and a description (part number) of the are shield. (3) Welding position and settings (curren, time). (4) A record, which shall be made for each qualifien- tion and shall be available for each contract. A suggested WPSIPQR form for nonprequalified application may be found in Annex E, 7.7 Production Control ‘IA Pre-Production Testing TIAA Start of Shift. Before production welding ‘with a particular set-up and with a given size and type of stud, and at the beginning of each day’s or shift’s produc- tion, testing shall be performed on the first two studs that are welded. The stud technique may be developed on a piece of material similar to the production member in thickness and properties. If actual production thickness is not available, the thickness may vary ++ 25%. All test studs shall be welded in the same general position as required on the production member (flat, vertical, or overhead). 7.1.2 Production Member Option. Instead of being welded to separate material, the test studs may be ‘welded on the production member, except when separate plates are required by 7.7.1.. 7.74.3 Flash Requirement. The test studs shall be visually examined. They shall exhibit full 360° flash with no evidence of undercut into the stud base. 7.7.1.4 Bending. In addition to visual examination, the test shall consist of bending the studs after they are al- lowed to cool, to an angle of approximately 30° from their original axes by either striking the studs with a hammer on the unwelded end or placing a pipe or other suitable hol- low device over the stud and manually or mechanically bending the stud. At temperatures below 50°F [10°C], bending shall preferably be done by continuous slow ap- plication of load. For threaded studs, the torque test of Figure 7.3 shal be substiuted for the bend test. 7.7.18 Event of Failure. If on visual examination the test studs do not exhibit 360° flash, or if on testing, failure occurs in the weld zone of either stud, the proce- dure shall be corrected, and two more studs shall be ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 ‘welded to separate material or on the production member and tested in conformance with the provisions of 7.7.1.3 ‘and 7.7.1.4. If either of the second two studs fails, addi- tional welding shall be continued on separate plates until two consecutive studs are tested and found to be satisfac- tory before any more production studs are welded to the member. 7.72 Production Welding. Once production welding has begun, any changes made to the welding setup, as de- termined in 7.7.1, shall require that the testing in 7.7.1.3, and 7.7.1.4 be performed prior to resuming production welding 7.73 Repair of Studs. In production, studs on which a full 360° flash is not obtained may, at the option of the Contractor, be repaired by adding the minimum fillet weld as required by 7.5.5 in place of the missing flash. ‘The repair weld shall extend at [east 3/8 in, [10 mm] be- ‘yond each end of the discontinuity being repaired. 7.74 Operator Qualification. The pre-production test required by 7.7.1, if successful, shall also serve to qualify the stud welding operator. Before any production studs ‘are welded by an operator not involved in the pre- production set-up of 7.7.1, the first two studs welded by the operator shall have been tested in conformance with the provisions of 7.7.1.3 and 7.7.14. When the two ‘welded studs have been tested and found satisfactory, the ‘operator may then weld production studs, 7.75 Removal Area Repair. If an unacceptable stud has been removed from a component subjected to tensile stresses, the area from which the stud was removed shall bbe made smooth and flush. Where in such areas the base ‘metal has been pulled out in the course of stud removal, SMAW with low-hydrogen electrodes in conformance with the requirements of this code shall be used to fill the pockets, and the weld surface shall be flush, In compression areas of members, if stud fsilures are ‘confined to shanks or fusion zones of studs, a new stud may be welded adjacent to each unacceptable area in lieu of repair and replacement on the existing weld area (see 7.4.5). If base metal is pulled out during stud removal, the repair provisions shall be the same as for tension areas except that when the depth of discontinuity is the lesser of 1/8 in, [3 mm] or 7% of the base metal thick- ness, the discontinuity may be faired by grinding in lieu of filling with weld metal. Where a replacement stud is to be provided, the base metal repair shall be made prior to ‘welding the replacement stud. Replacement studs (other than threaded type which should be torque tested) shall be tested by bending to an angle of approximately 15° from their original axes. The areas of components ex- posed to view in completed structures shall be made smooth and flush where a stud has been removed. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 7.8 Fabrication and Verification Inspection Requirements 78.1 Visual Inspection. If a visual inspection reveals any stud that does not show a full 360° flash or any stud that has been repaired by welding, such stud shall be bent to an angle of approximately 15° from its original axis. ‘Threaded studs shall be torque tested. The method of bending shall be in conformance with 7.7.1.4, The direc- tion of bending for studs with less than a 360° flash shall be opposite to the missing portion of the flash, Torque testing shall be in conformance with Figure 7.3, 78.2 Additional Tests. The Verification Inspector, ‘where conditions warrant, may select a reasonable mum ber of additional studs t0 be subjected to the tests de- scribed in 7.8.1 78.3 Bent Stud Acceptance Criteria, The bent stud shear connectors (Type B) and deformed anchors (Type CC) and other studs to be embedded in concrete (Type A) that show no sign of failure shall be acceptable for use and left in the bent position. All bending and straighten- ing for fabrication and inspection requirements when re- SECTION 7, STUD WELDING quired shall be done without heating, before completion Of the production stud welding operation, except as oth- cenwise provided in the contract, and as approved by the Engineer. 784 Torque Test Acceptance Criteria. Threaded studs (Type A) torque tested to the proof load torque level in Figure 7.3 that show no sign of failure shall be acceptable for use, 78.5 Engineering Judgment. If, inthe judgment of the Engineer, studs welded during the progress of the work are not in conformance with code provisions, as indi ‘cated by inspection and testing, corrective action shall be required of the Contractor. At the Contractor’s expense, the Contractor shall make the set-up changes necessary to ensure that studs subsequently welded will meet code requirements, 7.8.6 Owner's Option, At the option and the expense of | the owner, the Contractor may be required, at any time, to submit studs of the types used under the contract for a ‘qualification check in conformance with the procedures of Annex IX. ‘SECTION 7. STUD WELDING ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table 7.1 Mechanical Property Requirements for Studs (see 7.3.1) Table 7.2 Minimum Fillet Weld Size for Small Diameter Studs (see 7.5.5.4) Type Al Type B? Type C™ Stud Diameter Min Size Fille Tensile psimin ‘6100065 000 80000 in mm in mm strength MPa min 420430 Vath 76 Gehrw it 3116 5 Yield strength psi min 49000 51000 12 Va é (02% offet) MPamin 340380 en rity 4 soir, Pim 70 000 1 38 10 OS 0F) MIs min 2 ass in2in.min 17% 20% Elongation on Sx dia. min 149 Reduction 96 min 50% s0%% owe Type A studs shal be general purpose of any type and size used for purposes other than shear transfer in composite beam design ad ‘omsraton. “Tye it tds shal ho stds that are headed, ent, orf other confi raion in 1 in [12 ann, 378i. [16 msn], 3 i (20.0, 78 in (G2 mn, and Ui (25 mn) diameter tht ave used as an eset ‘omponct in composite beam design and constuction, “Type C studs shall be cold-worked deformed sce! bars manufac ‘used in confomnance with specification ASTM A 496 having a ‘minal diamotr equivalent dh dametr ofa pin wie having, the sme via per fot asthe deformed wire, ASTM A396 speci fies a maximum diameter of ©628 in. 16 mn) maximum. Any ba ‘supplied above that dameter sal have the same pysial character sts regarding deformations as requied by ASTM A 956 “Type C studs shall be manufactured fom the material described in 728, ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 Note: ‘Shank Diameter © 1 58 aia 718 27 159 190 +1000 “aot0 +0.000 “0010 +0,000 “ao1s +0.000 “oors +0.000 “nors 70.00 “028 +0.00 “025 +0.00 “038 +0.00 “O38 +0.00 fo38 L (Note 1) aa tek 1. Manufactured length bofore welding ‘Standard Dimensions, in. Length wy 216 16 16 a1e 016 Tolerances Head Diameter w, 14164 118 2 164 118 3 164 1-398 164 1518 + 164 ‘Standard Dimensions, am 216 216 216 218 216 254204 ai7 204 ang 204 349204 413204 ‘Minimam Hed Heht SECTION 7, STUD WELDING ' SLOTTED FIXTURES: TO HOLD STUD HEAD AND SPEGIMEN PLATE Figure 7.2—Typical Tension Test Fixture seo (see 7.3.2) 38 o 9132 ae 42 TA 7A 98 95 war Figure 7.1—Dimension and Tolerances of Standard- pe Shear Connectors (see 7.2.1) ‘SECTION 7. STUD WELDING ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Goneral Note: Dimensions of ast fixture deals should be appropriate to the size ofthe stud. The threads ofthe stud shall be clean and {fee of lubricant other than the residue of cuingieald forming lubricants inthe "as received" colton from the manufacturer. Required Proo! Torque for Testing Threaded Studs? Nominal Diameter WETA? Thread Proof Testing Torque™ ir ren sain Samm nova. _plehanm Series eat Teale 0236 —M6 0.037 204 10 SO7a4 3a Ta wa 64 0.036 232 28 UNE 6s. 90 032 208 2 uNe 59. 78 516 79 0.058 374 24 UNE 133 184 082 335 8 une no 164 oss Me 0.087 366 125 180-724 132 179 318 95 088 568 24 UNE 243 229 oo78 50.3 6 une 28 202 0304 to 0.090 580 18 80-724 262 385 m6 na ote 76a 2 UNE a9 sid 0.108 684 4 une 348 472 oar2 ta oat 43 175 180-724 457 o19 we var 0160 1032 20 UNE 588 rer 0142 318 8 une 522 708 oss Mt ore 115.0 20 180-724 rz 985 we 143, 0203 1310 18 UNE 39 1138 0182 74 2 une 752 1020 58 159 0258, 1645 18 UNE wa 1508 0228 1458 " unc 1038 1408 0830 M16 0243 157.0 20 180-724 1134 1537 ws 194 oar 2400 16 UNE 205.0 2700 0334 2155 10 unc ‘84.1 240.7 078720 0.380 2450 25 150-724 212 2999 0868 M22 0470 308.0 25 180-724 300.9 408.0 718 222 0509 84 1“ UNE 273 4439 062 298.1 9 une pera 4029 94s 2a oss7 353.0 30 180-724 3524 5185 1 254 on7e 4374 2 UNE 498.3 6787 0.606 3910 8 Nc 445.4 5080 Nas 4. Torque figures are based on Type A threaded studs wih a minimum yield stress of 49000 psi (340 MPa) 2. Mean Eflecive Thread Area (MLE.TA) shal be defined asthe eflecve sttess area based on a mean diameter taken approximately ‘midway betwoen te minor and te pitch diameters 3. Values are calculated on a proof testing torque of 0.9 times Nominal Stud Diameter times 0.2 Friction Coefcient Factor times Mean Effective Thread Area tmes Minimum vila Stress for unpated studs in the as-ecelved condition. Piatng, coatings, or ollgrease ‘deposits will change the Friction Coeticient Factor. Figure 7.3—Torque Testing Arrangement and Table of Testing Torques (see 7.6.6.2) ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 8. Strengthening and Repairing Existing Structures 8.1 General ‘Strengthening or repairing an existing structure shall consist of modifications to meet design requirements specified by the Engineer. The Engineer shall prepare comprehensive plan for the work. Such plans shall include, but are not limited to, design, workmanship, inspection and documentation. Except as modified in this section, all provisions of this code shall apply equally to the strengthening and repairing of existing structures, including heat straightening of distorted members. 8.2 Base Metal 8.2.1 Investigation. Before preparing drawings and specifications for strengthening or repairing existing structures, the types of base metal used in the original structure shall be determined either from existing draw- ings, specifications or from representative base-metal tests, 8.2.2 Suitability for Welding. The suitability of the base metal for welding shall be established (see Table C8.1 for guidance). 8.2.3 Other Base Metals. Where base metals other than those listed in Table 3.1 are to be joined, special consid- eration by the Engineer shall be given to the selection of filler metal and WPSs, 8.3 Design for Strengthening and Repair 83.1 Design Process. The design process shall consider applicable governing code provisions and other parts of the general specifications, The Engineer shall specify the type and extent of survey necessary to identify existing conditions that require strengthening or repair in order to satisfy applicable criteria, 8.3.2 Stress Analysis. An analysis of stresses in the area affected by the strengthening or repair shall be made. Stress levels shall be established for all in-situ dead and live load cases. Consideration shall be made for accumu- lated damage that members may have sustained in past 833 Fatigue History. Members subject o eyelic load- ing shall be designed according to the requirements for fatigue stresses. The previous loading history shall be ‘considered in the design. When the loading history is not available, it shall be estimated. 83.4 Restoration or Replacement. Determination shall be made whether the repairs should consist of restoring corroded or otherwise damaged parts or of replacing entire members. 8.3.5 Loading During Operations. The Engineer shall determine the extent to which a member will be allowed to carry loads while heating, welding or thermal cutting is performed, When necessary, the loads shall be reduced. ‘The local and general stability of the member shall be in- vestigated, considering the effeet of elevated temperature extending over parts of the cross-sectional area, 18.3.6 Existing Connections. Existing connections in structures requiting strengthening or repair shall be eval- uated for design adequacy and reinforced as necessary. 8.3.7 Use of Existing Fasteners. When design calcula- tions show rivets or bolts will be overstressed by the new total load, only existing dead load shall be assigned to them. Ifrivets or bolts are overstressed by dead load alone ‘or are subject to cyclic londing, then sufficient base metal ‘and welding shall be added to support the total load. 8.4 Fatigue Life Enhancement ‘84.1. Methods. The following methods of recondition- ing critical weld details may be used when written proce- dures have been approved by the Engineer: ‘SECTION 8, STRENGTHENING AND REPAIRING EXISTING STRUCTURES (1) Profile Improvement. Reshaping the weld face by arinding with a carbide burr to obtain a concave profile ‘with a smooth transition from base material to weld, (2) Toe Grinding. Reshaping only the weld toes by grinding with a burr or pencil grinder. (3) Peening. Shot pening of weld surface, or hammer pening of weld toes. (4) TIG Dressing. Reshaping of weld toe by the re- ‘melting of existing weld metal with heat from GTAW are (no filler metal used). (8) Toe Grinding plus Hammer Peening. When used together, the benefits are cumulative. 84.2 Stress Range Increase. The Engineer shall estab- lish the appropriate increase in the allowable stress range. 8.5 Workmanship and Technique 8.5.1 Base-Metal Condition, Base metal to be repaired and surfaces of existing base metal in contact with new ‘base metal shall be cleaned of dirt, rust and other foreign matter except adherent paint film as per SSPC SP2 (Hand Tool Cleaning). The portions of such surfaces which will be welded shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter including paint for at Ieast 2 in, [50 mm] from the root ofthe weld 85.2 Member Discontinuities. When required by the Engineer, unacceptable discontinuities in the member being repaired or strengthened shall be corrected prior to heat straightening, heat curving, ot welding. ‘AWS D1.1/01.1M2002 8.5.3 Weld Repairs. If weld repairs are required, they shall be made in conformance with 5.26, as applicable. 8.5.4 Base Metal of Insufficient Thickness, Base metal having insufficient thickness to develop the required ‘weld size or required capacity shall be, as determined by the Engineer: (1) built up with weld metal to the required thickness, (2) cut back until adequate thickness is avail- able, (3) reinforced with additional base metal, or (4) re- moved and replaced with base metal of adequate thickness or strength, 88.8 Heat Straightening. When heat straightening or heat curving methods are used, the maximum tempera- ture of heated areas as measured by approved methods shall not exceed 1100°F [600°C] for quenched and tem- pered steel, nor 1200°F [650°C] for other steels. Acceler- ated cooling of steel above 600°F [315°C] shall be prohibited, 8.5.6 Welding Sequence. In strengthening or repairing members by the addition of base metal or weld metal, or both, welding and weld sequencing shall, as far as practi- cable, result in a balanced heat input about the neutral axis to minimize distortion and residual stresses. 8.6 Quality ‘8.6.1 Visual Inspection. All members and welds af- fected by the work shall be visually inspected in con- formance with the Engineer's comprehensive plan 8.6.2 NDT. The method, extent, and acceptance eriteria of NDT shall be specified in the contract documents. ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Annexes Mandatory Information (These Annexes contain information and requitements that are considered a part ofthe standard.) Annex Effective Throat Annex II Effective Throats of Fillet Welds in Skewed T-Joints Annex III Requitements for Impact Testing Annex IV WPS Requirements ‘Annex V Weld Quality Requirements for Tension Joints in Cyclcally Loaded Structures Annex VI Flatness of Girder Webs—Statically Loaded Structures ‘Annex VIL Flatness of Girder Webs—Cyelicslly Loaded Structures ‘Annex VIII Tempersture-Moisture Content Charts Annex IX Manufacturers Stud Base Qualification Requirements, ‘Annex X Qualification and Calibration of UT Units with Other Approved UT Reference Blocks Annex XI Guideline on Altemative Methods for Determining Preheat Annex X11 Symbols for Tubular Connection Design Nonmandatory Information (These Annexes are not considered a part of the standard and are provided for information purposes only.) Annex A Short Citeuiting Transfer (GMAW-S) Annex B Terms and Definitions Annex C ide for Specification Writers Annex UT Equipment Qualification and Inspection Forms Annex E Sample Welding Forms Annex F Guidelines for Preparation of Technical Inquiries for the Structural Welding Committee AnnexG Local Dihedral Angles Annex H Contents of Prequalified WPSs Annex Safe Practices ‘Annex K UT of Welds by Altemative Techniques Annex Ovalizing Parameter Alpha Annex M_—_Code-Approved Base Metals and Filler Metals Requiring Qualification per Section 4 Annex List of Reference Documents AnnexO Filler Metal Strength Properties AmnexP Section 2 Reorganization ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Annex I Effective Throat (This Annex is part of AWS DI.1/D1.1M:2 for use with this standard.) Structural Welding Code—Steel, and includes mandatory requirements General Note: The effective throat ofa weld shall be defined as the minimum distance from the root ofthe joint ots face, with or without ‘ deduction of 1/8 in, [3 mm], less any convent ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Annex IT Effective Throats of Fillet Welds in Skewed T-Joints (This Annex is part of AWS DI.1/D1.1M:2 for use in this standard.) ‘Table II-1 is tabulation showing equivalent leg size factors for the range of dihedral angles between 60° and 135°, assuming no root opening. Root opening(s) 1/16 in. [2 mm] or greater, but not exceeding 3/16 in. [5 mm}, shall be added directly to the leg size. The requited leg size for fillet welds in skewed joints shall be calculated using the equivalent leg size factor for correct dihedral angle, as shown in the example, EXAMPLE (US, Customary Units) Given: Skewed T-joint, angle: 75%; root opening: 1/16 (0.063) in Strength equivalent to 90° fillet weld of size: 5/16 (0.313) in (1) Factor for 75° from Table TI-1: 0.86 (2) Equivalent leg size, w, of skewed joint, without root opening: w=0,86% 0.313 3) With root opening of (4) Required leg size, w of skewed fillet weld: [(2) + (3)] (5) Rounding up to a practical dimension: w= 3/8 in, Required Procedure: EXAMPLE (SI Units) Given: Skewed T-joint, angle: 75°; root opening: Structural Welding Code—Steel, and includes mandatory requirements Required: Strength equivalent 10 90° fillet weld of size: 8 mm. Procedure: (1) Factor for 75° from Table II-1: 0.86 2) Equivalent teg size, w, of skewed joint, ‘without root opening: w= 0.86%8 = 69mm 3) With root opening of 2mm (4) Required leg size, w, of 89mm skewed filet weld: [(2) + 3)] (5) Rounding up to a practical dimension: w=9.0mm For fillet welds having equal measured legs (Wa), the distance from the root of the joint to the face of the zgrammatic weld ({,) may be calculated as follows: For root openings > 1/16 in, [2 mm] and < 3/16 in, [5 mm}, use 2k For root openings < 1/16 in. [2 mm], use R, = Oandt, = t, where the measured leg of such fillet weld (w,) is the perpendicular distance from the surface ofthe joint to the ‘opposite toe, and (R) is the root opening, if any, between parts (see Figure 3.11). Acceptable root openings are de- fined in 5.22.1 ANNEX I ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Table I-41 Equivalent Fillet Weld Leg Size Factors for Skewed T-Joints Dihedral angle, 60" G 0 1s 30° a or oF ened! (Tl 076 0st 086 091 0.96 1.00 103 size for same strength Dihedral angle, ¥ 100° 105° 110° 115° 120° 125° 130° 13° ores eae Li 116 119 123 12s 128 131 size for same strength ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Annex TIT Requirements for CVN Testing (This Annex is part of AWS DI.1/D1.1M:2 for use with this standard.) TI, General TIIL.1 The CVN test requirements and test procedures in this Annex shall apply only when specified in the con- tract drawings or specifications in conformance with 5.26.5(3)[d] and 4.1.1.3, and Table 3.1 of this code. While the requirements of this Annex do not addres CWN testing of hase metal, itis assumed that the base ‘metals are suitable for applications where CVN testing of the WPS is required. [111.2 The CVN test specimens shall be machined and tested in conformance with ASTM E 23, Standard Meth- ‘ods for Notched Bar Inpact Testing of Metallic Matert. als. for Type A Charpy (simple beam) Impact Specimen, ‘or ASTM A 370, Standard Test Method and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel Products TII2. Test Locations II12.1 The test location for individual CVN test speci- ‘mens, unless otherwise specified on contract drawings or specifications, shall be as shown in Figure 111-1 and Table 1-1 I112.2 The positioning of the notch for all CVN test spec mens shall be done by first machining the specimens from the test weld at the appropriate depth as shown in Figure IIl-l. The specimens should be made slightly overlength to allow for exact positioning of the notch, Next, the bars should be etched with a mild etchant such as 5% nital, to reveal the location of the weld fusion zone and HAZs. The centerline of the notch shall then be lo- Structural Welding Code—Steel, and includes mandatory requirements TH3. CVN Tests I113.1 There are two options for the number of CVN test specimens to be taken from a single test location: ‘Option A—3 specimens (Option B—S specimens 113.2. CVN test specimens shall be machined from the same welded test assembly made to determine other weld joint properties (see Figure 47. 48, 4,10, or 4.11), Where the size of the welded ist assemblies isnot su ient to satisfy all the mechanical testing specimen uirements, an additional welded test assembly shall be performed. The CVN test specimens shall be machined fiom the welded test assembly in whieh the tensile test T1133 When CVN testing is a requirement and a quali fied WPS exists which satisfies all requirements except for CVN testing. it shall be necessary only to prepare an ‘additional test weldment with sufficient material to pro- ‘vide the required CVN test specimens, The test plate shall be welded using that WPS, which conforms to the limits of Tables 4.1, 42, and 4.5, plus those supplemen- tary essential variables applicable only to CVN testing (Table 4.6). A new or revised POR shall be prepared and ‘new or revised WPS written to accommodate the quali- fication variables for CVN testing, T113.4 The longitudinal centerline of the specimens shall be transverse to the weld axis and the base notch shall be perpendicular (normal) to the surface unless otherwise specified in the contract drawings or specifications. I113.8 The standard 10 x 10 mm specimen shall be used where the test material thickness is 7/16 in, [11 mm] or cated in the specimens, as shown in Figure II- ‘gteater. Sub-sized specimens shall be used where the test ANNEX It ‘material thickness is less than 7/16 in, [11 mm), oF where ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 (2) Minimum average value—the value in which the the extraction of full-sized specimens is not possible due arithmetic mean of three specimens shall equal or exceed. to the shape of the weldment, When sub-sized specimen: are required, they shall be made to one of the dimensions shown in Table TIL2. (Note: the largest possible speci ‘mens shall_be machined from the qualification test 1113.6 The CVN test temperature shall be specified in the contract drawings or specifications. 113.7 When sub-sized specimens are required, and the ‘width of the specimen across the notch is less than 80% ‘ofthe base metal thickness, the test temperature shall be reduced in conformance with Table II-2, unless other- wise specified in the contract drawings or specifications III4. Test Requirements 114.1 Test requirements for welds between base metals ‘with specified minimum yield strengths of 50_ksi ‘Unless specified otherwise, in contract drawings or spec- ifications, the acceptance values for the CVN test re- ‘quirements described in TTT4.1 for welds between base metals with a specified minimum yield strength of 50 ksi [345 MPa] or less, are shown in Table MT-I, I114.3 If Option B (see IH13.1) is chosen, the specimens ‘with the highest and lowest values shall be discarded, leaving 3 specimens for evaluation. For both Option A ‘and the 3 remaining specimens of Option B, 2 of the 3 ‘values forthe specimens shall equsl or exceed the speci- fied minimum average value. One of the three may be lower than the specified minimum average value, but not lower than the specified minimum individual value, and the average of the three shall not be less than the mini- mum specified average value THIS. Retest 1115.1 When the requirements in 114.2 and I1]4.3 are not 345 MPa] or less shall not be less than the minimum met, one retest may be performed. Each individual value requirements in Table III-1, unless otherwise specified. fof the remaining three specimens shall equal or exceed ‘Test requirements for welds between base metals with a the minimum specified average value. Retest specimens Specified minimum yield strength greater than 50 ksi shall be removed from the original test weldment(s). If [345 MPa] shall be specified in the contract drawings ot specimens cannot be provided fiom these weldments, a specifications. These requirements may include, but are new test weldment shall be performed and all mechanical not limited to, absorbed energy, percent ductile fracture {ests required by this code shall be performed. appearance, and lateral expansion values. 114.2 The acceptance criteria for each test shall be spec: ified in contract drawings oF specifications, and shall ‘consist ofthe following: Q) Minimum individual value—the value in which III6. Reporting 16.1 All CVN test measured values requited by thi ‘code, contract documents, or specifications shall be re- ‘no one specimen may be below, and ported on the POR. ‘AWS D1.11D1.1M:2002 ANNEX I Table I-41 CVN Test Requirements (see 3) Minimum — Minimum — Minimum Minimum Average Individual Average Average Tex SpecinenAsarbed Abed Peat ater Welding ‘Test Number of Temperature Size Energy, Energy Shear Area, Expansion, Process! Lotion Specimen? MC tum el] RINE) Minin swaw craw Sw 2002: rn S.rt~—rC—C—”C“CtCiCi‘i‘(‘EU_C_Cis*tCtCtCiCtistizsCCss§ Feawss Feawe sions y me 5 SS —r———C—C=*=“‘“#R SFrrt—~—t—”—r—r—C—C—C—=C=‘" Nowe A WPS which combines FCAW-S with another welding process shall be specially tested to assure CVN tetera are meta the intrcebe- teen the weld deposit 2. Tho allemato mum of specimen allowod por est location is fv. The highest and lowes valves shall be discarded to minimize some of the seattor sormallyasscatd with CVN toting of welds and HAZS 3. Test temperature shal be specified in contract documents or specifications. When sub-sized specimens are required, and the width ofthe spec mens across th notch isis than 80% ofthe base metal thickness, the est temperature shall be reduced in conformance with Table 2, 4. Fullsize specineas sal be used hon est materials 7/16: [1 mh] oe thicker. Suy-sized specimens shal bo used when et malarial thickness isles than 7/1691 ma, or when weldmontgeomctry prohibits th removal of fl sized samples, 5. Applicable in welds between base masrias with a specified minimum yield strength (SMYS) of 50 ksi (348 MPal or less. Acceptance criteria for ‘welds betcen materials exceeding SYMS of $0 ks [345 MPa sal be speified in th contact documents or specifications. 6, Valus foe pecent shea and lateral expansion sal bo receded when specie in the contact document or speiieatos Table Ill-2. CVN Test Temperature Reduction (see III3.5) For sub-sized CVN test specimens where the width across the notch is less than 80% of the base metal thickness. ‘Test Temperature Reduction Below the Specified Test Temperature Specimen Size ‘mm F “c 10x10 ° 0 10x9 0 0 lox. 0 o 10x75 5 28 1x7 s) 45 10x67 10 56 lox6 1s 84 1oxs 20 mM 0x4 30 168 10x33 35 194 1ox3 40 4 10x25 30 278 "Example: IF design drawings oe specifications indicate that CVN tests shall be performed at 32°F [0°C] and 10 gn Ss subsized pocinens are wed the actual tet temperature Would be 12F [-11°C]. ‘General Note:The reduction inthe minimum acceptance energy values fr sub-szed specimens shal be determined in conformance with ASTM 370097, Tabled. an ANNEX It ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 SINGLE V-GROOVE: BUTT JOINT, CORNER JOINT (ALL TYPES) DOUBLE V-GROOVE: BUTT JOINT, ‘CORNER JOINT (ALL TYPES) ‘SINGLE BEVEL GROOVE: BUTT JOINT, "TWOINT, CORNER JOINT DOUBLE BEVEL GROOVE: BUTT JOINT, "TMOINT, CORNER JOINT (ALL TYPES) ‘A= CENTERLINE OF WELD ON SPECIMEN CENTERLINE (© = HAZ 2 mm FROM FUSION LINE 1D = HAZ 5 mm FROM FUSION LINE 1—CVN Test Specimen Locations (see 1112.1) ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Annex IV ‘WPS Requirements (This Annex is part of AWS D1.1/D1.1M:2002, Structural Welding Code—Steel, and includes mandatory requirements for use with this standard.) This part includes one table for use in Annex E for preparing Form E-1, Welding Procedure Specification (WPS), Table TV-1 covers the provisions of the code that may be modified when the WPS is qualified by test (see Section 4), Code Requirements that May be changed by WPS Qualification Tests (see 4.1.1) DIL1:2002 Provision Subject 33 Base Metal 323 Welding Processes 39,310,311, 312,313 Details of Welded Joints 33 Filler Metal Requirements 35 Preheat and Inerpass Temperature Requirements 532,532 Electrodes for SMAW Table 37 Mariemam diameter of electrode for SAW 372, ‘Cros seoton of SAW groove or filet weld 5331 Eletrodes and lx for SAW Table 37 Procedure for SAW with ingle electrode, parallel electrodes, and muhiple electrodes 534 Electrodes for GMAW and FCAW Procedure for GMAW and FCAW with single electrode Table 37 (Nore: GMAW and FCAW with multiple electades, GMAW-S, GTAW, EGW, and ESW do nothave prequalified status) ‘Gonerl Noto: Tho other code requirements no listed in Table 1V-I may bo changed when the WPS i stbishod by et 8003.6). ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 Annex V Weld Quality Requirements for Tension Joints in Cyclically Loaded Structures (This Annex isa part of AWS DI.1/D1.1M:2002, Sructural Welding Cde—Stee, and inchudes mandatory requirements for use with this standard.) ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES. ae 6 se 1s2IN v4} Ea I I! FLANGE-TO-WEB WELD EDGE OF | E2GEOF MATERIALS Yr ORTOE OR ROOT OF MATERIAL WELD sye2iN+ pale General Notes: "A—mirimum clearance allowed between edges of porosity or fuson-ype discontinuities 1/16 in. or larger. Larger of adjacent cisco ‘ulies governs, + X,—largest allowable porosity or fusion‘ype ciscontinuty fr in. jin thickness (soe Figure 6.4). + Xa. Xa, Xe—porosy of fusiontype discontinuity 16 in. o larger, but less than maximum allowable for 3d in, jin thickness. + Xe. X¢—Porosiy or fusion-ype discontinuity less than 1/6 in Porosity or fusion-ype discontinuity X; shall not be acceptable because tis within the minimum clearance allowed between edges of ‘such discontinuities (see 6.12.21 and Figure 64), Remainder of weld shall be acceptable, + Discontinuity size indicated is assumed to be its greatest dimension, ANNEX ‘AWS D1.4/01.1M:2002 [ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS se tINe—=| | [7 EDGE OF MATERIALS ORTOE OR ROOT OF FLANGE-TO-WEB WELD EDGE OF MATERIAL Xe x, X Xa Xe ae . WELD 19 Se 1IN25 57 ST 29 16 a a a a afb. aol Le General Notes: + -Ae=minimum cearance allowed between edges of porosity or fusiomtype dscontinulies 2 mm or larger. Larger of adjacent discont: ‘ulies governs, X;-

You might also like